--- 1/draft-ietf-nfsv4-rfc3010bis-01.txt 2006-02-05 00:48:42.000000000 +0100 +++ 2/draft-ietf-nfsv4-rfc3010bis-02.txt 2006-02-05 00:48:42.000000000 +0100 @@ -1,26 +1,26 @@ -NFS Version 4 Working Group S. Shepler +NFS version 4 Working Group S. Shepler INTERNET-DRAFT Sun Microsystems, Inc. -Document: draft-ietf-nfsv4-rfc3010bis-01.txt C. Beame +Document: draft-ietf-nfsv4-rfc3010bis-02.txt C. Beame Hummingbird Ltd. B. Callaghan Sun Microsystems, Inc. M. Eisler - Zambeel, Inc. + Network Appliance, Inc. D. Noveck Network Appliance, Inc. D. Robinson Sun Microsystems, Inc. R. Thurlow Sun Microsystems, Inc. - July 2002 + August 2002 NFS version 4 Protocol Status of this Memo This document is an Internet-Draft and is in full conformance with all provisions of Section 10 of RFC2026. Internet-Drafts are working documents of the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), its areas, and its working groups. Note that @@ -36,237 +36,255 @@ http://www.ietf.org/ietf/1id-abstracts.txt The list of Internet-Draft Shadow Directories can be accessed at http://www.ietf.org/shadow.html. Abstract NFS version 4 is a distributed file system protocol which owes heritage to NFS protocol versions 2 [RFC1094] and 3 [RFC1813]. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Unlike earlier versions, the NFS version 4 protocol supports traditional file access while integrating support for file locking and the mount protocol. In addition, support for strong security (and its negotiation), compound operations, client caching, and internationalization have been added. Of course, attention has been applied to making NFS version 4 operate well in an Internet environment. Copyright Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2000-2002). All Rights Reserved. Key Words The key words "MUST", "MUST NOT", "REQUIRED", "SHALL", "SHALL NOT", "SHOULD", "SHOULD NOT", "RECOMMENDED", "MAY", and "OPTIONAL" in this - document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. + document are to be interpreted as described in [RFC2119]. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Table of Contents 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1.1. Overview of NFS Version 4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1.1.1. RPC and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1.1.2. Procedure and Operation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1.1.3. File System Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1.1.3.1. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1.1.3.2. Attribute Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1.1.3.3. File System Replication and Migration . . . . . . . 10 - 1.1.4. OPEN and CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1.1.5. File locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1.1.6. Client Caching and Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1.2. General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 + 1.1. Inconsistencies of this Document with Section 18 . . . . . 7 + 1.2. Overview of NFS version 4 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 + 1.2.1. RPC and Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 + 1.2.2. Procedure and Operation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . 8 + 1.2.3. Filesystem Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 + 1.2.3.1. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 + 1.2.3.2. Attribute Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 + 1.2.3.3. Filesystem Replication and Migration . . . . . . . . 10 + 1.2.4. OPEN and CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 + 1.2.5. File locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 + 1.2.6. Client Caching and Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 + 1.3. General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 2. Protocol Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.1. Basic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 2.2. Structured Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 3. RPC and Security Flavor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 3.1. Ports and Transports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 3.2. Security Flavors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 3.2.1. Security mechanisms for NFS version 4 . . . . . . . . 20 - 3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as security triple . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 3.2.1.2. LIPKEY as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 3.2.1.3. SPKM-3 as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 3.3. Security Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 3.3.1. Security Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 3.3.2. SECINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 3.4. Callback RPC Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 - 4. Filehandles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 4.1.1. Root Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 - 4.1.2. Public Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 - 4.2. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 - 4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . 27 - 4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - 4.2.4. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle . . . 30 - 4.3. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration . . . . . . . 30 - 5. File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 - 5.1. Mandatory Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 - 5.2. Recommended Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 - 5.3. Named Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 - 5.4. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 35 - 5.5. Recommended Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 37 - 5.6. Interpreting owner and owner_group . . . . . . . . . . . 41 - 5.7. Character Case Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 - 5.8. Quota Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 - 5.9. Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 - 5.9.1. ACE type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 5.9.2. ACE flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 - 5.9.3. ACE Access Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 - 5.9.4. ACE who . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 + 3. RPC and Security Flavor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 + 3.1. Ports and Transports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 + 3.1.1. Client Retransmission Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 + 3.2. Security Flavors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 + 3.2.1. Security mechanisms for NFS version 4 . . . . . . . . 22 + 3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . 22 + 3.2.1.2. LIPKEY as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 + 3.2.1.3. SPKM-3 as a security triple . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 + 3.3. Security Negotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 + 3.3.1. SECINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 + 3.3.2. Security Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 + 3.4. Callback RPC Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 + 4. Filehandles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 + 4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 + 4.1.1. Root Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 + 4.1.2. Public Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 + 4.2. Filehandle Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 + 4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . 29 + 4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 + 4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 + 4.2.4. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle . . . 31 + 4.3. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration . . . . . . . 32 + 5. File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 + 5.1. Mandatory Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 + 5.2. Recommended Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 + 5.3. Named Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 + 5.4. Classification of Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 + 5.5. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 38 + 5.6. Recommended Attributes - Definitions . . . . . . . . . . 40 + 5.7. Time Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 + 5.8. Interpreting owner and owner_group . . . . . . . . . . . 45 + 5.9. Character Case Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 + 5.10. Quota Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 + 5.11. Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - 6. File System Migration and Replication . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 6.1. Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 6.2. Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 - 6.3. Interpretation of the fs_locations Attribute . . . . . . 50 - 6.4. Filehandle Recovery for Migration or Replication . . . . 51 - 7. NFS Server Name Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 - 7.1. Server Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 - 7.2. Browsing Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 - 7.3. Server Pseudo File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 - 7.4. Multiple Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 - 7.5. Filehandle Volatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 - 7.6. Exported Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 - 7.7. Mount Point Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 - 7.8. Security Policy and Name Space Presentation . . . . . . 54 - 8. File Locking and Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . 55 - 8.1. Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 - 8.1.1. Client ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 - 8.1.2. Server Release of Clientid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 - 8.1.3. nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition . . . . . . . . . 58 - 8.1.4. Use of the stateid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 - 8.1.5. Sequencing of Lock Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 - 8.1.6. Recovery from Replayed Requests . . . . . . . . . . . 61 - 8.1.7. Releasing nfs_lockowner State . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 - 8.2. Lock Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 - 8.3. Blocking Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 - 8.4. Lease Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 - 8.5. Crash Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 - 8.5.1. Client Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 - 8.5.2. Server Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 - 8.5.3. Network Partitions and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 66 - 8.6. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort . . . . . 67 - 8.7. Server Revocation of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 - 8.8. Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 - 8.9. OPEN/CLOSE Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 - 8.10. Open Upgrade and Downgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 - 8.11. Short and Long Leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 - 8.12. Clocks and Calculating Lease Expiration . . . . . . . . 71 - 8.13. Migration, Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . 71 - 8.13.1. Migration and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 - 8.13.2. Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 - 8.13.3. Notification of Migrated Lease . . . . . . . . . . . 73 - 9. Client-Side Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 - 9.1. Performance Challenges for Client-Side Caching . . . . . 74 - 9.2. Delegation and Callbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 - 9.2.1. Delegation Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 - 9.3. Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 - 9.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 - 9.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 - 9.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking . . . . . . . 80 - 9.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 - 9.4. Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 - 9.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . 84 + 5.11.1. ACE type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 + 5.11.2. ACE Access Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 + 5.11.3. ACE flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 + 5.11.4. ACE who . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 + 5.11.5. Mode Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 + 5.11.6. Mode and ACL Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 + 5.11.7. mounted_on_fileid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 + 6. Filesystem Migration and Replication . . . . . . . . . . . 57 + 6.1. Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 + 6.2. Migration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 + 6.3. Interpretation of the fs_locations Attribute . . . . . . 58 + 6.4. Filehandle Recovery for Migration or Replication . . . . 59 + 7. NFS Server Name Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 + 7.1. Server Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 + 7.2. Browsing Exports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 + 7.3. Server Pseudo Filesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 + 7.4. Multiple Roots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 + 7.5. Filehandle Volatility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 + 7.6. Exported Root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 + 7.7. Mount Point Crossing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 + 7.8. Security Policy and Name Space Presentation . . . . . . 62 + 8. File Locking and Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . 64 + 8.1. Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 + 8.1.1. Client ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 + 8.1.2. Server Release of Clientid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 + 8.1.3. lock_owner and stateid Definition . . . . . . . . . . 68 + 8.1.4. Use of the stateid and Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 + 8.1.5. Sequencing of Lock Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 + 8.1.6. Recovery from Replayed Requests . . . . . . . . . . . 72 + 8.1.7. Releasing lock_owner State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 + 8.1.8. Use of Open Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 + 8.2. Lock Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 + 8.3. Upgrading and Downgrading Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 + 8.4. Blocking Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 + 8.5. Lease Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 + 8.6. Crash Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 + 8.6.1. Client Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 + 8.6.2. Server Failure and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 + 8.6.3. Network Partitions and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . 79 + 8.7. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort . . . . . 80 + 8.8. Server Revocation of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 + 8.9. Share Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 + 8.10. OPEN/CLOSE Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 + 8.10.1. Close and Retention of State Information . . . . . . 83 + 8.11. Open Upgrade and Downgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 + 8.12. Short and Long Leases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 + 8.13. Clocks, Propagation Delay, and Calculating Lease + Expiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 + 8.14. Migration, Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . 85 + 8.14.1. Migration and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 + 8.14.2. Replication and State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 + 8.14.3. Notification of Migrated Lease . . . . . . . . . . . 86 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - 9.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 - 9.4.3. Recall of Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 - 9.4.4. Delegation Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 - 9.5. Data Caching and Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 - 9.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation . . . . 88 - 9.6. Attribute Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 - 9.7. Name Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 - 9.8. Directory Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 - 10. Minor Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 - 11. Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 - 11.1. Universal Versus Local Character Sets . . . . . . . . . 96 - 11.2. Overview of Universal Character Set Standards . . . . . 97 - 11.3. Difficulties with UCS-4, UCS-2, Unicode . . . . . . . . 98 - 11.4. UTF-8 and its solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 - 11.5. Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 - 12. Error Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 - 13. NFS Version 4 Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 - 13.1. Compound Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 - 13.2. Evaluation of a Compound Request . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - 13.3. Synchronous Modifying Operations . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - 13.4. Operation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 - 14. NFS Version 4 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 - 14.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 108 - 14.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . . . 109 - 14.2.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights . . . . . . 112 - 14.2.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File . . . . . . . . . . . 115 - 14.2.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data . . . . . . 117 - 14.2.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object 120 + 8.14.4. Migration and the Lease_time Attribute . . . . . . . 87 + 9. Client-Side Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 + 9.1. Performance Challenges for Client-Side Caching . . . . . 88 + 9.2. Delegation and Callbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 + 9.2.1. Delegation Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 + 9.3. Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 + 9.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 + 9.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 + 9.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking . . . . . . . 95 + 9.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 + 9.4. Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 + 9.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching . . . . . . . . . . . 99 + 9.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 + 9.4.3. Handling of CB_GETATTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 + 9.4.4. Recall of Open Delegation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 + 9.4.5. Delegation Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 + 9.5. Data Caching and Revocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 + 9.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation . . . . 104 + 9.6. Attribute Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 + 9.7. Name Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 + 9.8. Directory Caching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 + 10. Minor Versioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 + 11. Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 + 11.1. Universal Versus Local Character Sets . . . . . . . . . 113 + 11.2. Overview of Universal Character Set Standards . . . . . 114 + 11.3. Difficulties with UCS-4, UCS-2, Unicode . . . . . . . . 115 + 11.4. UTF-8 and its solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 + 11.5. Normalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 + 11.6. UTF-8 Related Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 + 12. Error Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 + 13. NFS version 4 Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 + 13.1. Compound Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 + 13.2. Evaluation of a Compound Request . . . . . . . . . . . 125 + 13.3. Synchronous Modifying Operations . . . . . . . . . . . 125 + 13.4. Operation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 + 14. NFS version 4 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 + 14.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 127 + 14.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . . . 128 + 14.2.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights . . . . . . 131 + 14.2.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File . . . . . . . . . . . 134 + 14.2.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data . . . . . . 136 + 14.2.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object 139 14.2.5. Operation 7: DELEGPURGE - Purge Delegations Awaiting - Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 - 14.2.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation . . . . 124 - 14.2.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . . . 125 - 14.2.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle . . . . 127 - 14.2.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File . . . . . 129 - 14.2.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock . . . . . . . . . . 131 - 14.2.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test For Lock . . . . . . . . 134 - 14.2.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File . . . . . . . . . 136 - 14.2.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename . . . . . . . 138 - 14.2.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory . . 141 - 14.2.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in - Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 - 14.2.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File . . . . . . 145 - 14.2.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute - Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 - 14.2.18. Operation 20: OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open . . . . . 156 - 14.2.19. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access159 - 14.2.20. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle . . . . 161 - 14.2.21. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle . . . 162 - 14.2.22. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle . . . 164 - 14.2.23. Operation 25: READ - Read from File . . . . . . . . 165 - 14.2.24. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory . . . . . . . 168 - 14.2.25. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link . . . . 172 + Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 + 14.2.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation . . . . 143 + 14.2.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . . . 144 + 14.2.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle . . . . 146 + 14.2.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File . . . . . 148 + 14.2.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock . . . . . . . . . . 150 + 14.2.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test For Lock . . . . . . . . 154 + 14.2.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File . . . . . . . . . 156 + 14.2.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename . . . . . . . 158 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - 14.2.26. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object . . 174 - 14.2.27. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry . . . 176 - 14.2.28. Operation 30: RENEW - Renew a Lease . . . . . . . . 179 - 14.2.29. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle . 180 - 14.2.30. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle . . . 182 - 14.2.31. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security . 183 - 14.2.32. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes . . . . . . . 186 - 14.2.33. Operation 35: SETCLIENTID - Negotiate Clientid . . . 189 - 14.2.34. Operation 36: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM - Confirm Clientid 191 - 14.2.35. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes . . . 192 - 14.2.36. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File . . . . . . . . 194 + 14.2.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory . . 161 + 14.2.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in + Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 + 14.2.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File . . . . . . 164 + 14.2.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute + Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 + 14.2.18. Operation 20: OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open . . . . . 176 + 14.2.19. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access179 + 14.2.20. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle . . . . 181 + 14.2.21. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle . . . 182 + 14.2.22. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle . . . 184 + 14.2.23. Operation 25: READ - Read from File . . . . . . . . 185 + 14.2.24. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory . . . . . . . 188 + 14.2.25. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link . . . . 192 + 14.2.26. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object . . 194 + 14.2.27. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry . . . 197 + 14.2.28. Operation 30: RENEW - Renew a Lease . . . . . . . . 200 + 14.2.29. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle . 201 + 14.2.30. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle . . . 203 + 14.2.31. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security . 204 + 14.2.32. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes . . . . . . . 208 + 14.2.33. Operation 35: SETCLIENTID - Negotiate Clientid . . . 211 + 14.2.34. Operation 36: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM - Confirm Clientid 215 + 14.2.35. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes . . . 219 + 14.2.36. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File . . . . . . . . 221 14.2.37. Operation 39: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER - Release Lockowner - State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 - 15. NFS Version 4 Callback Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 - 15.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . 199 - 15.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . 200 - 15.2.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . 202 - 15.2.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall an Open Delegation . 203 - 16. Security Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 - 17. IANA Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 - 17.1. Named Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 - 18. RPC definition file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 - 19. Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 - 20. Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 - 20.1. Editor's Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 - 20.2. Authors' Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 - 20.3. Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 - 21. Full Copyright Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 + State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 + 14.2.38. Operation 10044: ILLEGAL - Illegal operation . . . . 228 + 15. NFS version 4 Callback Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 + 15.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation . . . . . . . . . . 229 + 15.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations . . . . 230 + 15.2.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes . . . . . . 232 + 15.2.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall an Open Delegation . 234 + 15.2.3. Operation 10044: CB_ILLEGAL - Illegal Callback + Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 + 16. Security Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 + 17. IANA Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 + 17.1. Named Attribute Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 + 17.2. ONC RPC Network Identifiers (netids) . . . . . . . . . 238 + 18. RPC definition file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 + 19. Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 + 20. Authors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 + 20.1. Editor's Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 + 20.2. Authors' Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 + 20.3. Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 + 21. Full Copyright Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 1. Introduction The NFS version 4 protocol is a further revision of the NFS protocol defined already by versions 2 [RFC1094] and 3 [RFC1813]. It retains the essential characteristics of previous versions: design for easy recovery, independent of transport protocols, operating systems and filesystems, simplicity, and good performance. The NFS version 4 revision has the following goals: @@ -279,44 +297,54 @@ o Strong security with negotiation built into the protocol. The protocol builds on the work of the ONCRPC working group in supporting the RPCSEC_GSS protocol. Additionally, the NFS version 4 protocol provides a mechanism to allow clients and servers the ability to negotiate security and require clients and servers to support a minimal set of security schemes. o Good cross-platform interoperability. - The protocol features a file system model that provides a - useful, common set of features that does not unduly favor one - file system or operating system over another. + The protocol features a filesystem model that provides a useful, + common set of features that does not unduly favor one filesystem + or operating system over another. o Designed for protocol extensions. The protocol is designed to accept standard extensions that do not compromise backward compatibility. -1.1. Overview of NFS Version 4 Features +1.1. Inconsistencies of this Document with Section 18 + + Section 18, RPC Definition File, contains the definitions in XDR + description language of the constructs used by the protocol. Prior + to Section 18, several of the constructs are reproduced for purposes + of explanation. The reader is warned of the possibility of errors in + the reproduced constructs outside of Section 18. For any part of the + document that is inconsistent with Section 18, Section 18 is to be + considered authoritative. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +1.2. Overview of NFS version 4 Features To provide a reasonable context for the reader, the major features of NFS version 4 protocol will be reviewed in brief. This will be done to provide an appropriate context for both the reader who is familiar with the previous versions of the NFS protocol and the reader that is new to the NFS protocols. For the reader new to the NFS protocols, there is still a fundamental knowledge that is expected. The reader should be familiar with the XDR and RPC protocols as described in [RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. A basic knowledge of file systems and distributed file systems is expected as well. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - -1.1.1. RPC and Security +1.2.1. RPC and Security As with previous versions of NFS, the External Data Representation (XDR) and Remote Procedure Call (RPC) mechanisms used for the NFS version 4 protocol are those defined in [RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. To meet end to end security requirements, the RPCSEC_GSS framework [RFC2203] will be used to extend the basic RPC security. With the use of RPCSEC_GSS, various mechanisms can be provided to offer authentication, integrity, and privacy to the NFS version 4 protocol. Kerberos V5 will be used as described in [RFC1964] to provide one security framework. The LIPKEY GSS-API mechanism described in @@ -326,104 +354,102 @@ version 4 security. To enable in-band security negotiation, the NFS version 4 protocol has added a new operation which provides the client a method of querying the server about its policies regarding which security mechanisms must be used for access to the server's file system resources. With this, the client can securely match the security mechanism that meets the policies specified at both the client and server. -1.1.2. Procedure and Operation Structure +1.2.2. Procedure and Operation Structure A significant departure from the previous versions of the NFS protocol is the introduction of the COMPOUND procedure. For the NFS version 4 protocol, there are two RPC procedures, NULL and COMPOUND. The COMPOUND procedure is defined in terms of operations and these operations correspond more closely to the traditional NFS procedures. With the use of the COMPOUND procedure, the client is able to build simple or complex requests. These COMPOUND requests allow for a reduction in the number of RPCs needed for logical file system operations. For example, without previous contact with a server a client will be able to read data from a file in one request by combining LOOKUP, OPEN, and READ operations in a single COMPOUND RPC. With previous versions of the NFS protocol, this type of single + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + request was not possible. The model used for COMPOUND is very simple. There is no logical OR or ANDing of operations. The operations combined within a COMPOUND request are evaluated in order by the server. Once an operation returns a failing result, the evaluation ends and the results of all evaluated operations are returned to the client. The NFS version 4 protocol continues to have the client refer to a file or directory at the server by a "filehandle". The COMPOUND procedure has a method of passing a filehandle from one operation to another within the sequence of operations. There is a concept of a "current filehandle" and "saved filehandle". Most operations use the - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - "current filehandle" as the file system object to operate upon. The "saved filehandle" is used as temporary filehandle storage within a COMPOUND procedure as well as an additional operand for certain operations. -1.1.3. File System Model +1.2.3. Filesystem Model The general file system model used for the NFS version 4 protocol is - the same as previous versions. The server file system is - hierarchical with the regular files contained within being treated as - opaque byte streams. In a slight departure, file and directory names - are encoded with UTF-8 to deal with the basics of - internationalization. + the same as previous versions. The server filesystem is hierarchical + with the regular files contained within being treated as opaque byte + streams. In a slight departure, file and directory names are encoded + with UTF-8 to deal with the basics of internationalization. The NFS version 4 protocol does not require a separate protocol to provide for the initial mapping between path name and filehandle. Instead of using the older MOUNT protocol for this mapping, the server provides a ROOT filehandle that represents the logical root or top of the file system tree provided by the server. The server provides multiple file systems by glueing them together with pseudo - file systems. These pseudo file systems provide for potential gaps - in the path names between real file systems. + filesystems. These pseudo filesystems provide for potential gaps in + the path names between real filesystems. -1.1.3.1. Filehandle Types +1.2.3.1. Filehandle Types In previous versions of the NFS protocol, the filehandle provided by the server was guaranteed to be valid or persistent for the lifetime of the file system object to which it referred. For some server implementations, this persistence requirement has been difficult to meet. For the NFS version 4 protocol, this requirement has been relaxed by introducing another type of filehandle, volatile. With persistent and volatile filehandle types, the server implementation can match the abilities of the file system at the server along with the operating environment. The client will have knowledge of the type of filehandle being provided by the server and can be prepared to deal with the semantics of each. -1.1.3.2. Attribute Types +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +1.2.3.2. Attribute Types The NFS version 4 protocol introduces three classes of file system or file attributes. Like the additional filehandle type, the classification of file attributes has been done to ease server implementations along with extending the overall functionality of the NFS protocol. This attribute model is structured to be extensible such that new attributes can be introduced in minor revisions of the protocol without requiring significant rework. The three classifications are: mandatory, recommended and named attributes. This is a significant departure from the previous - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - attribute model used in the NFS protocol. Previously, the attributes - for the file system and file objects were a fixed set of mainly Unix + for the filesystem and file objects were a fixed set of mainly UNIX attributes. If the server or client did not support a particular attribute, it would have to simulate the attribute the best it could. Mandatory attributes are the minimal set of file or file system attributes that must be provided by the server and must be properly represented by the server. Recommended attributes represent different file system types and operating environments. The recommended attributes will allow for better interoperability and the inclusion of more operating environments. The mandatory and recommended attribute sets are traditional file or file system @@ -432,59 +458,57 @@ directory or file and referred to by a string name. Named attributes are meant to be used by client applications as a method to associate application specific data with a regular file or directory. One significant addition to the recommended set of file attributes is the Access Control List (ACL) attribute. This attribute provides for directory and file access control beyond the model used in previous versions of the NFS protocol. The ACL definition allows for specification of user and group level access control. -1.1.3.3. File System Replication and Migration +1.2.3.3. Filesystem Replication and Migration With the use of a special file attribute, the ability to migrate or replicate server file systems is enabled within the protocol. The file system locations attribute provides a method for the client to - probe the server about the location of a file system. In the event - of a migration of a file system, the client will receive an error - when operating on the file system and it can then query as to the new - file system location. Similar steps are used for replication, the - client is able to query the server for the multiple available - locations of a particular file system. From this information, the - client can use its own policies to access the appropriate file system - location. + probe the server about the location of a filesystem. In the event of + a migration of a filesystem, the client will receive an error when + operating on the filesystem and it can then query as to the new file + system location. Similar steps are used for replication, the client + is able to query the server for the multiple available locations of a + particular filesystem. From this information, the client can use its + own policies to access the appropriate filesystem location. -1.1.4. OPEN and CLOSE +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +1.2.4. OPEN and CLOSE The NFS version 4 protocol introduces OPEN and CLOSE operations. The OPEN operation provides a single point where file lookup, creation, and share semantics can be combined. The CLOSE operation also provides for the release of state accumulated by OPEN. -1.1.5. File locking +1.2.5. File locking With the NFS version 4 protocol, the support for byte range file locking is part of the NFS protocol. The file locking support is - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - structured so that an RPC callback mechanism is not required. This is a departure from the previous versions of the NFS file locking protocol, Network Lock Manager (NLM). The state associated with file locks is maintained at the server under a lease-based model. The server defines a single lease period for all state held by a NFS client. If the client does not renew its lease within the defined period, all state associated with the client's lease may be released by the server. The client may renew its lease with use of the RENEW operation or implicitly by use of other operations (primarily READ). -1.1.6. Client Caching and Delegation +1.2.6. Client Caching and Delegation The file, attribute, and directory caching for the NFS version 4 protocol is similar to previous versions. Attributes and directory information are cached for a duration determined by the client. At the end of a predefined timeout, the client will query the server to see if the related file system object has been updated. For file data, the client checks its cache validity when the file is opened. A query is sent to the server to determine if the file has been changed. Based on this information, the client determines if @@ -499,33 +523,33 @@ client. When the server grants a delegation for a file to a client, the client is guaranteed certain semantics with respect to the sharing of that file with other clients. At OPEN, the server may provide the client either a read or write delegation for the file. If the client is granted a read delegation, it is assured that no other client has the ability to write to the file for the duration of the delegation. If the client is granted a write delegation, the client is assured that no other client has read or write access to the file. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Delegations can be recalled by the server. If another client requests access to the file in such a way that the access conflicts with the granted delegation, the server is able to notify the initial client and recall the delegation. This requires that a callback path exist between the server and client. If this callback path does not exist, then delegations can not be granted. The essence of a delegation is that it allows the client to locally service operations such as OPEN, CLOSE, LOCK, LOCKU, READ, WRITE without immediate interaction with the server. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - -1.2. General Definitions +1.3. General Definitions The following definitions are provided for the purpose of providing an appropriate context for the reader. Client The "client" is the entity that accesses the NFS server's resources. The client may be an application which contains the logic to access the NFS server directly. The client may also be the traditional operating system client remote file system services for a set of applications. @@ -546,39 +570,39 @@ lease period the lock may be revoked if the lease has not been extended. The lock must be revoked if a conflicting lock has been granted after the lease interval. All leases granted by a server have the same fixed interval. Note that the fixed interval was chosen to alleviate the expense a server would have in maintaining state about variable length leases across server failures. Lock The term "lock" is used to refer to both record (byte- - range) locks as well as file (share) locks unless + range) locks as well as share reservations unless specifically stated otherwise. Server The "Server" is the entity responsible for coordinating client access to a set of file systems. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Stable Storage NFS version 4 servers must be able to recover without data loss from multiple power failures (including cascading power failures, that is, several power failures in quick succession), operating system failures, and hardware failure of components other than the storage medium itself (for example, disk, nonvolatile RAM). Some examples of stable storage that are allowable for an NFS server include: -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - 1. Media commit of data, that is, the modified data has been successfully written to the disk media, for example, the disk platter. 2. An immediate reply disk drive with battery-backed on-drive intermediate storage or uninterruptible power system (UPS). 3. Server commit of data with battery-backed intermediate storage and recovery software. @@ -590,21 +614,21 @@ defines the open and locking state provided by the server for a specific open or lock owner for a specific file. Stateids composed of all bits 0 or all bits 1 have special meaning and are reserved values. Verifier A 64-bit quantity generated by the client that the server can use to determine if the client has restarted and lost all previous lock state. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 2. Protocol Data Types The syntax and semantics to describe the data types of the NFS version 4 protocol are defined in the XDR [RFC1832] and RPC [RFC1831] documents. The next sections build upon the XDR data types to define types and structures specific to this protocol. 2.1. Basic Data Types @@ -644,21 +668,21 @@ mode4 typedef uint32_t mode4; Mode attribute data type nfs_cookie4 typedef uint64_t nfs_cookie4; Opaque cookie value for READDIR nfs_fh4 typedef opaque nfs_fh4; Filehandle definition; NFS4_FHSIZE is defined as 128 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 nfs_ftype4 enum nfs_ftype4; Various defined file types nfsstat4 enum nfsstat4; Return value for operations offset4 typedef uint64_t offset4; Various offset designations (READ, WRITE, LOCK, COMMIT) @@ -666,63 +690,63 @@ Represents path name for LOOKUP, OPEN and others qop4 typedef uint32_t qop4; Quality of protection designation in SECINFO sec_oid4 typedef opaque sec_oid4<>; Security Object Identifier The sec_oid4 data type is not really opaque. Instead contains an ASN.1 OBJECT IDENTIFIER as used by GSS-API in the mech_type argument to - GSS_Init_sec_context. See [RFC2078] for details. + GSS_Init_sec_context. See [RFC2743] for details. seqid4 typedef uint32_t seqid4; Sequence identifier used for file locking utf8string typedef opaque utf8string<>; UTF-8 encoding for strings verifier4 typedef opaque verifier4[NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE]; Verifier used for various operations (COMMIT, CREATE, - OPEN, READDIR, SETCLIENTID, WRITE) + OPEN, READDIR, SETCLIENTID, SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, WRITE) NFS4_VERIFIER_SIZE is defined as 8 2.2. Structured Data Types nfstime4 struct nfstime4 { int64_t seconds; uint32_t nseconds; } The nfstime4 structure gives the number of seconds and nanoseconds since midnight or 0 hour January 1, 1970 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Values greater than zero for the seconds field denote dates after the 0 hour January 1, 1970. Values less than zero for the seconds field denote dates before the 0 hour January 1, 1970. In both cases, the nseconds field is to be added to the seconds field for the final time representation. For example, if the time to be represented is one-half second - before 0 hour January 1, 1970, the seconds field would have a -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + before 0 hour January 1, 1970, the seconds field would have a value of negative one (-1) and the nseconds fields would have a value of one-half second (500000000). Values greater than 999,999,999 for nseconds are considered invalid. This data type is used to pass time and date information. A server converts to and from its local representation of time when processing time values, preserving as much accuracy as - possible. If the precision of timestamps stored for a file - system object is less than defined, loss of precision can occur. - An adjunct time maintenance protocol is recommended to reduce + possible. If the precision of timestamps stored for a filesystem + object is less than defined, loss of precision can occur. An + adjunct time maintenance protocol is recommended to reduce client and server time skew. time_how4 enum time_how4 { SET_TO_SERVER_TIME4 = 0, SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4 = 1 }; settime4 @@ -734,35 +758,36 @@ void; }; The above definitions are used as the attribute definitions to set time values. If set_it is SET_TO_SERVER_TIME4, then the server uses its local representation of time for the time value. specdata4 struct specdata4 { - uint32_t specdata1; - uint32_t specdata2; + uint32_t specdata1; /* major device number */ + uint32_t specdata2; /* minor device number */ }; This data type represents additional information for the device file types NF4CHR and NF4BLK. fsid4 struct fsid4 { uint64_t major; uint64_t minor; - }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + }; This type is the file system identifier that is used as a mandatory attribute. fs_location4 struct fs_location4 { utf8string server<>; pathname4 rootpath; }; @@ -796,41 +821,82 @@ 0 1 +-----------+-----------+-----------+-- | count | 31 .. 0 | 63 .. 32 | +-----------+-----------+-----------+-- change_info4 struct change_info4 { bool atomic; changeid4 before; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + changeid4 after; }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - This structure is used with the CREATE, LINK, REMOVE, RENAME operations to let the client know the value of the change attribute for the directory in which the target file system object resides. clientaddr4 struct clientaddr4 { /* see struct rpcb in RFC 1833 */ string r_netid<>; /* network id */ string r_addr<>; /* universal address */ }; - The clientaddr4 structure is used as part of the SETCLIENT + The clientaddr4 structure is used as part of the SETCLIENTID operation to either specify the address of the client that is - using a clientid or as part of the call back registration. + using a clientid or as part of the callback registration. The + r_netid and r_addr fields are specified in [RFC1833], but they + are underspecified in [RFC1833] as far as what they should look + like for specific protocols. + + For TCP over IPv4 and for UDP over IPv4, the format of r_addr is + the US-ASCII string: + + h1.h2.h3.h4.p1.p2 + + The prefix, "h1.h2.h3.h4", is the standard textual form for + representing an IPv4 address, which is always four octets long. + Assuming big-endian ordering, h1, h2, h3, and h4, are + respectively, the first through fourth octets each converted to + ASCII-decimal. Assuming big-endian ordering, p1 and p2 are, + respectively, the first and second octets each converted to + ASCII-decimal. For example, if a host, in big-endian order, has + an address of 0x0A010307 and there is a service listening on, in + big endian order, port 0x020F (decimal 527), then complete + universal address is "10.1.3.7.2.15". + + For TCP over IPv4 the value of r_netid is the string "tcp". For + UDP over IPv4 the value of r_netid is the string "udp". + + For TCP over IPv4 and for UDP over IPv6, the format of r_addr is + the US-ASCII string: + + x1:x2:x3:x4:x5:x6:x7:x8.p1.p2 + + The suffix "p1.p2" is the service port, and is computed the same + way as with univeral addresses for TCP and UDP over IPv4. The + prefix, "x1:x2:x3:x4:x5:x6:x7:x8", is the standard textual form + for representing an IPv6 address as defined in Section 2.2 of + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + [RFC1884]. Additionally, the two alternative forms specified in + Section 2.2 of [RFC1884] are also acceptable. + + For TCP over IPv6 the value of r_netid is the string "tcp6". + For UDP over IPv6 the value of r_netid is the string "udp6". cb_client4 struct cb_client4 { unsigned int cb_program; clientaddr4 cb_location; }; This structure is used by the client to inform the server of its call back address; includes the program number and client @@ -849,47 +915,66 @@ open_owner4 struct open_owner4 { clientid4 clientid; opaque owner; }; This structure is used to identify the owner of open state. NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT is defined as 1024. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - lock_owner4 - struct nfs_lockowner4 { + struct lock_owner4 { clientid4 clientid; opaque owner; }; This structure is used to identify the owner of file locking state. NFS4_OPAQUE_LIMIT is defined as 1024. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + open_to_lock_owner4 + + struct open_to_lock_owner4 { + seqid4 open_seqid; + stateid4 open_stateid; + seqid4 lock_seqid; + lock_owner4 lock_owner; + }; + + This structure is used for the first LOCK operation done for an + open_owner4. It provides both the open_stateid and lock_owner + such that the transition is made from a valid open_stateid + sequence to that of the new lock_stateid sequence. Using this + mechanism avoids the confirmation of the lock_owner/lock_seqid + pair since it is tied to established state in the form of the + open_stateid/open_seqid. + stateid4 struct stateid4 { uint32_t seqid; opaque other[12]; }; - This strucutre is used for the various state sharing mechanisms + This structure is used for the various state sharing mechanisms between the client and server. For the client, this data - structure is read-only. The seqid value is the only field that - the client should interpret. See the section for the OPEN - operation for further description of how the seqid field is to - be interpreted. + structure is read-only. The starting value of the seqid field + is undefined. The server is required to increment the seqid + field monotonically at each transition of the stateid. This is + important since the client will inspect the seqid in OPEN + stateids to determine the order of OPEN processing done by the + server. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 3. RPC and Security Flavor The NFS version 4 protocol is a Remote Procedure Call (RPC) application that uses RPC version 2 and the corresponding eXternal Data Representation (XDR) as defined in [RFC1831] and [RFC1832]. The RPCSEC_GSS security flavor as defined in [RFC2203] MUST be used as the mechanism to deliver stronger security for the NFS version 4 protocol. @@ -899,70 +984,105 @@ port 2049. The registered port 2049 [RFC1700] for the NFS protocol should be the default configuration. Using the registered port for NFS services means the NFS client will not need to use the RPC binding protocols as described in [RFC1833]; this will allow NFS to transit firewalls. The transport used by the RPC service for the NFS version 4 protocol MUST provide congestion control comparable to that defined for TCP in [RFC2581]. If the operating environment implements TCP, the NFS version 4 protocol SHOULD be supported over TCP. The NFS client and - server may use other transports if they support congestion control as + server MAY use other transports if they support congestion control as defined above and in those cases a mechanism may be provided to override TCP usage in favor of another transport. If TCP is used as the transport, the client and server SHOULD use persistent connections. This will prevent the weakening of TCP's congestion control via short lived connections and will improve performance for the WAN environment by eliminating the need for SYN handshakes. Note that for various timers, the client and server should avoid inadvertent synchronization of those timers. For further discussion of the general issue refer to [Floyd]. +3.1.1. Client Retransmission Behavior + + When processing a request received over a reliable transport such as + TCP, the NFS version 4 server MUST NOT silently drop the request, + except if the transport connection has been broken. Given such a + contract between NFS version 4 clients and servers, clients MUST NOT + retry a request unless one or both of the following are true: + + o The transport connection has been broken + + o The procedure being retried is the NULL procedure + + Since transports, including TCP, do not always synchronously inform a + peer when the other peer has broken the connection (for example, when + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + an NFS server reboots), so the NFS version 4 client may want to + actively "probe" the connection to see if has been broken. Use of + the NULL procedure is one recommended way to do so. So, when a + client experiences a remote procedure call timeout (of some arbitrary + implementation specific amount), rather than retrying the remote + procedure call, it could instead issue a NULL procedure call to the + server. If the server has died, the transport connection break will + eventually be indicated to the NFS version 4 client. The client can + then reconnect, and then retry the original request. If the NULL + procedure call gets a response, the connection has not broken. The + client can decide to wait longer for the original request's response, + or it can break the transport connection and reconnect before re- + sending the original request. + + For callbacks from the server to the client, the same rules apply, + but the server doing the callback becomes the client, and the client + receiving the callback becomes the server. + 3.2. Security Flavors Traditional RPC implementations have included AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS, AUTH_DH, and AUTH_KRB4 as security flavors. With [RFC2203] an additional security flavor of RPCSEC_GSS has been introduced which - uses the functionality of GSS-API [RFC2078]. This allows for the use - of varying security mechanisms by the RPC layer without the + uses the functionality of GSS-API [RFC2743]. This allows for the use + of various security mechanisms by the RPC layer without the additional implementation overhead of adding RPC security flavors. For NFS version 4, the RPCSEC_GSS security flavor MUST be used to enable the mandatory security mechanism. Other flavors, such as, AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS, and AUTH_DH MAY be implemented as well. 3.2.1. Security mechanisms for NFS version 4 The use of RPCSEC_GSS requires selection of: mechanism, quality of - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - protection, and service (authentication, integrity, privacy). The remainder of this document will refer to these three parameters of the RPCSEC_GSS security as the security triple. -3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as security triple +3.2.1.1. Kerberos V5 as a security triple The Kerberos V5 GSS-API mechanism as described in [RFC1964] MUST be implemented and provide the following security triples. column descriptions: 1 == number of pseudo flavor 2 == name of pseudo flavor 3 == mechanism's OID 4 == mechanism's algorithm(s) 5 == RPCSEC_GSS service 1 2 3 4 5 + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 390003 krb5 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_none 390004 krb5i 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_integrity 390005 krb5p 1.2.840.113554.1.2.2 DES MAC MD5 rpc_gss_svc_privacy for integrity, and 56 bit DES for privacy. Note that the pseudo flavor is presented here as a mapping aid to the implementor. Because this NFS protocol includes a method to @@ -982,41 +1102,41 @@ V5 as security triple" 1 2 3 4 5 ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 390006 lipkey 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_none 390007 lipkey-i 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_integrity 390008 lipkey-p 1.3.6.1.5.5.9 negotiated rpc_gss_svc_privacy The mechanism algorithm is listed as "negotiated". This is because LIPKEY is layered on SPKM-3 and in SPKM-3 [RFC2847] the - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - confidentiality and integrity algorithms are negotiated. Since SPKM-3 specifies HMAC-MD5 for integrity as MANDATORY, 128 bit cast5CBC for confidentiality for privacy as MANDATORY, and further specifies that HMAC-MD5 and cast5CBC MUST be listed first before weaker algorithms, specifying "negotiated" in column 4 does not impair interoperability. In the event an SPKM-3 peer does not support the mandatory algorithms, the other peer is free to accept or reject the GSS-API context creation. Because SPKM-3 negotiates the algorithms, subsequent calls to LIPKEY's GSS_Wrap() and GSS_GetMIC() by RPCSEC_GSS will use a quality of protection value of 0 (zero). See section 5.2 of [RFC2025] for an explanation. LIPKEY uses SPKM-3 to create a secure channel in which to pass a user name and password from the client to the server. Once the user name and password have been accepted by the server, calls to the LIPKEY context are redirected to the SPKM-3 context. See [RFC2847] for more + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + details. 3.2.1.3. SPKM-3 as a security triple The SPKM-3 GSS-API mechanism as described in [RFC2847] MUST be implemented and provide the following security triples. The definition of the columns matches the previous subsection "Kerberos V5 as security triple". 1 2 3 4 5 @@ -1034,86 +1154,93 @@ explanation. Even though LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, SPKM-3 is specified as a mandatory set of triples to handle the situations where the initiator (the client) is anonymous or where the initiator has its own certificate. If the initiator is anonymous, there will not be a user name and password to send to the target (the server). If the initiator has its own certificate, then using passwords is superfluous. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - 3.3. Security Negotiation With the NFS version 4 server potentially offering multiple security mechanisms, the client needs a method to determine or negotiate which mechanism is to be used for its communication with the server. The NFS server may have multiple points within its file system name space that are available for use by NFS clients. In turn the NFS server may be configured such that each of these entry points may have different or multiple security mechanisms in use. The security negotiation between client and server must be done with a secure channel to eliminate the possibility of a third party intercepting the negotiation sequence and forcing the client and server to choose a lower level of security than required or desired. + See the section "Security Considerations" for further discussion. -3.3.1. Security Error +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +3.3.1. SECINFO + + The new SECINFO operation will allow the client to determine, on a + per filehandle basis, what security triple is to be used for server + access. In general, the client will not have to use the SECINFO + operation except during initial communication with the server or when + the client crosses policy boundaries at the server. It is possible + that the server's policies change during the client's interaction + therefore forcing the client to negotiate a new security triple. + +3.3.2. Security Error Based on the assumption that each NFS version 4 client and server must support a minimum set of security (i.e. LIPKEY, SPKM-3, and Kerberos-V5 all under RPCSEC_GSS), the NFS client will start its communication with the server with one of the minimal security triples. During communication with the server, the client may receive an NFS error of NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC. This error allows the server to notify the client that the security triple currently being used is not appropriate for access to the server's file system resources. The client is then responsible for determining what security triples are available at the server and choose one which is - appropriate for the client. - -3.3.2. SECINFO - - The new SECINFO operation will allow the client to determine, on a - per filehandle basis, what security triple is to be used for server - access. In general, the client will not have to use the SECINFO - procedure except during initial communication with the server or when - the client crosses policy boundaries at the server. It is possible - that the server's policies change during the client's interaction - therefore forcing the client to negotiate a new security triple. + appropriate for the client. See the section for the "SECINFO" + operation for further discussion of how the client will respond to + the NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC error and use SECINFO. 3.4. Callback RPC Authentication - The callback RPC (described later) must mutually authenticate the NFS - server to the principal that acquired the clientid (also described - later), using the same security flavor the original SETCLIENTID - operation used. Because LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, it is - permissible for the server to use SPKM-3 and not LIPKEY for the - callback even if the client used LIPKEY for SETCLIENTID. + Except as noted elsewhere in this section, the callback RPC + (described later) MUST mutually authenticate the NFS server to the + principal that acquired the clientid (also described later), using + the security flavor the original SETCLIENTID operation used. For AUTH_NONE, there are no principals, so this is a non-issue. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - For AUTH_SYS, the server simply uses the AUTH_SYS credential that the - user used when it set up the delegation. + AUTH_SYS has no notions of mutual authentation or a server principal, + so the callback from the server simply uses the AUTH_SYS credential + that the user used when he set up the delegation. For AUTH_DH, one commonly used convention is that the server uses the credential corresponding to this AUTH_DH principal: unix.host@domain where host and domain are variables corresponding to the name of server host and directory services domain in which it lives such as a Network Information System domain or a DNS domain. + Because LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, it is permissible for the + server to use SPKM-3 and not LIPKEY for the callback even if the + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + client used LIPKEY for SETCLIENTID. + Regardless of what security mechanism under RPCSEC_GSS is being used, the NFS server, MUST identify itself in GSS-API via a GSS_C_NT_HOSTBASED_SERVICE name type. GSS_C_NT_HOSTBASED_SERVICE names are of the form: service@hostname For NFS, the "service" element is nfs @@ -1128,279 +1255,262 @@ Kerberos Key Distribution Center database. For LIPKEY, this would be the username passed to the target (the NFS version 4 client that receives the callback). It should be noted that LIPKEY may not work for callbacks, since the LIPKEY client uses a user id/password. If the NFS client receiving the callback can authenticate the NFS server's user name/password pair, and if the user that the NFS server is authenticating to has a public key certificate, then it works. - In situations where NFS client uses LIPKEY and uses a per-host + In situations where the NFS client uses LIPKEY and uses a per-host principal for the SETCLIENTID operation, instead of using LIPKEY for SETCLIENTID, it is RECOMMENDED that SPKM-3 with mutual authentication be used. This effectively means that the client will use a certificate to authenticate and identify the initiator to the target on the NFS server. Using SPKM-3 and not LIPKEY has the following advantages: o When the server does a callback, it must authenticate to the principal used in the SETCLIENTID. Even if LIPKEY is used, because LIPKEY is layered over SPKM-3, the NFS client will need to have a certificate that corresponds to the principal used in - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - the SETCLIENTID operation. From an administrative perspective, having a user name, password, and certificate for both the client and server is redundant. o LIPKEY was intended to minimize additional infrastructure requirements beyond a certificate for the target, and the expectation is that existing password infrastructure can be leveraged for the initiator. In some environments, a per-host password does not exist yet. If certificates are used for any per-host principals, then additional password infrastructure is + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + not needed. o In cases when a host is both an NFS client and server, it can share the same per-host certificate. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 4. Filehandles The filehandle in the NFS protocol is a per server unique identifier for a file system object. The contents of the filehandle are opaque to the client. Therefore, the server is responsible for translating the filehandle to an internal representation of the file system - object. Since the filehandle is the client's reference to an object - and the client may cache this reference, the server SHOULD not reuse - a filehandle for another file system object. If the server needs to - reuse a filehandle value, the time elapsed before reuse SHOULD be - large enough such that it is unlikely the client has a cached copy of - the reused filehandle value. Note that a client may cache a - filehandle for a very long time. For example, a client may cache NFS - data to local storage as a method to expand its effective cache size - and as a means to survive client restarts. Therefore, the lifetime - of a cached filehandle may be extended. + object. 4.1. Obtaining the First Filehandle The operations of the NFS protocol are defined in terms of one or more filehandles. Therefore, the client needs a filehandle to initiate communication with the server. With the NFS version 2 protocol [RFC1094] and the NFS version 3 protocol [RFC1813], there exists an ancillary protocol to obtain this first filehandle. The MOUNT protocol, RPC program number 100005, provides the mechanism of - translating a string based file system path name to a filehandle - which can then be used by the NFS protocols. + translating a string based filesystem path name to a filehandle which + can then be used by the NFS protocols. The MOUNT protocol has deficiencies in the area of security and use via firewalls. This is one reason that the use of the public filehandle was introduced in [RFC2054] and [RFC2055]. With the use - of the public filehandle in combination with the LOOKUP procedure in + of the public filehandle in combination with the LOOKUP operation in the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols, it has been demonstrated that the MOUNT protocol is unnecessary for viable interaction between NFS client and server. Therefore, the NFS version 4 protocol will not use an ancillary protocol for translation from string based path names to a filehandle. Two special filehandles will be used as starting points for the NFS client. 4.1.1. Root Filehandle The first of the special filehandles is the ROOT filehandle. The - ROOT filehandle is the "conceptual" root of the file system name - space at the NFS server. The client uses or starts with the ROOT + ROOT filehandle is the "conceptual" root of the filesystem name space + at the NFS server. The client uses or starts with the ROOT filehandle by employing the PUTROOTFH operation. The PUTROOTFH operation instructs the server to set the "current" filehandle to the ROOT of the server's file tree. Once this PUTROOTFH operation is used, the client can then traverse the entirety of the server's file - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - tree with the LOOKUP procedure. A complete discussion of the server + tree with the LOOKUP operation. A complete discussion of the server name space is in the section "NFS Server Name Space". 4.1.2. Public Filehandle The second special filehandle is the PUBLIC filehandle. Unlike the ROOT filehandle, the PUBLIC filehandle may be bound or represent an - arbitrary file system object at the server. The server is - responsible for this binding. It may be that the PUBLIC filehandle - and the ROOT filehandle refer to the same file system object. - However, it is up to the administrative software at the server and - the policies of the server administrator to define the binding of the - PUBLIC filehandle and server file system object. The client may not - make any assumptions about this binding. + arbitrary filesystem object at the server. The server is responsible + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + for this binding. It may be that the PUBLIC filehandle and the ROOT + filehandle refer to the same filesystem object. However, it is up to + the administrative software at the server and the policies of the + server administrator to define the binding of the PUBLIC filehandle + and server filesystem object. The client may not make any + assumptions about this binding. The client uses the PUBLIC filehandle + via the PUTPUBFH operation. 4.2. Filehandle Types In the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols, there was one type of - filehandle with a single set of semantics. The NFS version 4 - protocol introduces a new type of filehandle in an attempt to - accommodate certain server environments. The first type of - filehandle is 'persistent'. The semantics of a persistent filehandle - are the same as the filehandles of the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols. - The second or new type of filehandle is the "volatile" filehandle. + filehandle with a single set of semantics. This type of filehandle + is termed "persistent" in NFS Version 4. The semantics of a + persistent filehandle remain the same as before. A new type of + filehandle introduced in NFS Version 4 is the "volatile" filehandle, + which attempts to accommodate certain server environments. - The volatile filehandle type is being introduced to address server + The volatile filehandle type was introduced to address server functionality or implementation issues which make correct implementation of a persistent filehandle infeasible. Some server environments do not provide a file system level invariant that can be used to construct a persistent filehandle. The underlying server file system may not provide the invariant or the server's file system programming interfaces may not provide access to the needed invariant. Volatile filehandles may ease the implementation of - server functionality such as hierarchical storage management or file - system reorganization or migration. However, the volatile filehandle - increases the implementation burden for the client. However this - increased burden is deemed acceptable based on the overall gains - achieved by the protocol. + server functionality such as hierarchical storage management or + filesystem reorganization or migration. However, the volatile + filehandle increases the implementation burden for the client. Since the client will need to handle persistent and volatile - filehandle differently, a file attribute is defined which may be used - by the client to determine the filehandle types being returned by the - server. + filehandles differently, a file attribute is defined which may be + used by the client to determine the filehandle types being returned + by the server. 4.2.1. General Properties of a Filehandle The filehandle contains all the information the server needs to distinguish an individual file. To the client, the filehandle is opaque. The client stores filehandles for use in a later request and - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - can compare two filehandles from the same server for equality by doing a byte-by-byte comparison. However, the client MUST NOT otherwise interpret the contents of filehandles. If two filehandles - from the same server are equal, they MUST refer to the same file. If - they are not equal, the client may use information provided by the - server, in the form of file attributes, to determine whether they - denote the same files or different files. The client would do this - as necessary for client side caching. Servers SHOULD try to maintain - a one-to-one correspondence between filehandles and files but this is - not required. Clients MUST use filehandle comparisons only to - improve performance, not for correct behavior. All clients need to - be prepared for situations in which it cannot be determined whether - two filehandles denote the same object and in such cases, avoid - making invalid assumpions which might cause incorrect behavior. - Further discussion of filehandle and attribute comparison in the - context of data caching is presented in the section "Data Caching and - File Identity". + from the same server are equal, they MUST refer to the same file. + Servers SHOULD try to maintain a one-to-one correspondence between + filehandles and files but this is not required. Clients MUST use + filehandle comparisons only to improve performance, not for correct + behavior. All clients need to be prepared for situations in which it + cannot be determined whether two filehandles denote the same object + and in such cases, avoid making invalid assumpions which might cause + incorrect behavior. Further discussion of filehandle and attribute + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + comparison in the context of data caching is presented in the section + "Data Caching and File Identity". As an example, in the case that two different path names when traversed at the server terminate at the same file system object, the server SHOULD return the same filehandle for each path. This can occur if a hard link is used to create two file names which refer to the same underlying file object and associated data. For example, if paths /a/b/c and /a/d/c refer to the same file, the server SHOULD return the same filehandle for both path names traversals. 4.2.2. Persistent Filehandle A persistent filehandle is defined as having a fixed value for the lifetime of the file system object to which it refers. Once the server creates the filehandle for a file system object, the server MUST accept the same filehandle for the object for the lifetime of the object. If the server restarts or reboots the NFS server must honor the same filehandle value as it did in the server's previous - instantiation. Similarly, if the file system is migrated, the new - NFS server must honor the same file handle as the old NFS server. + instantiation. Similarly, if the filesystem is migrated, the new NFS + server must honor the same filehandle as the old NFS server. The persistent filehandle will be become stale or invalid when the file system object is removed. When the server is presented with a persistent filehandle that refers to a deleted object, it MUST return an error of NFS4ERR_STALE. A filehandle may become stale when the file system containing the object is no longer available. The file system may become unavailable if it exists on removable media and the - media is no longer available at the server or the file system in - whole has been destroyed or the file system has simply been removed - from the server's name space (i.e. unmounted in a Unix environment). + media is no longer available at the server or the filesystem in whole + has been destroyed or the filesystem has simply been removed from the + server's name space (i.e. unmounted in a UNIX environment). 4.2.3. Volatile Filehandle A volatile filehandle does not share the same longevity - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - characteristics of a persistent filehandle. The server may determine that a volatile filehandle is no longer valid at many different points in time. If the server can definitively determine that a volatile filehandle refers to an object that has been removed, the server should return NFS4ERR_STALE to the client (as is the case for persistent filehandles). In all other cases where the server determines that a volatile filehandle can no longer be used, it should return an error of NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED. The mandatory attribute "fh_expire_type" is used by the client to determine what type of filehandle the server is providing for a particular file system. This attribute is a bitmask with the following values: +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + FH4_PERSISTENT The value of FH4_PERSISTENT is used to indicate a persistent filehandle, which is valid until the object is removed from the file system. The server will not return NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED for this filehandle. FH4_PERSISTENT is defined as a value in which none of the bits specified below are set. - FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN - The filehandle will not expire while client has the file open. - If this bit is set, then the values FH4_VOLATILE_ANY or - FH4_VOL_RENAME do not impact expiration while the file is open. - Once the file is closed or if the FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN bit is - false, the rest of the volatile related bits apply. - FH4_VOLATILE_ANY - The filehandle may expire at any time and will expire during - system migration and rename. + The filehandle may expire at any time, except as specifically + excluded (i.e. FH4_NO_EXPIRE_WITH_OPEN). + + FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN + May only be set when FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is set. If this bit is + set, then the meaning of FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is qualified to + exclude any expiration of the filehandle when it is open. FH4_VOL_MIGRATION - The filehandle will expire during file system migration. May - only be set if FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is not set. + The filehandle will expire as a result of migration. If + FH4_VOL_ANY is set, FH4_VOL_MIGRATION is redundant. FH4_VOL_RENAME - The filehandle may expire due to a rename. This includes a - rename by the requesting client or a rename by another client. - May only be set if FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is not set. - - Servers which provide volatile filehandles should deny a RENAME or - REMOVE that would affect an OPEN file or any of the components - leading to the OPEN file. In addition, the server should deny all - RENAME or REMOVE requests during the grace or lease period upon - server restart. - - The reader may be wondering why there are three FH4_VOL* bits and why - FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is exclusive of FH4_VOL_MIGRATION and - FH4_VOL_RENAME. If the a filehandle is normally persistent but - cannot persist across a file set migration, then the presence of the + The filehandle will expire during rename. This includes a + rename by the requesting client or a rename by any other client. + If FH4_VOL_ANY is set, FH4_VOL_RENAME is redundant. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + Servers which provide volatile filehandles that may expire while + open (i.e. if FH4_VOL_MIGRATION or FH4_VOL_RENAME is set or if + FH4_VOLATILE_ANY is set and FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN not set), + should deny a RENAME or REMOVE that would affect an OPEN file of + any of the components leading to the OPEN file. In addition, + the server should deny all RENAME or REMOVE requests during the + grace period upon server restart. - FH4_VOL_MIGRATION or FH4_VOL_RENAME tells the client that it can - treat the file handle as persistent for purposes of maintaining a - file name to file handle cache, except for the specific event - described by the bit. However, FH4_VOLATILE_ANY tells the client - that it should not maintain such a cache for unopened files. A - server MUST not present FH4_VOLATILE_ANY with FH4_VOL_MIGRATION or - FH4_VOL_RENAME as this will lead to confusion. FH4_VOLATILE_ANY - implies that the file handle will expire upon migration or rename, in - addition to other events. + Note that the bits FH4_VOL_MIGRATION and FH4_VOL_RENAME allow + the client to determine that expiration has occurred whenever a + specific event occurs, without an explicit filehandle expiration + error from the server. FH4_VOL_ANY does not provide this form + of information. In situations where the server will expire many, + but not all filehandles upon migration (e.g. all but those that + are open), FH4_VOLATILE_ANY (in this case with + FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN) is a better choice since the client may + not assume that all filehandles will expire when migration + occurs, and it is likely that additional expirations will occur + (as a result of file CLOSE) that are separated in time from the + migration event itself. 4.2.4. One Method of Constructing a Volatile Filehandle As mentioned, in some instances a filehandle is stale (no longer valid; perhaps because the file was removed from the server) or it is expired (the underlying file is valid but since the filehandle is + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + volatile, it may have expired). Thus the server needs to be able to return NFS4ERR_STALE in the former case and NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED in the latter case. This can be done by careful construction of the volatile filehandle. One possible implementation follows. A volatile filehandle, while opaque to the client could contain: [volatile bit = 1 | server boot time | slot | generation number] o slot is an index in the server volatile filehandle table @@ -1420,62 +1530,65 @@ 4.3. Client Recovery from Filehandle Expiration If possible, the client SHOULD recover from the receipt of an NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED error. The client must take on additional responsibility so that it may prepare itself to recover from the expiration of a volatile filehandle. If the server returns persistent filehandles, the client does not need these additional steps. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - For volatile filehandles, most commonly the client will need to store - the component names leading up to and including the file system - object in question. With these names, the client should be able to - recover by finding a filehandle in the name space that is still - available or by starting at the root of the server's file system name - space. + the component names leading up to and including the filesystem object + in question. With these names, the client should be able to recover + by finding a filehandle in the name space that is still available or + by starting at the root of the server's filesystem name space. If the expired filehandle refers to an object that has been removed - from the file system, obviously the client will not be able to - recover from the expired filehandle. + from the filesystem, obviously the client will not be able to recover + from the expired filehandle. It is also possible that the expired filehandle refers to a file that has been renamed. If the file was renamed by another client, again it is possible that the original client will not be able to recover. However, in the case that the client itself is renaming the file and the file is open, it is possible that the client may be able to recover. The client can determine the new path name based on the processing of the rename request. The client can then regenerate the + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + new filehandle based on the new path name. The client could also use the compound operation mechanism to construct a set of operations like: RENAME A B LOOKUP B GETFH + Note that the COMPOUND procedure does not provide atomicity. This + example only reduces the overhead of recovering from an expired + filehandle. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 5. File Attributes To meet the requirements of extensibility and increased - interoperability with non-Unix platforms, attributes must be handled - in a flexible manner. The NFS Version 3 fattr3 structure contains a + interoperability with non-UNIX platforms, attributes must be handled + in a flexible manner. The NFS version 3 fattr3 structure contains a fixed list of attributes that not all clients and servers are able to support or care about. The fattr3 structure can not be extended as new needs arise and it provides no way to indicate non-support. With - the NFS Version 4 protocol, the client will be able to ask what - attributes the server supports and will be able to request only those - attributes in which it is interested. + the NFS version 4 protocol, the client is able query what attributes + the server supports and construct requests with only those supported + attributes (or a subset thereof). - To this end, attributes will be divided into three groups: mandatory, + To this end, attributes are divided into three groups: mandatory, recommended, and named. Both mandatory and recommended attributes are supported in the NFS version 4 protocol by a specific and well- defined encoding and are identified by number. They are requested by setting a bit in the bit vector sent in the GETATTR request; the server response includes a bit vector to list what attributes were returned in the response. New mandatory or recommended attributes may be added to the NFS protocol between major revisions by publishing a standards-track RFC which allocates a new attribute number value and defines the encoding for the attribute. See the section "Minor Versioning" for further discussion. @@ -1495,506 +1608,548 @@ LOOKUP "x11icon" ; look up specific attribute READ 0,4096 ; read stream of bytes Named attributes are intended for data needed by applications rather than by an NFS client implementation. NFS implementors are strongly encouraged to define their new attributes as recommended attributes by bringing them to the IETF standards-track process. The set of attributes which are classified as mandatory is deliberately small since servers must do whatever it takes to support - them. The recommended attributes may be unsupported; though a server - should support as many as it can. Attributes are deemed mandatory if - the data is both needed by a large number of clients and is not - otherwise reasonably computable by the client when support is not + them. A server should support as many of the recommended attributes + as possible but by their definition, the server is not required to + support all of them. Attributes are deemed mandatory if the data is + both needed by a large number of clients and is not otherwise -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - provided on the server. + reasonably computable by the client when support is not provided on + the server. + + Note that the hidden directory returned by OPENATTR is a convenience + for protocol processing. The client should not make any assumptions + about the server's implementation of named attributes and whether the + underlying filesystem at the server has a named attribute directory + or not. Therefore, operations such as SETATTR and GETATTR on the + named attribute directory are undefined. 5.1. Mandatory Attributes - These MUST be supported by every NFS Version 4 client and server in + These MUST be supported by every NFS version 4 client and server in order to ensure a minimum level of interoperability. The server must store and return these attributes and the client must be able to function with an attribute set limited to these attributes. With just the mandatory attributes some client functionality may be impaired or limited in some ways. A client may ask for any of these attributes to be returned by setting a bit in the GETATTR request and the server must return their value. 5.2. Recommended Attributes These attributes are understood well enough to warrant support in the - NFS Version 4 protocol. However, they may not be supported on all + NFS version 4 protocol. However, they may not be supported on all clients and servers. A client may ask for any of these attributes to be returned by setting a bit in the GETATTR request but must handle the case where the server does not return them. A client may ask for the set of attributes the server supports and should not request attributes the server does not support. A server should be tolerant of requests for unsupported attributes and simply not return them rather than considering the request an error. It is expected that servers will support all attributes they comfortably can and only fail to support attributes which are difficult to support in their operating environments. A server should provide attributes whenever they don't have to "tell lies" to the client. For example, a file modification time should be either an accurate time or should not be supported by the server. This will not always be comfortable to - clients but it seems that the client has a better ability to - fabricate or construct an attribute or do without the attribute. + clients but the client is better positioned decide whether and how to + fabricate or construct an attribute or whether to do without the + attribute. 5.3. Named Attributes These attributes are not supported by direct encoding in the NFS Version 4 protocol but are accessed by string names rather than numbers and correspond to an uninterpreted stream of bytes which are stored with the file system object. The name space for these + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + attributes may be accessed by using the OPENATTR operation. The OPENATTR operation returns a filehandle for a virtual "attribute directory" and further perusal of the name space may be done using READDIR and LOOKUP operations on this filehandle. Named attributes may then be examined or changed by normal READ and WRITE and CREATE operations on the filehandles returned from READDIR and LOOKUP. Named attributes may have attributes. It is recommended that servers support arbitrary named attributes. A client should not depend on the ability to store any named attributes - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - in the server's file system. If a server does support named attributes, a client which is also able to handle them should be able to copy a file's data and meta-data with complete transparency from one location to another; this would imply that names allowed for regular directory entries are valid for named attribute names as well. Names of attributes will not be controlled by this document or other IETF standards track documents. See the section "IANA Considerations" for further discussion. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +5.4. Classification of Attributes -5.4. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions + Each of the Mandatory and Recommended attributes can be classified in + one of three categories: per server, per filesystem, or per + filesystem object. Note that it is possible that some per filesystem + attributes may vary within the filesystem. See the "homogeneous" + attribute for its definition. Note that the attributes + time_access_set and time_modify_set are not listed below because they + are write-only attributes used in a special instance of SETATTR. + + o The per server attribute is: + + lease_time + + o The per filesystem attributes are: + + supp_attr, fh_expire_type, link_support, symlink_support, + unique_handles, aclsupport, cansettime, case_insensitive, + case_preserving, chown_restricted, files_avail, files_free, + files_total, fs_locations, homogeneous, maxfilesize, maxname, + maxread, maxwrite, no_trunc, space_avail, space_free, + space_total, time_delta + + o The per filesystem object attributes are: + + type, change, size, named_attr, fsid, rdattr_error, filehandle, + ACL, archive, fileid, hidden, maxlink, mimetype, mode, numlinks, + owner, owner_group, rawdev, space_used, system, time_access, + time_backup, time_create, time_metadata, time_modify, + mounted_on_fileid + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + For quota_avail_hard, quota_avail_soft, and quota_used see their + definitions below for the appropriate classification. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +5.5. Mandatory Attributes - Definitions Name # DataType Access Description ___________________________________________________________________ - supp_attr 0 bitmap READ - The bit vector which + supp_attr 0 bitmap READ The bit vector which would retrieve all mandatory and recommended attributes that are supported for - this object. + this object. The + scope of this + attribute applies to + all objects with a + matching fsid. - type 1 nfs4_ftype READ - The type of the object + type 1 nfs4_ftype READ The type of the object (file, directory, - symlink) + symlink, etc.) - fh_expire_type 2 uint32 READ - Server uses this to + fh_expire_type 2 uint32 READ Server uses this to specify filehandle expiration behavior to the client. See the section "Filehandles" for additional description. - change 3 uint64 READ - A value created by the + change 3 uint64 READ A value created by the server that the client can use to determine if file data, directory contents or attributes of the object have been modified. The server may return the - object's time_modify + object's time_metadata attribute for this attribute's value but - only if the file - system object can not - be updated more + only if the filesystem + object can not be + updated more frequently than the resolution of - time_modify. + time_metadata. size 4 uint64 R/W The size of the object in bytes. - link_support 5 bool READ - Does the object's file - system supports hard - links? +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + link_support 5 bool READ True, if the object's + filesystem supports + hard links. - symlink_support 6 bool READ - Does the object's file - system supports - symbolic links? + symlink_support 6 bool READ True, if the object's + filesystem supports + symbolic links. - named_attr 7 bool READ - Does this object have - named attributes? + named_attr 7 bool READ True, if this object + has named attributes. + In other words, object + has a non-empty named + attribute directory. - fsid 8 fsid4 READ - Unique file system + fsid 8 fsid4 READ Unique filesystem identifier for the file system holding this object. fsid contains major and minor components each of which are uint64. unique_handles 9 bool READ - Are two distinct + True, if two distinct filehandles guaranteed to refer to two different file system - objects? + objects. - lease_time 10 nfs_lease4 READ - Duration of leases at + lease_time 10 nfs_lease4 READ Duration of leases at server in seconds. - rdattr_error 11 enum READ - Error returned from + rdattr_error 11 enum READ Error returned from getattr during readdir. - filehandle 19 nfs_fh4 READ - The filehandle of this + filehandle 19 nfs_fh4 READ The filehandle of this object (primarily for readdir requests). -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -5.5. Recommended Attributes - Definitions +5.6. Recommended Attributes - Definitions Name # Data Type Access Description - _____________________________________________________________________ - ACL 12 nfsace4<> R/W - The access control + ______________________________________________________________________ + ACL 12 nfsace4<> R/W The access control list for the object. - aclsupport 13 uint32 READ - Indicates what types + aclsupport 13 uint32 READ Indicates what types of ACLs are supported - on the current file - system. + on the current + filesystem. - archive 14 bool R/W - Whether or not this - file has been - archived since the - time of last - modification + archive 14 bool R/W True, if this file + has been archived + since the time of + last modification (deprecated in favor of time_backup). - cansettime 15 bool READ - Is the server able to - change the times for - a file system object - as specified in a - SETATTR operation? + cansettime 15 bool READ True, if the server + able to change the + times for a + filesystem object as + specified in a + SETATTR operation. - case_insensitive 16 bool READ - Are filename + case_insensitive 16 bool READ True, if filename comparisons on this file system case - insensitive? + insensitive. - case_preserving 17 bool READ - Is filename case on - this file system - preserved? + case_preserving 17 bool READ True, if filename + case on this + filesystem preserved. - chown_restricted 18 bool READ - If TRUE, the server + chown_restricted 18 bool READ If TRUE, the server will reject any request to change either the owner or the group associated with a file if the caller is not a privileged user (for example, "root" in - Unix operating - environments or in NT - the "Take Ownership" - privilege) + UNIX operating + environments or in + Windows 2000 the + "Take Ownership" + privilege). -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - fileid 20 uint64 READ - A number uniquely + fileid 20 uint64 READ A number uniquely identifying the file - within the file - system. + within the + filesystem. - files_avail 21 uint64 READ - File slots available + files_avail 21 uint64 READ File slots available to this user on the - file system - containing this - object - this should - be the smallest - relevant limit. + filesystem containing + this object - this + should be the + smallest relevant + limit. - files_free 22 uint64 READ - Free file slots on + files_free 22 uint64 READ Free file slots on the file system containing this object - this should be the smallest relevant limit. - files_total 23 uint64 READ - Total file slots on + files_total 23 uint64 READ Total file slots on the file system containing this object. - fs_locations 24 fs_locations READ - Locations where this + fs_locations 24 fs_locations READ Locations where this file system may be found. If the server returns NFS4ERR_MOVED as an error, this - attribute must be + attribute MUST be supported. - hidden 25 bool R/W - Is file considered - hidden with respect - to the WIN32 API? + hidden 25 bool R/W True, if the file is + considered hidden + with respect to the + Windows API? - homogeneous 26 bool READ - Whether or not this + homogeneous 26 bool READ True, if this object's file system is homogeneous, i.e. are per file system attributes the same for all file system's objects. - maxfilesize 27 uint64 READ - Maximum supported + maxfilesize 27 uint64 READ Maximum supported file size for the file system of this object. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - maxlink 28 uint32 READ - Maximum number of + maxlink 28 uint32 READ Maximum number of links for this object. - maxname 29 uint32 READ - Maximum filename size + maxname 29 uint32 READ Maximum filename size supported for this object. - maxread 30 uint64 READ - Maximum read size + maxread 30 uint64 READ Maximum read size supported for this object. maxwrite 31 uint64 READ Maximum write size supported for this object. This attribute SHOULD be supported if the file is writable. Lack of this attribute can lead to the client either wasting bandwidth or not receiving the best performance. - mimetype 32 utf8<> R/W - MIME body + mimetype 32 utf8<> R/W MIME body type/subtype of this object. - mode 33 mode4 R/W - Unix-style permission - bits for this object - (deprecated in favor - of ACLs) + mode 33 mode4 R/W UNIX-style mode and + permission bits for + this object. - no_trunc 34 bool READ - If a name longer than - name_max is used, - will an error be - returned or will the - name be truncated? + no_trunc 34 bool READ True, if a name + longer than name_max + is used, an error be + returned and name is + not truncated. - numlinks 35 uint32 READ - Number of hard links + numlinks 35 uint32 READ Number of hard links to this object. - owner 36 utf8<> R/W - The string name of + owner 36 utf8<> R/W The string name of the owner of this object. - owner_group 37 utf8<> R/W - The string name of + owner_group 37 utf8<> R/W The string name of the group ownership of this object. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - quota_avail_hard 38 uint64 READ - For definition see + quota_avail_hard 38 uint64 READ For definition see "Quota Attributes" section below. - quota_avail_soft 39 uint64 READ - For definition see + quota_avail_soft 39 uint64 READ For definition see "Quota Attributes" section below. - quota_used 40 uint64 READ - For definition see + quota_used 40 uint64 READ For definition see "Quota Attributes" section below. - rawdev 41 specdata4 READ - Raw device - identifier. Unix + rawdev 41 specdata4 READ Raw device + identifier. UNIX device major/minor - node information. + node information. If + the value of type is + not NF4BLK or NF4CHR, + the value return + SHOULD NOT be + considered useful. - space_avail 42 uint64 READ - Disk space in bytes + space_avail 42 uint64 READ Disk space in bytes available to this - user on the file - system containing + user on the + filesystem containing this object - this should be the smallest relevant limit. - space_free 43 uint64 READ - Free disk space in - bytes on the file - system containing + space_free 43 uint64 READ Free disk space in + bytes on the + filesystem containing this object - this should be the smallest relevant limit. - space_total 44 uint64 READ - Total disk space in - bytes on the file - system containing + space_total 44 uint64 READ Total disk space in + bytes on the + filesystem containing this object. - space_used 45 uint64 READ - Number of file system + space_used 45 uint64 READ Number of filesystem bytes allocated to this object. - system 46 bool R/W - Is this file a system - file with respect to - the WIN32 API? +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - time_access 47 nfstime4 READ - The time of last - access to the object. + system 46 bool R/W True, if this file is + a "system" file with + respect to the + Windows API? -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + time_access 47 nfstime4 READ The time of last + access to the object + by a read that was + satisfied by the + server. - time_access_set 48 settime4 WRITE - Set the time of last + time_access_set 48 settime4 WRITE Set the time of last access to the object. SETATTR use only. - time_backup 49 nfstime4 R/W - The time of last + time_backup 49 nfstime4 R/W The time of last backup of the object. time_create 50 nfstime4 R/W The time of creation of the object. This attribute does not have any relation to - the traditional Unix + the traditional UNIX file attribute "ctime" or "change time". - time_delta 51 nfstime4 READ - Smallest useful + time_delta 51 nfstime4 READ Smallest useful server time granularity. - time_metadata 52 nfstime4 R/W - The time of last + time_metadata 52 nfstime4 R/W The time of last meta-data modification of the object. - time_modify 53 nfstime4 READ - The time of last + time_modify 53 nfstime4 READ The time of last modification to the object. - time_modify_set 54 settime4 WRITE - Set the time of last + time_modify_set 54 settime4 WRITE Set the time of last modification to the object. SETATTR use only. -5.6. Interpreting owner and owner_group + mounted_on_fileid 55 uint64 READ Like fileid, but if + the target filehandle + is the root of a + filesystem return the + fileid of the + underlying directory. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +5.7. Time Access + + As defined above, the time_access attribute represents the time of + last access to the object by a read that was satisfied by the server. + The notion of what is an "access" depends on server's operating + environment and/or the server's filesystem semantics. For example, + for servers obeying POSIX semantics, time_access would be updated + only by the READLINK, READ, and READDIR operations and not any of the + operations that modify the content of the object. Of course, setting + the corresponding time_access_set attribute is another way to modify + the time_access attribute. + + Whenever the file object resides on a writeable filesystem, the + server should make best efforts to record time_access into stable + storage. However, to mitigate the performance effects of doing so, + and most especially whenever the server is satisifying the read of + the object's content from its cache, the server MAY cache access time + updates and lazily write them to stable storage. It is also + acceptable to give administrators of the server the option to disable + time_access updates. + +5.8. Interpreting owner and owner_group The recommended attributes "owner" and "owner_group" (and also users and groups within the "acl" attribute) are represented in terms of a UTF-8 string. To avoid a representation that is tied to a particular underlying implementation at the client or server, the use of the UTF-8 string has been chosen. Note that section 6.1 of [RFC2624] provides additional rationale. It is expected that the client and server will have their own local representation of owner and owner_group that is used for local storage or presentation to the end user. Therefore, it is expected that when these attributes are transferred between the client and server that the local representation is translated to a syntax of the form "user@dns_domain". This will allow for a client and server that do not use the same local representation the ability to translate to a common syntax that can be interpreted by both. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - Similarly, security principals may be represented in different ways by different security mechanisms. Servers normally translate these representations into a common format, generally that used by local storage, to serve as a means of identifying the users corresponding to these security principals. When these local identifiers are translated to the form of the owner attribute, associated with files created by such principals they identify, in a common format, the users associated with each corresponding set of security principals. The translation used to interpret owner and group strings is not specified as part of the protocol. This allows various solutions to be employed. For example, a local translation table may be consulted that maps between a numeric id to the user@dns_domain syntax. A name + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + service may also be used to accomplish the translation. A server may provide a more general service, not limited by any particular translation (which would only translate a limited set of possible strings) by storing the owner and owner_group attributes in local storage without any translation or it may augment a translation method by storing the entire string for attributes for which no translation is available while using the local representation for those cases in which a translation is available. Servers that do not provide support for all possible values of the @@ -2020,183 +2175,299 @@ constraints. In the case where there is no translation available to the client or server, the attribute value must be constructed without the "@". Therefore, the absence of the @ from the owner or owner_group attribute signifies that no translation was available at the sender and that the receiver of the attribute should not use that string as a basis for translation into its own internal format. Even though the attribute value can not be translated, it may still be useful. In the case of a client, the attribute string may be used for local - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - display of ownership. To provide a greater degree of compatibility with previous versions of NFS (i.e. v2 and v3), which identified users and groups by 32-bit unsigned uid's and gid's, owner and group strings that consist of decimal numeric values with no leading zeros can be given a special interpretation by clients and servers which choose to provide such support. The receiver may treat such a user or group string as representing the same user as would be represented by a v2/v3 uid or gid having the corresponding numeric value. A server is not obligated to accept such a string, but may return an NFS4ERR_BADOWNER instead. To avoid this mechanism being used to subvert user and group translation, so that a client might pass all of the owners and + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + groups in numeric form, a server SHOULD return an NFS4ERR_BADOWNER error when there is a valid translation for the user or owner designated in this way. In that case, the client must use the appropriate name@domain string and not the special form for compatibility. The owner string "nobody" may be used to designate an anonymous user, which will be associated with a file created by a security principal that cannot be mapped through normal means to the owner attribute. -5.7. Character Case Attributes +5.9. Character Case Attributes With respect to the case_insensitive and case_preserving attributes, each UCS-4 character (which UTF-8 encodes) has a "long descriptive name" [RFC1345] which may or may not included the word "CAPITAL" or "SMALL". The presence of SMALL or CAPITAL allows an NFS server to implement unambiguous and efficient table driven mappings for case insensitive comparisons, and non-case-preserving storage. For general character handling and internationalization issues, see the section "Internationalization". -5.8. Quota Attributes +5.10. Quota Attributes For the attributes related to file system quotas, the following definitions apply: quota_avail_soft The value in bytes which represents the amount of additional disk space that can be allocated to this file or directory before the user may reasonably be warned. It is understood that this space may be consumed by allocations to other files or directories though there is a rule as to which other files or directories. quota_avail_hard The value in bytes which represent the amount of additional disk - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - space beyond the current allocation that can be allocated to this file or directory before further allocations will be refused. It is understood that this space may be consumed by allocations to other files or directories. quota_used The value in bytes which represent the amount of disc space used by this file or directory and possibly a number of other similar files or directories, where the set of "similar" meets at least the criterion that allocating space to any file or directory in the set will reduce the "quota_avail_hard" of every other file or directory in the set. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Note that there may be a number of distinct but overlapping sets of files or directories for which a quota_used value is maintained. E.g. "all files with a given owner", "all files with a given group owner". etc. The server is at liberty to choose any of those sets but should do so in a repeatable way. The rule may be configured per- filesystem or may be "choose the set with the smallest quota". -5.9. Access Control Lists - - The NFS ACL attribute is an array of access control entries (ACE). - There are various access control entry types. The server is able to - communicate which ACE types are supported by returning the - appropriate value within the aclsupport attribute. The types of ACEs - are defined as follows: - - Type Description - _____________________________________________________ - ALLOW - Explicitly grants the access defined in - acemask4 to the file or directory. - - DENY - Explicitly denies the access defined in - acemask4 to the file or directory. - - AUDIT - LOG (system dependent) any access - attempt to a file or directory which - uses any of the access methods specified - in acemask4. +5.11. Access Control Lists - ALARM - Generate a system ALARM (system - dependent) when any access attempt is - made to a file or directory for the - access methods specified in acemask4. + The NFS version 4 ACL attribute is an array of access control entries + (ACE). There are various access control entry types, as defined in + the Section "ACE type". The server is able to communicate which ACE + types are supported by returning the appropriate value within the + aclsupport attribute. Each ACE covers one or more operations on a + file or directory as described in the Section "ACE Access Mask". It + may also contain one or more flags that modify the semantics of the + ACE as defined in the Section "ACE flag". The NFS ACE attribute is defined as follows: -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - typedef uint32_t acetype4; typedef uint32_t aceflag4; typedef uint32_t acemask4; struct nfsace4 { acetype4 type; aceflag4 flag; acemask4 access_mask; utf8string who; }; - To determine if an ACCESS or OPEN request succeeds each nfsace4 entry - is processed in order by the server. Only ACEs which have a "who" - that matches the requester are considered. Each ACE is processed - until all of the bits of the requester's access have been ALLOWED. - Once a bit (see below) has been ALLOWED by an ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE, it - is no longer considered in the processing of later ACEs. If an - ACCESS_DENIED_ACE is encountered where the requester's mode still has - unALLOWED bits in common with the "access_mask" of the ACE, the - request is denied. + To determine if a request succeeds, each nfsace4 entry is processed + in order by the server. Only ACEs which have a "who" that matches + the requester are considered. Each ACE is processed until all of the + bits of the requester's access have been ALLOWED. Once a bit (see + below) has been ALLOWED by an ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE, it is no longer + considered in the processing of later ACEs. If an ACCESS_DENIED_ACE + is encountered where the requester's access still has unALLOWED bits + in common with the "access_mask" of the ACE, the request is denied. + However, unlike the ALLOWED and DENIED ACE types, the ALARM and AUDIT + ACE types do not affect a requestor's access, and instead are for + triggering events as a result of a requestor's access attempt. + Therefore, all AUDIT and ALARM ACEs are processed until end of the + ACL. - The bitmask constants used to represent the above definitions within - the aclsupport attribute are as follows: + The NFS version 4 ACL model is quite rich. Some server platforms may + provide access control functionality that goes beyond the UNIX-style + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + mode attribute, but which is not as rich as the NFS ACL model. So + that users can take advantage of this more limited functionality, the + server may indicate that it supports ACLs as long as it follows the + guidelines for mapping between its ACL model and the NFS version 4 + ACL model. + + The situation is complicated by the fact that a server may have + multiple modules that enforce ACLs. For example, the enforcement for + NFS version 4 access may be different from the enforcement for local + access, and both may be different from the enforcement for access + through other protocols such as SMB. So it may be useful for a + server to accept an ACL even if not all of its modules are able to + support it. + + The guiding principle in all cases is that the server must not accept + ACLs that appear to make the file more secure than it really is. + +5.11.1. ACE type + + Type Description + _____________________________________________________ + ALLOW Explicitly grants the access defined in + acemask4 to the file or directory. + + DENY Explicitly denies the access defined in + acemask4 to the file or directory. + + AUDIT LOG (system dependent) any access + attempt to a file or directory which + uses any of the access methods specified + in acemask4. + + ALARM Generate a system ALARM (system + dependent) when any access attempt is + made to a file or directory for the + access methods specified in acemask4. + + A server need not support all of the above ACE types. The bitmask + constants used to represent the above definitions within the + aclsupport attribute are as follows: const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALLOW_ACL = 0x00000001; const ACL4_SUPPORT_DENY_ACL = 0x00000002; const ACL4_SUPPORT_AUDIT_ACL = 0x00000004; const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALARM_ACL = 0x00000008; -5.9.1. ACE type - The semantics of the "type" field follow the descriptions provided + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + above. - The bitmask constants used for the type field are as follows: + The constants used for the type field (acetype4) are as follows: const ACE4_ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000000; const ACE4_ACCESS_DENIED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000001; const ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000003; -5.9.2. ACE flag + Clients should not attempt to set an ACE unless the server claims + support for that ACE type. If the server receives a request to set + an ACE that it cannot store, it must reject the request with + NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP. + + If the server receives a request to set an ACE that it can store but + cannot enforce, the server SHOULD reject the request. + + Example: suppose a server can enforce NFS ACLs for NFS access but + cannot enforce ACLs for local access. If arbitrary processes can run + on the server, then the server SHOULD NOT indicate ACL support. On + the other hand, if only trusted administrative programs run locally, + then the server may indicate ACL support. + +5.11.2. ACE Access Mask + + The access_mask field contains values based on the following: + + Access Description + _______________________________________________________________ + READ_DATA Permission to read the data of the file + LIST_DIRECTORY Permission to list the contents of a + directory + WRITE_DATA Permission to modify the file's data + ADD_FILE Permission to add a new file to a + directory + APPEND_DATA Permission to append data to a file + ADD_SUBDIRECTORY Permission to create a subdirectory to a + directory + READ_NAMED_ATTRS Permission to read the named attributes + of a file + WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS Permission to write the named attributes + of a file + EXECUTE Permission to execute a file + DELETE_CHILD Permission to delete a file or directory + within a directory + READ_ATTRIBUTES The ability to read basic attributes + (non-acls) of a file + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + WRITE_ATTRIBUTES Permission to change basic attributes + (non-acls) of a file + + DELETE Permission to Delete the file + READ_ACL Permission to Read the ACL + WRITE_ACL Permission to Write the ACL + WRITE_OWNER Permission to change the owner + SYNCHRONIZE Permission to access file locally at the + server with synchronous reads and writes + + The bitmask constants used for the access mask field are as follows: + + const ACE4_READ_DATA = 0x00000001; + const ACE4_LIST_DIRECTORY = 0x00000001; + const ACE4_WRITE_DATA = 0x00000002; + const ACE4_ADD_FILE = 0x00000002; + const ACE4_APPEND_DATA = 0x00000004; + const ACE4_ADD_SUBDIRECTORY = 0x00000004; + const ACE4_READ_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000008; + const ACE4_WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000010; + const ACE4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020; + const ACE4_DELETE_CHILD = 0x00000040; + const ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000080; + const ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000100; + const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000; + const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000; + const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000; + const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000; + const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000; + + Server implementations need not provide the granularity of control + that is implied by this list of masks. For example, POSIX-based + systems might not distinguish APPEND_DATA (the ability to append to a + file) from WRITE_DATA (the ability to modify existing contents); both + masks would be tied to a single ``write'' permission. When such a + server returns attributes to the client, it would show both + APPEND_DATA and WRITE_DATA if and only if the write permission is + enabled. + + If a server receives a SETATTR request that it cannot accurately + implement, it should error in the direction of more restricted + access. For example, suppose a server cannot distinguish overwriting + data from appending new data, as described in the previous paragraph. + If a client submits an ACE where APPEND_DATA is set but WRITE_DATA is + not (or vice versa), the server should reject the request with + NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP. Nonetheless, if the ACE has type DENY, the + server may silently turn on the other bit, so that both APPEND_DATA + and WRITE_DATA are denied. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +5.11.3. ACE flag The "flag" field contains values based on the following descriptions. ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE Can be placed on a directory and indicates that this ACE should be added to each new non-directory file created. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE Can be placed on a directory and indicates that this ACE should be added to each new directory created. ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE Can be placed on a directory but does not apply to the directory, only to newly created files/directories as specified by the above two flags. @@ -2208,216 +2479,272 @@ ACL4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE, two ACEs are placed on the new directory. One for the directory itself and one which is an inheritable ACE for newly created directories. This flag tells the server to not place an ACE on the newly created directory which is inheritable by subdirectories of the created directory. ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG ACL4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG - Both indicate for AUDIT and ALARM which state to log the event. On - every ACCESS or OPEN call which occurs on a file or directory which - has an ACL that is of type ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE or - ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE, the attempted access is compared to the - ace4mask of these ACLs. If the access is a subset of ace4mask and the - identifier match, an AUDIT trail or an ALARM is generated. By - default this happens regardless of the success or failure of the - ACCESS or OPEN call. + The ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG (SUCCESS) and + ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG (FAILED) flag bits relate only to + ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE (AUDIT) and ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE + (ALARM) ACE types. If during the processing of the file's ACL, the + server encounters an AUDIT or ALARM ACE that matches the principal + attempting the OPEN, the server notes that fact, and the prescence, + if any, of the SUCCESS and FAILED flags encountered in the AUDIT or + ALARM ACE. Once the server completes the ACL processing, and the + share reservation processing, and the OPEN call, it then notes if the + OPEN succeeded or failed. If the OPEN succeeded, and if the SUCCESS + flag was set for a matching AUDIT or ALARM, then the appropriate + AUDIT or ALARM event occurs. If the OPEN failed, and if the FAILED + flag was set for the matching AUDIT or ALARM, then the appropriate - The flag ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG only produces the AUDIT or - ALARM if the ACCESS or OPEN call is successful. The - ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG causes the ALARM or AUDIT if the ACCESS - or OPEN call fails. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + AUDIT or ALARM event occurs. Clearly either or both of the SUCCESS + or FAILED can be set, but if neither is set, the AUDIT or ALARM ACE + is not useful. + + The previously described processing applies to that of the ACCESS + operation as well. The difference being that "success" or "failure" + does not mean whether ACCESS returns NFS4_OK or not. Success means + whether ACCESS returns all requested and supported bits. Failure + means whether ACCESS failed to return a bit that was requested and + supported. ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP - Indicates that the "who" refers to a GROUP as defined under Unix. + Indicates that the "who" refers to a GROUP as defined under UNIX. The bitmask constants used for the flag field are as follows: const ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000001; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - const ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000004; const ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE = 0x00000008; const ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000010; const ACE4_FAILED_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000020; const ACE4_IDENTIFIER_GROUP = 0x00000040; -5.9.3. ACE Access Mask - - The access_mask field contains values based on the following: - - Access Description - _______________________________________________________________ - READ_DATA - Permission to read the data of the file - LIST_DIRECTORY - Permission to list the contents of a - directory - WRITE_DATA - Permission to modify the file's data - ADD_FILE - Permission to add a new file to a - directory - APPEND_DATA - Permission to append data to a file - ADD_SUBDIRECTORY - Permission to create a subdirectory to a - directory - READ_NAMED_ATTRS - Permission to read the named attributes - of a file - WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS - Permission to write the named attributes - of a file - EXECUTE - Permission to execute a file - DELETE_CHILD - Permission to delete a file or directory - within a directory - READ_ATTRIBUTES - The ability to read basic attributes - (non-acls) of a file - WRITE_ATTRIBUTES - Permission to change basic attributes - (non-acls) of a file - - DELETE - Permission to Delete the file - READ_ACL - Permission to Read the ACL - WRITE_ACL - Permission to Write the ACL - WRITE_OWNER - Permission to change the owner - SYNCHRONIZE - Permission to access file locally at the - server with synchronous reads and writes - - The bitmask constants used for the access mask field are as follows: - - const ACE4_READ_DATA = 0x00000001; - const ACE4_LIST_DIRECTORY = 0x00000001; - const ACE4_WRITE_DATA = 0x00000002; - const ACE4_ADD_FILE = 0x00000002; - const ACE4_APPEND_DATA = 0x00000004; - const ACE4_ADD_SUBDIRECTORY = 0x00000004; - const ACE4_READ_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000008; + A server need not support any of these flags. If the server supports + flags that are similar to, but not exactly the same as, these flags, + the implementation may define a mapping between the protocol-defined + flags and the implementation-defined flags. Again, the guiding + principle is that the file not appear to be more secure than it + really is. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + For example, suppose a client tries to set an ACE with + ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE set but not ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE. If the + server does not support any form of ACL inheritance, the server + should reject the request with NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP. If the server + supports a single "inherit ACE" flag that applies to both files and + directories, the server may reject the request (i.e., requiring the + client to set both the file and directory inheritance flags). The + server may also accept the request and silently turn on the + ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE flag. - const ACE4_WRITE_NAMED_ATTRS = 0x00000010; - const ACE4_EXECUTE = 0x00000020; - const ACE4_DELETE_CHILD = 0x00000040; - const ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000080; - const ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES = 0x00000100; +5.11.4. ACE who - const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000; - const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000; - const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000; - const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000; - const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000; + There are several special identifiers ("who") which need to be + understood universally, rather than in the context of a particular + DNS domain. Some of these identifiers cannot be understood when an + NFS client accesses the server, but have meaning when a local process -5.9.4. ACE who +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - There are several special identifiers ("who") which need to be - understood universally. Some of these identifiers cannot be - understood when an NFS client accesses the server, but have meaning - when a local process accesses the file. The ability to display and - modify these permissions is permitted over NFS. + accesses the file. The ability to display and modify these + permissions is permitted over NFS, even if none of the access methods + on the server understands the identifiers. Who Description _______________________________________________________________ - "OWNER" - The owner of the file. - "GROUP" - The group associated with the file. - "EVERYONE" - The world. - "INTERACTIVE" - Accessed from an interactive terminal. - "NETWORK" - Accessed via the network. - "DIALUP" - Accessed as a dialup user to the server. - "BATCH" - Accessed from a batch job. - "ANONYMOUS" - Accessed without any authentication. - "AUTHENTICATED" - Any authenticated user (opposite of + "OWNER" The owner of the file. + "GROUP" The group associated with the file. + "EVERYONE" The world. + "INTERACTIVE" Accessed from an interactive terminal. + "NETWORK" Accessed via the network. + "DIALUP" Accessed as a dialup user to the server. + "BATCH" Accessed from a batch job. + "ANONYMOUS" Accessed without any authentication. + "AUTHENTICATED" Any authenticated user (opposite of ANONYMOUS) - "SERVICE" - Access from a system service. + "SERVICE" Access from a system service. To avoid conflict, these special identifiers are distinguish by an appended "@" and should appear in the form "xxxx@" (note: no domain name after the "@"). For example: ANONYMOUS@. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +5.11.5. Mode Attribute -6. File System Migration and Replication + The NFS version 4 mode attribute is based on the UNIX mode bits. The + following bits are defined: + + const MODE4_SUID = 0x800; /* set user id on execution */ + const MODE4_SGID = 0x400; /* set group id on execution */ + const MODE4_SVTX = 0x200; /* save text even after use */ + const MODE4_RUSR = 0x100; /* read permission: owner */ + const MODE4_WUSR = 0x080; /* write permission: owner */ + const MODE4_XUSR = 0x040; /* execute permission: owner */ + const MODE4_RGRP = 0x020; /* read permission: group */ + const MODE4_WGRP = 0x010; /* write permission: group */ + const MODE4_XGRP = 0x008; /* execute permission: group */ + const MODE4_ROTH = 0x004; /* read permission: other */ + const MODE4_WOTH = 0x002; /* write permission: other */ + const MODE4_XOTH = 0x001; /* execute permission: other */ + + Bits MODE4_RUSR, MODE4_WUSR, and MODE4_XUSR apply to the principal + identified in the owner attribute. Bits MODE4_RGRP, MODE4_WGRP, and + MODE4_XGRP apply to the principals identified in the owner_group + attribute. Bits MODE4_ROTH, MODE4_WOTH, MODE4_XOTH apply to any + principal that does not match that in the owner group, and does not + have a group matching that of the owner_group attribute. + + The remaining bits are not defined by this protocol and MUST NOT be + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + used. The minor version mechanism must be used to define further bit + usage. + + Note that in UNIX, if a file has the MODE4_SGID bit set and no + MODE4_XGRP bit set, then READ and WRITE must use mandatory file + locking. + +5.11.6. Mode and ACL Attribute + + The server that supports both mode and ACL must take care to + synchronize the MODE4_*USR, MODE4_*GRP, and MODE4_*OTH bits with the + ACEs which have respective who fields of "OWNER@", "GROUP@", and + "EVERYONE@" so that the client can see semantically equivalent access + permissions exist whether the client asks for owner, owner_group and + mode attributes, or for just the ACL. + + Because the mode attribute includes bits (e.g. MODE4_SVTX) that have + nothing to do with ACL semantics, it is permitted for clients to + specify both the ACL attribute and mode in the same SETATTR + operation. However, because there is no prescribed order for + processing the attributes in a SETATTR, the client must ensure that + ACL attribute, if specified without mode, would produce the desired + mode bits, and conversely, the mode attribute if specified without + ACL, would produce the desired "OWNER@", "GROUP@", and "EVERYONE@" + ACEs. + +5.11.7. mounted_on_fileid + + UNIX-based operating environments connect a filesystem into the + namespace by connecting (mounting) the filesystem onto the existing + file object (the mount point, usually a directory) of an existing + filesystem. When the mount point's parent directory is read via an + API like readdir(), the return results are directory entries, each + with a component name and a fileid. The fileid of the mount point's + directory entry will be different from the fileid that the stat() + system call returns. The stat() system call is returning the fileid + of the root of the mounted filesystem, whereas readdir() is returning + the fileid stat() would have returned before any filesystems were + mounted on the mount point. + + Unlike NFS version 3, NFS version 4 allows a client's LOOKUP request + to cross other filesystems. The client detects the filesystem + crossing whenever the filehandle argument of LOOKUP has an fsid + attribute different from that of the filehandle returned by LOOKUP. A + UNIX-based client will consider this a "mount point crossing". UNIX + has a legacy scheme for allowing a process to determine its current + working directory. This relies on readdir() of a mount point's parent + and stat() of the mount point returning fileids as previously + described. The mounted_on_fileid attribute corresponds to the fileid + that readdir() would have returned as described previously. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + While the NFS version 4 client could simply fabricate a fileid + corresponding to what mounted_on_fileid provides (and if the server + does not support mounted_on_fileid, the client has no choice), there + is a risk that the client will generate a fileid that conflicts with + one that is already assigned to another object in the filesystem. + Instead, if the server can provide the mounted_on_fileid, the + potential for client operational problems in this area is eliminated. + + If the server detects that there is no mounted point at the target + file object, then the value for mounted_on_fileid that it returns is + the same as that of the fileid attribute. + + The mounted_on_fileid attribute is RECOMMENDED, so the server SHOULD + provide it if possible, and for a UNIX-based server, this is + straightforward. Usually, mounted_on_fileid will be requested during + a READDIR operation, in which case it is trivial (at least for UNIX- + based servers) to return mounted_on_fileid since it is equal to the + fileid of a directory entry returned by readdir(). If + mounted_on_fileid is requested in a GETATTR operation, the server + should obey an invariant that has it returning a value that is equal + to the file object's entry in the object's parent directory, i.e. + what readdir() would have returned. Some operating environments + allow a series of two or more filesystems to be mounted onto a single + mount point. In this case, for the server to obey the aforementioned + invariant, it will need to find the base mount point, and not the + intermediate mount points. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +6. Filesystem Migration and Replication With the use of the recommended attribute "fs_locations", the NFS version 4 server has a method of providing file system migration or replication services. For the purposes of migration and replication, a file system will be defined as all files that share a given fsid (both major and minor values are the same). The fs_locations attribute provides a list of file system locations. These locations are specified by providing the server name (either DNS domain or IP address) and the path name representing the root of - the file system. Depending on the type of service being provided, - the list will provide a new location or a set of alternate locations - for the file system. The client will use this information to - redirect its requests to the new server. + the filesystem. Depending on the type of service being provided, the + list will provide a new location or a set of alternate locations for + the filesystem. The client will use this information to redirect its + requests to the new server. 6.1. Replication It is expected that file system replication will be used in the case of read-only data. Typically, the file system will be replicated on two or more servers. The fs_locations attribute will provide the - list of these locations to the client. On first access of the file - system, the client should obtain the value of the fs_locations + list of these locations to the client. On first access of the + filesystem, the client should obtain the value of the fs_locations attribute. If, in the future, the client finds the server unresponsive, the client may attempt to use another server specified by fs_locations. If applicable, the client must take the appropriate steps to recover valid filehandles from the new server. This is described in more detail in the following sections. 6.2. Migration - File system migration is used to move a file system from one server - to another. Migration is typically used for a file system that is + Filesystem migration is used to move a filesystem from one server to + another. Migration is typically used for a filesystem that is writable and has a single copy. The expected use of migration is for load balancing or general resource reallocation. The protocol does not specify how the file system will be moved between servers. This server-to-server transfer mechanism is left to the server implementor. However, the method used to communicate the migration event between client and server is specified here. Once the servers participating in the migration have completed the move of the file system, the error NFS4ERR_MOVED will be returned for subsequent requests received by the original server. The NFS4ERR_MOVED error is returned for all operations except PUTFH and GETATTR. Upon receiving the NFS4ERR_MOVED error, the client will obtain the value of the fs_locations attribute. The client will then use the contents of the attribute to redirect its requests to the specified server. To facilitate the use of GETATTR, operations such -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 as PUTFH must also be accepted by the server for the migrated file system's filehandles. Note that if the server returns NFS4ERR_MOVED, the server MUST support the fs_locations attribute. If the client requests more attributes than just fs_locations, the server may return fs_locations only. This is to be expected since the server has migrated the file system and may not have a method of obtaining additional attribute data. @@ -2436,83 +2763,87 @@ struct fs_location { utf8string server<>; pathname4 rootpath; }; struct fs_locations { pathname4 fs_root; fs_location locations<>; }; - The fs_location struct is used to represent the location of a file - system by providing a server name and the path to the root of the + The fs_location struct is used to represent the location of a + filesystem by providing a server name and the path to the root of the file system. For a multi-homed server or a set of servers that use the same rootpath, an array of server names may be provided. An entry in the server array is an UTF8 string and represents one of a traditional DNS host name, IPv4 address, or IPv6 address. It is not a requirement that all servers that share the same rootpath be listed in one fs_location struct. The array of server names is provided for convenience. Servers that share the same rootpath may also be listed in separate fs_location entries in the fs_locations attribute. The fs_locations struct and attribute then contains an array of locations. Since the name space of each server may be constructed differently, the "fs_root" field is provided. The path represented by fs_root represents the location of the file system in the server's name space. Therefore, the fs_root path is only associated with the server from which the fs_locations attribute was obtained. The - fs_root path is meant to aid the client in locating the file system - at the various servers listed. + fs_root path is meant to aid the client in locating the filesystem at + the various servers listed. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 As an example, there is a replicated file system located at two servers (servA and servB). At servA the file system is located at path "/a/b/c". At servB the file system is located at path "/x/y/z". In this example the client accesses the file system first at servA with a multi-component lookup path of "/a/b/c/d". Since the client used a multi-component lookup to obtain the filehandle at "/a/b/c/d", it is unaware that the file system's root is located in servA's name space at "/a/b/c". When the client switches to servB, it will need to determine that the directory it first referenced at servA is now represented by the path "/x/y/z/d" on servB. To facilitate this, the fs_locations attribute provided by servA would have a fs_root value of "/a/b/c" and two entries in fs_location. One entry in fs_location will be for itself (servA) and the other will be for servB with a path of "/x/y/z". With this information, the client is able to substitute "/x/y/z" for the "/a/b/c" at the beginning of its access path and construct "/x/y/z/d" to use for the new server. + See the section "Security Considerations" for a discussion on the + recommendations for the security flavor to be used by any GETATTR + operation that requests the "fs_locations" attribute. + 6.4. Filehandle Recovery for Migration or Replication - Filehandles for file systems that are replicated or migrated - generally have the same semantics as for file systems that are not - replicated or migrated. For example, if a file system has persistent - filehandles and it is migrated to another server, the filehandle - values for the file system will be valid at the new server. + Filehandles for filesystems that are replicated or migrated generally + have the same semantics as for filesystems that are not replicated or + migrated. For example, if a filesystem has persistent filehandles + and it is migrated to another server, the filehandle values for the + filesystem will be valid at the new server. For volatile filehandles, the servers involved likely do not have a mechanism to transfer filehandle format and content between themselves. Therefore, a server may have difficulty in determining if a volatile filehandle from an old server should return an error of NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED. Therefore, the client is informed, with the use of the fh_expire_type attribute, whether volatile filehandles will expire at the migration or replication event. If the bit FH4_VOL_MIGRATION is set in the fh_expire_type attribute, the client must treat the volatile filehandle as if the server had returned the NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED error. At the migration or replication event in the presence of the FH4_VOL_MIGRATION bit, the client will not present the original or old volatile file handle to the new server. The client will start its communication with the new server by recovering its filehandles using the saved file names. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 7. NFS Server Name Space 7.1. Server Exports On a UNIX server the name space describes all the files reachable by pathnames under the root directory or "/". On a Windows NT server the name space constitutes all the files on disks named by mapped disk letters. NFS server administrators rarely make the entire server's file system name space available to NFS clients. More often @@ -2529,63 +2860,63 @@ The NFS version 4 protocol provides a root filehandle that clients can use to obtain filehandles for these exports via a multi-component LOOKUP. A common user experience is to use a graphical user interface (perhaps a file "Open" dialog window) to find a file via progressive browsing through a directory tree. The client must be able to move from one export to another export via single-component, progressive LOOKUP operations. This style of browsing is not well supported by the NFS version 2 and 3 protocols. The client expects all LOOKUP operations to remain - within a single server file system. For example, the device - attribute will not change. This prevents a client from taking name - space paths that span exports. + within a single server filesystem. For example, the device attribute + will not change. This prevents a client from taking name space paths + that span exports. An automounter on the client can obtain a snapshot of the server's name space using the EXPORTS procedure of the MOUNT protocol. If it understands the server's pathname syntax, it can create an image of the server's name space on the client. The parts of the name space - that are not exported by the server are filled in with a "pseudo file - system" that allows the user to browse from one mounted file system - to another. There is a drawback to this representation of the - server's name space on the client: it is static. If the server + that are not exported by the server are filled in with a "pseudo + filesystem" that allows the user to browse from one mounted + filesystem to another. There is a drawback to this representation of + the server's name space on the client: it is static. If the server administrator adds a new export the client will be unaware of it. -7.3. Server Pseudo File System +7.3. Server Pseudo Filesystem NFS version 4 servers avoid this name space inconsistency by presenting all the exports within the framework of a single server name space. An NFS version 4 client uses LOOKUP and READDIR operations to browse seamlessly from one export to another. Portions -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 of the server name space that are not exported are bridged via a "pseudo file system" that provides a view of exported directories only. A pseudo file system has a unique fsid and behaves like a normal, read only file system. Based on the construction of the server's name space, it is possible that multiple pseudo file systems may exist. For example, /a pseudo file system /a/b real file system /a/b/c pseudo file system /a/b/c/d real file system - Each of the pseudo file systems are consider separate entities and + Each of the pseudo filesystems are considered separate entities and therefore will have a unique fsid. 7.4. Multiple Roots The DOS and Windows operating environments are sometimes described as - having "multiple roots". File systems are commonly represented as + having "multiple roots". filesystems are commonly represented as disk letters. MacOS represents file systems as top level names. NFS version 4 servers for these platforms can construct a pseudo file system above these root names so that disk letters or volume names are simply directory names in the pseudo root. 7.5. Filehandle Volatility The nature of the server's pseudo file system is that it is a logical representation of file system(s) available from the server. Therefore, the pseudo file system is most likely constructed @@ -2602,21 +2933,21 @@ 7.6. Exported Root If the server's root file system is exported, one might conclude that a pseudo-file system is not needed. This would be wrong. Assume the following file systems on a server: / disk1 (exported) /a disk2 (not exported) -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 /a/b disk3 (exported) Because disk2 is not exported, disk3 cannot be reached with simple LOOKUPs. The server must bridge the gap with a pseudo-file system. 7.7. Mount Point Crossing The server file system environment may be constructed in such a way that one file system contains a directory which is 'covered' or @@ -2628,224 +2959,310 @@ The pseudo file system for this server may be constructed to look like: / (place holder/not exported) /a/b (file system 1) /a/b/c/d (file system 2) It is the server's responsibility to present the pseudo file system that is complete to the client. If the client sends a lookup request for the path "/a/b/c/d", the server's response is the filehandle of - the file system "/a/b/c/d". In previous versions of the NFS - protocol, the server would respond with the directory "/a/b/c/d" + the filesystem "/a/b/c/d". In previous versions of the NFS protocol, + the server would respond with the filehandle of directory "/a/b/c/d" within the file system "/a/b". The NFS client will be able to determine if it crosses a server mount point by a change in the value of the "fsid" attribute. 7.8. Security Policy and Name Space Presentation The application of the server's security policy needs to be carefully considered by the implementor. One may choose to limit the viewability of portions of the pseudo file system based on the server's perception of the client's ability to authenticate itself properly. However, with the support of multiple security mechanisms and the ability to negotiate the appropriate use of these mechanisms, the server is unable to properly determine if a client will be able to authenticate itself. If, based on its policies, the server chooses to limit the contents of the pseudo file system, the server may effectively hide file systems from a client that may otherwise have legitimate access. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + As suggested practice, the server should apply the security policy of + a shared resource in the server's namespace to the ancestors + components of the namespace. For example: + + / + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + /a/b + /a/b/c + The /a/b/c directory is a real filesystem and is the shared resource. + The security policy for /a/b/c is Kerberos with integrity. The + server should should apply the same security policy to /, /a, and + /a/b. This allows for the extension of the protection of the + server's namespace to the ancestors of the real shared resource. + + For the case of the use of multiple, disjoint security mechanisms in + the server's resources, the security for a particular object in the + server's namespace should be the union of all security mechanisms of + all direct descendants. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 8. File Locking and Share Reservations Integrating locking into the NFS protocol necessarily causes it to be - state-full. With the inclusion of "share" file locks the protocol + stateful. With the inclusion of share reservations the protocol becomes substantially more dependent on state than the traditional combination of NFS and NLM [XNFS]. There are three components to making this state manageable: o Clear division between client and server o Ability to reliably detect inconsistency in state between client and server o Simple and robust recovery mechanisms In this model, the server owns the state information. The client communicates its view of this state to the server as needed. The client is also able to detect inconsistent state before modifying a file. - To support Win32 "share" locks it is necessary to atomically OPEN or - CREATE files. Having a separate share/unshare operation would not - allow correct implementation of the Win32 OpenFile API. In order to - correctly implement share semantics, the previous NFS protocol - mechanisms used when a file is opened or created (LOOKUP, CREATE, - ACCESS) need to be replaced. The NFS version 4 protocol has an OPEN - operation that subsumes the NFS version 3 methodology of LOOKUP, - CREATE, and ACCESS. However, because many operations require a - filehandle, the traditional LOOKUP is preserved to map a file name to - filehandle without establishing state on the server. The policy of - granting access or modifying files is managed by the server based on - the client's state. These mechanisms can implement policy ranging + To support Win32 share reservations it is necessary to atomically + OPEN or CREATE files. Having a separate share/unshare operation + would not allow correct implementation of the Win32 OpenFile API. In + order to correctly implement share semantics, the previous NFS + protocol mechanisms used when a file is opened or created (LOOKUP, + CREATE, ACCESS) need to be replaced. The NFS version 4 protocol has + an OPEN operation that subsumes the NFS version 3 methodology of + LOOKUP, CREATE, and ACCESS. However, because many operations require + a filehandle, the traditional LOOKUP is preserved to map a file name + to filehandle without establishing state on the server. The policy + of granting access or modifying files is managed by the server based + on the client's state. These mechanisms can implement policy ranging from advisory only locking to full mandatory locking. 8.1. Locking It is assumed that manipulating a lock is rare when compared to READ and WRITE operations. It is also assumed that crashes and network partitions are relatively rare. Therefore it is important that the READ and WRITE operations have a lightweight mechanism to indicate if they possess a held lock. A lock request contains the heavyweight information required to establish a lock and uniquely define the lock owner. The following sections describe the transition from the heavy weight information to the eventual stateid used for most client and server locking and lease interactions. 8.1.1. Client ID For each LOCK request, the client must identify itself to the server. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 This is done in such a way as to allow for correct lock - identification and crash recovery. Client identification is - accomplished with two values. + identification and crash recovery. A sequence of a SETCLIENTID + operation followed by a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation is required to + establish the identification onto the server. Establishment of + identification by a new incarnation of the client also has the effect + of immediately breaking any leased state that a previous incarnation + of the client might have had on the server, as opposed to forcing the + new client incarnation to wait for the leases to expire. Breaking + the lease state amounts to the server removing all lock, share + reservation, and, where the server is not supporting the + CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV claim type, all delegation state associated with + same client with the same identity. For discussion of delegation + state recovery, see the section "Delegation Recovery". - o A verifier that is used to detect client reboots. + Client identification is encapsulated in the following structure: - o A variable length opaque array to uniquely define a client. + struct nfs_client_id4 { + verifier4 verifier; + opaque id; + }; - For an operating system this may be a fully qualified host - name or IP address. For a user level NFS client it may - additionally contain a process id or other unique sequence. + The first field, verifier is a client incarnation verifier that is + used to detect client reboots. Only if the verifier is different from + that the server has previously recorded the client (as identified by + the second field f the structure, id) does the server start the + process of cancelling the client's leased state. - The data structure for the Client ID would then appear as: + The second field, id is a variable length string that uniquely + defines the client. - struct nfs_client_id { - opaque verifier[4]; - opaque id<>; - } + There are several considerations for how the client generates the id + string: - It is possible through the mis-configuration of a client or the - existence of a rogue client that two clients end up using the same - nfs_client_id. This situation is avoided by "negotiating" the - nfs_client_id between client and server with the use of the - SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operations. The following - describes the two scenarios of negotiation. + o The string should be unique so that multiple clients do not + present the same string. The consequences of two clients + presenting the same string range from one client getting an + error to one client having its leased state abruptly and + unexpectedly cancelled. - 1 Client has never connected to the server + o The string should be selected so the subsequent incarnations + (e.g. reboots) of the same client cause the client to present + the same string. The implementor is cautioned from an approach + that requires the string to be recorded in a local file because + this precludes the use of the implementation in an environment + where there is no local disk and all file access is from an NFS + version 4 server. - In this case the client generates an nfs_client_id and - unless another client has the same nfs_client_id.id field, - the server accepts the request. The server also records the - principal (or principal to uid mapping) from the credential - in the RPC request that contains the nfs_client_id - negotiation request (SETCLIENTID operation). + o The string should be different for each server network address + that the client accesses, rather than common to all server + network addresses. The reason is that it may not be possible for + the client to tell if same server is listening on multiple + network addresses. If the client issues SETCLIENTID with the - Two clients might still use the same nfs_client_id.id due - to perhaps configuration error. For example, a High - Availability configuration where the nfs_client_id.id is - derived from the ethernet controller address and both - systems have the same address. In this case, the result is - a switched union that returns, in addition to - NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE, the network address (the rpcbind netid - and universal address) of the client that is using the id. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - 2 Client is re-connecting to the server after a client reboot + same id string to each network address of such a server, the + server will think it is the same client, and each successive + SETCLIENTID will cause the server to begin the process of + removing the client's previous leased state. - In this case, the client still generates an nfs_client_id - but the nfs_client_id.id field will be the same as the - nfs_client_id.id generated prior to reboot. If the server - finds that the principal/uid is equal to the previously - "registered" nfs_client_id.id, the server creates and + o The algorithm for generating the string should not assume that + the client's network address won't change. This includes + changes between client incarnations and even changes while the + client is stilling running in its current incarnation. This + means that if the client includes just the client's and server's + network address in the id string, there is a real risk, after + the client gives up the network address, that another client, + using a similar algorithm for generate the id string, will + generating a conflicting id string. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + Given the above considerations, an example of a well generated id + string is one that includes: - returns a new clientid in response to the SETCLIENTID. If - the principal/uid is not equal, then this is a rogue client - and the request is returned in error. For more discussion - of crash recovery semantics, see the section on "Crash - Recovery". + o The server's network address. - It is possible for a retransmission of request to be received by the - server after the server has acted upon and responded to the original - client request. Therefore to mitigate effects of the retransmission - of the SETCLIENTID operation, the client and server use a - confirmation step. The client uses the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation - with the server provided clientid to confirm the client's use of the - new clientid. Once the server receives the confirmation from the - client, the locking state for the client is released. + o The client's network address. - In both cases, upon success, NFS4_OK is returned. To help reduce the - amount of data transferred on OPEN and LOCK, the server will also - return a unique 64-bit clientid value that is a shorthand reference - to the nfs_client_id values presented by the client. From this point - forward, the client will use the clientid to refer to itself. + o For a user level NFS version 4 client, it should contain + additional information to distinguish the client from other user + level clients running on the same host, such as a process id or + other unique sequence. - The clientid assigned by the server should be chosen so that it will - not conflict with a clientid previously assigned by the server. This - applies across server restarts or reboots. When a clientid is - presented to a server and that clientid is not recognized, as would - happen after a server reboot, the server will reject the request with - the error NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID. When this happens, the client must - obtain a new clientid by use of the SETCLIENTID operation and then - proceed to any other necessary recovery for the server reboot case - (See the section "Server Failure and Recovery"). + o Additional information that tends to be unique, such as one or + more of: + + - The client machines serial number (for privacy reasons, it is + best to perform some one way function on the serial number). + + - A MAC address. + + - The timestamp of when the NFS version 4 software was first + installed on the client (though this is subject to the + previously mentioned caution about using information that is + stored in a file, because the file might only be accessible + over NFS version 4). + + - A true random number. However since this number ought to be + the same between client incarnations, this shares the same + problem as that of the using the timestamp of the software + installation. + + As a security measure, the server MUST NOT cancel a client's leased + state if the principal established the state for a given id string is + not the same as the principal issuing the SETCLIENTID. + + Note that SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM has a secondary purpose + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + of establishing the information the server needs to make callbacks to + the client for purpose of supporting delegations. It is permitted to + change this information via SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + within the same incarnation of the client without removing the + client's leased state. + + Once a SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence has successfully + completed, the client uses the short hand client identifier, of type + clientid4, instead of the longer and less compact nfs_client_id4 + structure. This short hand client identfier (a clientid) is assigned + by the server and should be chosen so that it will not conflict with + a clientid previously assigned by the server. This applies across + server restarts or reboots. When a clientid is presented to a server + and that clientid is not recognized, as would happen after a server + reboot, the server will reject the request with the error + NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID. When this happens, the client must obtain a + new clientid by use of the SETCLIENTID operation and then proceed to + any other necessary recovery for the server reboot case (See the + section "Server Failure and Recovery"). The client must also employ the SETCLIENTID operation when it receives a NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID error using a stateid derived from its current clientid, since this also indicates a server reboot which has invalidated the existing clientid (see the next section - "nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition" for details). + "lock_owner and stateid Definition" for details). + + See the detailed descriptions of SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + for a complete specification of the operations. 8.1.2. Server Release of Clientid If the server determines that the client holds no associated state for its clientid, the server may choose to release the clientid. The server may make this choice for an inactive client so that resources are not consumed by those intermittently active clients. If the client contacts the server after this release, the server must ensure the client receives the appropriate error so that it will use the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence to establish a new identity. It should be clear that the server must be very hesitant to release a clientid since the resulting work on the client to recover from such an event will be the same burden as if the server had failed and restarted. Typically a server would not release a clientid unless there had been no activity from that client for many minutes. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + Note that if the id string in a SETCLIENTID request is properly + constructed, and if the client takes care to use the same principal + for each successive use of SETCLIENTID, then, barring an active + denial of service attack, NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE should never be + returned. -8.1.3. nfs_lockowner and stateid Definition + However, client bugs, server bugs, or perhaps a deliberate change of + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + the principal owner of the id string (such as the case of a client + that changes security flavors, and under the new flavor, there is no + mapping to the previous owner) will in rare cases result in + NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE. + + In that event, when the server gets a SETCLIENTID for a client id + that currently has no state, or it has state, but the lease has + expired, rather than returning NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE, the server MUST + allow the SETCLIENTID, and confirm the new clientid if followed by + the appropriate SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM. + +8.1.3. lock_owner and stateid Definition When requesting a lock, the client must present to the server the clientid and an identifier for the owner of the requested lock. - These two fields are referred to as the nfs_lockowner and the - definition of those fields are: + These two fields are referred to as the lock_owner and the definition + of those fields are: o A clientid returned by the server as part of the client's use of the SETCLIENTID operation. o A variable length opaque array used to uniquely define the owner of a lock managed by the client. This may be a thread id, process id, or other unique value. - When the server grants the lock, it responds with a unique 64-bit - stateid. The stateid is used as a shorthand reference to the - nfs_lockowner, since the server will be maintaining the - correspondence between them. + When the server grants the lock, it responds with a unique stateid. + The stateid is used as a shorthand reference to the lock_owner, since + the server will be maintaining the correspondence between them. The server is free to form the stateid in any manner that it chooses as long as it is able to recognize invalid and out-of-date stateids. This requirement includes those stateids generated by earlier instances of the server. From this, the client can be properly notified of a server restart. This notification will occur when the client presents a stateid to the server from a previous instantiation. The server must be able to distinguish the following situations and @@ -2854,94 +3271,134 @@ o The stateid was generated by an earlier server instance (i.e. before a server reboot). The error NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID should be returned. o The stateid was generated by the current server instance but the stateid no longer designates the current locking state for the lockowner-file pair in question (i.e. one or more locking operations has occurred). The error NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID should be returned. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + This error condition will only occur when the client issues a locking request which changes a stateid while an I/O request that uses that stateid is outstanding. o The stateid was generated by the current server instance but the stateid does not designate a locking state for any active lockowner-file pair. The error NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID should be returned. This error condition will occur when there has been a logic - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - error on the part of the client or server. This should not happen. One mechanism that may be used to satisfy these requirements is for - the server to divide stateids into three fields: + the server to, - o A server verifier which uniquely designates a particular server + o divide the "other" field of each stateid into two fields: + + - A server verifier which uniquely designates a particular + server instantiation. - o An index into a table of locking-state structures. + - An index into a table of locking-state structures. - o A sequence value which is incremented for each stateid that is - associated with the same index into the locking-state table. + o utilize the "seqid" field of each stateid, such that seqid is + monotonically incremented for each stateid that is associated + with the same index into the locking-state table. By matching the incoming stateid and its field values with the state held at the server, the server is able to easily determine if a stateid is valid for its current instantiation and state. If the stateid is not valid, the appropriate error can be supplied to the client. -8.1.4. Use of the stateid +8.1.4. Use of the stateid and Locking All READ, WRITE and SETATTR operations contain a stateid. For the purposes of this section, SETATTR operations which change the size attribute of a file are treated as if they are writing the area between the old and new size (i.e. the range truncated or added to the file by means of the SETATTR), even where SETATTR is not explicitly mentioned in the text. - If the nfs_lockowner performs a READ or WRITE in a situation in which - it has established a lock on the server (and for these purposes any - OPEN constitutes a share lock) the stateid (previously returned by + If the lock_owner performs a READ or WRITE in a situation in which it + has established a lock or share reservation on the server (any OPEN + constitutes a share reservation) the stateid (previously returned by the server) must be used to indicate what locks, including both - record and share locks, are held by the lockowner. If no state is - established by the client, either record lock or share lock, a - stateid of all bits 0 is used. Regardless of whether a stateid of - all bits 0, or a stateid returned by the server is used, if no - conflicting locks are held on the file, the server may service the - READ or WRITE operation. If a conflict with an explicit lock occurs, - an error is returned for the operation (NFS4ERR_LOCKED). This allows - "mandatory locking" to be implemented. + record locks and share reservations, are held by the lockowner. If + no state is established by the client, either record lock or share + reservation, a stateid of all bits 0 is used. Regardless whether a + stateid of all bits 0, or a stateid returned by the server is used, - Share locks are established by OPEN operations and by their nature - are mandatory in that when the OPEN denies READ or WRITE operations, - that denial results in such operations being rejected with error - NFS4ERR_LOCKED. Record locks may be implemented by the server as - either mandatory or advisory, or the choice of mandatory or advisory - behavior may be determined by the server on the basis of the file - being accessed. When record locks are advisory, they only prevent - the granting of conflicting lock requests and have no effect on +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + if there is a conflicting share reservation or mandatory record lock + held on the file, the server MUST refuse to service the READ or WRITE + operation. - READ's or WRITE's. Mandatory record locks, however, prevent - conflicting IO operations and when they are attempted, they are - rejected with NFS4ERR_LOCKED. + Share reservations are established by OPEN operations and by their + nature are mandatory in that when the OPEN denies READ or WRITE + operations, that denial results in such operations being rejected + with error NFS4ERR_LOCKED. Record locks may be implemented by the + server as either mandatory or advisory, or the choice of mandatory or + advisory behavior may be determined by the server on the basis of the + file being accessed (for example, some UNIX-based servers support a + "mandatory lock bit" on the mode attribute such that if set, record + locks are required on the file before I/O is possible). When record + locks are advisory, they only prevent the granting of conflicting + lock requests and have no effect on READ's or WRITE's. Mandatory + record locks, however, prevent conflicting I/O operations. When they + are attempted, they are rejected with NFS4ERR_LOCKED. Assuming an + operating environment like UNIX that requires it, when the client + gets NFS4ERR_LOCKED on a file it knows it has the proper share + reservation for, it will need to issue a LOCK request on the region + of the file that includes the region the I/O was to be performed on, + with an appropriate locktype (i.e. READ*_LT for a READ operation, + WRITE*_LT for a WRITE operation). - Every stateid other than the special stateid values noted above, - whether returned by an OPEN-type operation (i.e. OPEN, + With NFS version 3, there was no notion of a stateid so there was no + way to tell if the application process of the client sending the READ + or WRITE operation had also acquired the appropriate record lock on + the file. Thus there was no way to implement mandatory locking. With + the stateid construct, this barrier has been removed. + + Note that for UNIX environments that support mandatory file locking, + the distinction between advisory and mandatory locking is subtle. In + fact, advisory and mandatory record locks are exactly the same in so + far as the APIs and requirements on implementation. If the mandatory + lock attribute is set on the file, the server checks to see if the + lockowner has an appropriate shared (read) or exclusive (write) + record lock on the region it wishes to read or write to. If there is + no appropriate lock, the server checks if there is a conflicting lock + (which can be done by attempting to acquire the conflicting lock on + the behalf of the lockowner, and if successful, release the lock + after the READ or WRITE is done), and if there is, the server returns + NFS4ERR_LOCKED. + + For Windows environments, there are no advisory record locks, so the + server always checks for record locks during I/O requests. + + Thus, the NFS version 4 LOCK operation does not need to distinguish + between advisory and mandatory record locks. It is the NFS version 4 + server's processing of the READ and WRITE operations that introduces + the distinction. + + Every stateid other than the special stateid values noted in this + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + section, whether returned by an OPEN-type operation (i.e. OPEN, OPEN_DOWNGRADE), or by a LOCK-type operation (i.e. LOCK or LOCKU), - defines an access mode for the file (i.e. READ, WRITE, or READ_WRITE) + defines an access mode for the file (i.e. READ, WRITE, or READ-WRITE) as established by the original OPEN which began the stateid sequence, and as modified by subsequent OPEN's and OPEN_DOWNGRADE's within that stateid sequence. When a READ, WRITE, or SETATTR which specifies the size attribute, is done, the operation is subject to checking against the access mode to verify that the operation is appropriate given the OPEN with which the operation is associated. In the case of WRITE-type operations (i.e. WRITE's and SETATTR's which set size), the server must verify that the access mode allows writing and return an NFS4ERR_OPENMODE error if it does not. In the @@ -2949,119 +3406,175 @@ access mode, or it may choose to allow READ on opens for WRITE only, to accommodate clients whose write implementation may unavoidably do reads (e.g. due to buffer cache constraints). However, even if READ's are allowed in these circumstances, the server MUST still check for locks that conflict with the READ (e.g. another open specify denial of READ's). Note that a server which does enforce the access mode check on READ's need not explicitly check for conflicting share reservations since the existence of OPEN for read access guarantees that no conflicting share reservation can exist. - A stateid of all bits 1 (one) allows READ operations to bypass + A stateid of all bits 1 (one) MAY allow READ operations to bypass locking checks at the server. However, WRITE operations with a - stateid with bits all 1 (one) do not bypass locking checks and are + stateid with bits all 1 (one) MUST NOT bypass locking checks and are treated exactly the same as if a stateid of all bits 0 were used. - An explicit lock may not be granted while a READ or WRITE operation - with conflicting implicit locking is being performed. For the - purposes of this paragraph, a READ is considered as having an - implicit shared record lock for the area being read while a WRITE is - considered as having an implicit exclusive record lock for the area - being written (and similarly for SETATTR's that set size as discussed - above). + A lock may not be granted while a READ or WRITE operation using one + of the special stateids is being performed and the range of the lock + request conflicts with the range of the READ or WRITE operation. For + the purposes of this paragraph, a conflict occurs when a shared lock + is requested and a WRITE operation is being performed, or an + exclusive lock is requested and either a READ or a WRITE operation is + being performed. A SETATTR that sets size is treated similarly to a + WRITE as discussed above. 8.1.5. Sequencing of Lock Requests Locking is different than most NFS operations as it requires "at- most-one" semantics that are not provided by ONCRPC. ONCRPC over a reliable transport is not sufficient because a sequence of locking requests may span multiple TCP connections. In the face of retransmission or reordering, lock or unlock requests must have a well defined and consistent behavior. To accomplish this, each lock request contains a sequence number that is a consecutively increasing + integer. Different lock_owners have different sequences. The server + maintains the last sequence number (L) received and the response that + was returned. The first request issued for any given lock_owner is + issued with a sequence number of zero. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - integer. Different nfs_lockowners have different sequences. The - server maintains the last sequence number (L) received and the - response that was returned. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Note that for requests that contain a sequence number, for each - nfs_lockowner, there should be no more than one outstanding request. + lock_owner, there should be no more than one outstanding request. If a request (r) with a previous sequence number (r < L) is received, it is rejected with the return of error NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID. Given a properly-functioning client, the response to (r) must have been received before the last request (L) was sent. If a duplicate of last request (r == L) is received, the stored response is returned. If a request beyond the next sequence (r == L + 2) is received, it is rejected with the return of error NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID. Sequence - history is reinitialized whenever the client verifier changes. + history is reinitialized whenever the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + sequence changes the client verifier. Since the sequence number is represented with an unsigned 32-bit integer, the arithmetic involved with the sequence number is mod 2^32. It is critical the server maintain the last response sent to the client to provide a more reliable cache of duplicate non-idempotent requests than that of the traditional cache described in [Juszczak]. The traditional duplicate request cache uses a least recently used algorithm for removing unneeded requests. However, the last lock - request and response on a given nfs_lockowner must be cached as long - as the lock state exists on the server. + request and response on a given lock_owner must be cached as long as + the lock state exists on the server. + + The client MUST monotonically increment the sequence number for the + CLOSE, LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN, OPEN_CONFIRM, and OPEN_DOWNGRADE + operations. This is true even in the event that the previous + operation that used the sequence number received an error. The only + exception to this rule is if the previous operation received one of + the following errors: NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID, NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID, + NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID, NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID. 8.1.6. Recovery from Replayed Requests - As described above, the sequence number is per nfs_lockowner. As - long as the server maintains the last sequence number received and - follows the methods described above, there are no risks of a - Byzantine router re-sending old requests. The server need only - maintain the (nfs_lockowner, sequence number) state as long as there - are open files or closed files with locks outstanding. + As described above, the sequence number is per lock_owner. As long + as the server maintains the last sequence number received and follows + the methods described above, there are no risks of a Byzantine router + re-sending old requests. The server need only maintain the + (lock_owner, sequence number) state as long as there are open files + or closed files with locks outstanding. LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, and CLOSE each contain a sequence number and therefore the risk of the replay of these operations resulting in undesired effects is non-existent while the server - maintains the nfs_lockowner state. + maintains the lock_owner state. -8.1.7. Releasing nfs_lockowner State +8.1.7. Releasing lock_owner State + + When a particular lock_owner no longer holds open or file locking + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - When a particular nfs_lockowner no longer holds open or file locking state at the server, the server may choose to release the sequence - number state associated with the nfs_lockowner. The server may make + number state associated with the lock_owner. The server may make this choice based on lease expiration, for the reclamation of server memory, or other implementation specific details. In any event, the - server is able to do this safely only when the nfs_lockowner no + server is able to do this safely only when the lock_owner no longer + is being utilized by the client. The server may choose to hold the + lock_owner state in the event that retransmitted requests are + received. However, the period to hold this state is implementation + specific. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + In the case that a LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, or CLOSE is + retransmitted after the server has previously released the lock_owner + state, the server will find that the lock_owner has no files open and + an error will be returned to the client. If the lock_owner does have + a file open, the stateid will not match and again an error is + returned to the client. - longer is being utilized by the client. The server may choose to - hold the nfs_lockowner state in the event that retransmitted requests - are received. However, the period to hold this state is - implementation specific. +8.1.8. Use of Open Confirmation - In the case that a LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, or CLOSE is - retransmitted after the server has previously released the - nfs_lockowner state, the server will find that the nfs_lockowner has - no files open and an error will be returned to the client. If the - nfs_lockowner does have a file open, the stateid will not match and - again an error is returned to the client. + In the case that an OPEN is retransmitted and the lock_owner is being + used for the first time or the lock_owner state has been previously + released by the server, the use of the OPEN_CONFIRM operation will + prevent incorrect behavior. When the server observes the use of the + lock_owner for the first time, it will direct the client to perform + the OPEN_CONFIRM for the corresponding OPEN. This sequence + establishes the use of an lock_owner and associated sequence number. + Since the OPEN_CONFIRM sequence connects a new open_owner on the + server with an existing open_owner on a client, the sequence number + may have any value. The OPEN_CONFIRM step assures the server that + the value received is the correct one. See the section "OPEN_CONFIRM + - Confirm Open" for further details. - In the case that an OPEN is retransmitted and the nfs_lockowner is - being used for the first time or the nfs_lockowner state has been - previously released by the server, the use of the OPEN_CONFIRM - operation will prevent incorrect behavior. When the server observes - the use of the nfs_lockowner for the first time, it will direct the - client to perform the OPEN_CONFIRM for the corresponding OPEN. This - sequence establishes the use of an nfs_lockowner and associated - sequence number. See the section "OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open" for - further details. + There are a number of situations in which the requirement to confirm + an OPEN would pose difficulties for the client and server, in that + they would be prevented from acting in a timely fashion on + information received, because that information would be provisional, + subject to deletion upon non-confirmation. Fortunately, these are + situations in which the server can avoid the need for confirmation + when responding to open requests. The two constraints are: + + o The server must not bestow a delegation for any open which would + require confirmation. + + o The server MUST NOT require confirmation on a reclaim-type open + (i.e. one specifying claim type CLAIM_PREVIOUS or + CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV). + + These constraints are related in that reclaim-type opens are the + only ones in which the server may be required to send a + delegation. For CLAIM_NULL, sending the delegation is optional + while for CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR, no delegation is sent. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + Delegations being sent with an open requiring confirmation are + troublesome because recovering from non-confirmation adds undue + complexity to the protocol while requiring confirmation on + reclaim-type opens poses difficulties in that the inability to + resolve the status of the reclaim until lease expiration may + make it difficult to have timely determination of the set of + locks being reclaimed (since the grace period may expire). + + Requiring open confirmation on reclaim-type opens is avoidable + because of the nature of the environments in which such opens + are done. For CLAIM_PREVIOUS opens, this is immediately after + server reboot, so there should be no time for lockowners to be + created, found to be unused, and recycled. For + CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV opens, we are dealing with a client reboot + situation. A server which supports delegation can be sure that + no lockowners for that client have been recycled since client + initialization and thus can ensure that confirmation will not be + required. 8.2. Lock Ranges The protocol allows a lock owner to request a lock with a byte range and then either upgrade or unlock a sub-range of the initial lock. It is expected that this will be an uncommon type of request. In any case, servers or server file systems may not be able to support sub- range lock semantics. In the event that a server receives a locking request that represents a sub-range of current locking state for the lock owner, the server is allowed to return the error @@ -3072,28 +3585,48 @@ The client is discouraged from combining multiple independent locking ranges that happen to be adjacent into a single request since the server may not support sub-range requests and for reasons related to the recovery of file locking state in the event of server failure. As discussed in the section "Server Failure and Recovery" below, the server may employ certain optimizations during recovery that work effectively only when the client's behavior during lock recovery is similar to the client's locking behavior prior to server failure. -8.3. Blocking Locks +8.3. Upgrading and Downgrading Locks + + If a client has a write lock on a record, it can request an atomic + downgrade of the lock to a read lock via the LOCK request, by setting + the type to READ_LT. If the server supports atomic downgrade, the + request will succeed. If not, it will return NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP. + The client should be prepared to receive this error, and if + appropriate, report the error to the requesting application. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + If a client has a read lock on a record, it can request an atomic + upgrade of the lock to a write lock via the LOCK request by setting + the type to WRITE_LT or WRITEW_LT. If the server does not support + atomic upgrade, it will return NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP. If the upgrade + can be achieved without an existing conflict, the request will + succeed. Otherwise, the server will return either NFS4ERR_DENIED or + NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK. The error NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK is returned if the + client issued the LOCK request with the type set to WRITEW_LT and the + server has detected a deadlock. The client should be prepared to + receive such errors and if appropriate, report the error to the + requesting application. + +8.4. Blocking Locks Some clients require the support of blocking locks. The NFS version 4 protocol must not rely on a callback mechanism and therefore is unable to notify a client when a previously denied lock has been - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - granted. Clients have no choice but to continually poll for the lock. This presents a fairness problem. Two new lock types are added, READW and WRITEW, and are used to indicate to the server that the client is requesting a blocking lock. The server should maintain an ordered list of pending blocking locks. When the conflicting lock is released, the server may wait the lease period for the first waiting client to re-request the lock. After the lease period expires the next waiting client request is allowed the lock. Clients are required to poll at an interval sufficiently small that it is likely to acquire the lock in a timely manner. The server is not @@ -3103,116 +3636,112 @@ storage would be required to guarantee ordered granting of blocking locks. Servers may also note the lock types and delay returning denial of the request to allow extra time for a conflicting lock to be released, allowing a successful return. In this way, clients can avoid the burden of needlessly frequent polling for blocking locks. The server should take care in the length of delay in the event the client retransmits the request. -8.4. Lease Renewal +8.5. Lease Renewal The purpose of a lease is to allow a server to remove stale locks that are held by a client that has crashed or is otherwise unreachable. It is not a mechanism for cache consistency and lease renewals may not be denied if the lease interval has not expired. The following events cause implicit renewal of all of the leases for a given client (i.e. all those sharing a given clientid). Each of these is a positive indication that the client is still active and + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + that the associated state held at the server, for the client, is still valid. o An OPEN with a valid clientid. o Any operation made with a valid stateid (CLOSE, DELEGPURGE, DELEGRETURN, LOCK, LOCKU, OPEN, OPEN_CONFIRM, OPEN_DOWNGRADE, - READ, RENEW, SETATTR, SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, WRITE). This does - not include the special stateids of all bits 0 or all bits 1. + READ, RENEW, SETATTR, WRITE). This does not include the special + stateids of all bits 0 or all bits 1. Note that if the client had restarted or rebooted, the client would not be making these requests without issuing the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence. The use of - the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operations notifies the - server to drop the locking state associated with the - client. + the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence (one that + changes the client verifier) notifies the server to drop + the locking state associated with the client. + SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM never renews a lease. If the server has rebooted, the stateids - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - (NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID error) or the clientid (NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID error) will not be valid hence preventing spurious renewals. This approach allows for low overhead lease renewal which scales well. In the typical case no extra RPC calls are required for lease renewal and in the worst case one RPC is required every lease period (i.e. a RENEW operation). The number of locks held by the client is not a factor since all state for the client is involved with the lease renewal action. Since all operations that create a new lease also renew existing leases, the server must maintain a common lease expiration time for all valid leases for a given client. This lease time can then be easily updated upon implicit lease renewal actions. -8.5. Crash Recovery +8.6. Crash Recovery The important requirement in crash recovery is that both the client and the server know when the other has failed. Additionally, it is required that a client sees a consistent view of data across server restarts or reboots. All READ and WRITE operations that may have been queued within the client or network buffers must wait until the client has successfully recovered the locks protecting the READ and WRITE operations. -8.5.1. Client Failure and Recovery +8.6.1. Client Failure and Recovery In the event that a client fails, the server may recover the client's locks when the associated leases have expired. Conflicting locks from another client may only be granted after this lease expiration. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + If the client is able to restart or reinitialize within the lease period the client may be forced to wait the remainder of the lease period before obtaining new locks. To minimize client delay upon restart, lock requests are associated with an instance of the client by a client supplied verifier. This verifier is part of the initial SETCLIENTID call made by the client. The server returns a clientid as a result of the SETCLIENTID operation. The client then confirms the use of the clientid with SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM. The clientid in combination with an opaque owner field is then used by the client to identify the lock owner for OPEN. This chain of associations is then used to identify all locks for a particular client. Since the verifier will be changed by the client upon each initialization, the server can compare a new verifier to the verifier associated with currently held locks and determine that they do not match. This signifies the client's new instantiation and subsequent loss of locking state. As a result, the server is free to release - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - all locks held which are associated with the old clientid which was derived from the old verifier. - For secure environments, a change in the verifier must only cause the - release of locks associated with the authenticated requester. This - is required to prevent a rogue entity from freeing otherwise valid - locks. - Note that the verifier must have the same uniqueness properties of the verifier for the COMMIT operation. -8.5.2. Server Failure and Recovery +8.6.2. Server Failure and Recovery If the server loses locking state (usually as a result of a restart or reboot), it must allow clients time to discover this fact and re- establish the lost locking state. The client must be able to re- establish the locking state without having the server deny valid requests because the server has granted conflicting access to another client. Likewise, if there is the possibility that clients have not yet re-established their locking state for a file, the server must disallow READ and WRITE operations for that file. The duration of this recovery period is equal to the duration of the lease period. @@ -3224,37 +3753,37 @@ clientid invalidated by reboot or restart. When either of these are received, the client must establish a new clientid (See the section "Client ID") and re-establish the locking state as discussed below. The period of special handling of locking and READs and WRITEs, equal in duration to the lease period, is referred to as the "grace period". During the grace period, clients recover locks and the associated state by reclaim-type locking requests (i.e. LOCK requests with reclaim set to true and OPEN operations with a claim type of CLAIM_PREVIOUS). During the grace period, the server must reject + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + READ and WRITE operations and non-reclaim locking requests (i.e. other LOCK and OPEN operations) with an error of NFS4ERR_GRACE. If the server can reliably determine that granting a non-reclaim request will not conflict with reclamation of locks by other clients, the NFS4ERR_GRACE error does not have to be returned and the non- reclaim client request can be serviced. For the server to be able to service READ and WRITE operations during the grace period, it must again be able to guarantee that no possible conflict could arise between an impending reclaim locking request and the READ or WRITE operation. If the server is unable to offer that guarantee, the NFS4ERR_GRACE error must be returned to the client. For a server to provide simple, valid handling during the grace - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - period, the easiest method is to simply reject all non-reclaim locking requests and READ and WRITE operations by returning the NFS4ERR_GRACE error. However, a server may keep information about granted locks in stable storage. With this information, the server could determine if a regular lock or READ or WRITE operation can be safely processed. For example, if a count of locks on a given file is available in stable storage, the server can track reclaimed locks for the file and when all reclaims have been processed, non-reclaim locking requests @@ -3268,54 +3797,63 @@ To reiterate, for a server that allows non-reclaim lock and I/O requests to be processed during the grace period, it MUST determine that no lock subsequently reclaimed will be rejected and that no lock subsequently reclaimed would have prevented any I/O operation processed during the grace period. Clients should be prepared for the return of NFS4ERR_GRACE errors for non-reclaim lock and I/O requests. In this case the client should employ a retry mechanism for the request. A delay (on the order of several seconds) between retries should be used to avoid overwhelming - the server. Further discussion of the general is included in + the server. Further discussion of the general issue is included in [Floyd]. The client must account for the server that is able to perform I/O and non-reclaim locking requests within the grace period as well as those that can not do so. A reclaim-type locking request outside the server's grace period can only succeed if the server can guarantee that no conflicting lock or I/O request has been granted since reboot or restart. -8.5.3. Network Partitions and Recovery + A server may, upon restart, establish a new value for the lease + period. Therefore, clients should, once a new clientid is + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + established, refetch the lease_time attribute and use it as the basis + for lease renewal for the lease associated with that server. However, + the server must establish, for this restart event, a grace period at + least as long as the lease period for the previous server + instantiation. This allows the client state obtained during the + previous server instance to be reliably re-established. + +8.6.3. Network Partitions and Recovery If the duration of a network partition is greater than the lease period provided by the server, the server will have not received a lease renewal from the client. If this occurs, the server may free all locks held for the client. As a result, all stateids held by the client will become invalid or stale. Once the client is able to reach the server after such a network partition, all I/O submitted by the client with the now invalid stateids will fail with the server returning the error NFS4ERR_EXPIRED. Once this error is received, the client will suitably notify the application that held the lock. As a courtesy to the client or as an optimization, the server may continue to hold locks on behalf of a client for which recent communication has extended beyond the lease period. If the server - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - receives a lock or I/O request that conflicts with one of these courtesy locks, the server must free the courtesy lock and grant the new request. If the server continues to hold locks beyond the expiration of a client's lease, the server MUST employ a method of recording this - fact in its stable storage. Conflicting locks requests from another + fact in its stable storage. Conflicting lock requests from another client may be serviced after the lease expiration. There are various scenarios involving server failure after such an event that require the storage of these lease expirations or network partitions. One scenario is as follows: A client holds a lock at the server and encounters a network partition and is unable to renew the associated lease. A second client obtains a conflicting lock and then frees the lock. After the unlock request by the second client, the server reboots or reinitializes. Once the @@ -3323,348 +3861,441 @@ original client attempts to reclaim the original lock. In this scenario and without any state information, the server will allow the reclaim and the client will be in an inconsistent state because the server or the client has no knowledge of the conflicting lock. The server may choose to store this lease expiration or network partitioning state in a way that will only identify the client as a whole. Note that this may potentially lead to lock reclaims being + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + denied unnecessarily because of a mix of conflicting and non- conflicting locks. The server may also choose to store information about each lock that has an expired lease with an associated conflicting lock. The choice of the amount and type of state information that is stored is left to the implementor. In any case, the server must have enough state information to enable correct recovery from multiple partitions and multiple server failures. -8.6. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort + For further discussion of revocation of locks see the section "Server + Revocation of Locks". + +8.7. Recovery from a Lock Request Timeout or Abort In the event a lock request times out, a client may decide to not retry the request. The client may also abort the request when the process for which it was issued is terminated (e.g. in UNIX due to a signal). It is possible though that the server received the request and acted upon it. This would change the state on the server without the client being aware of the change. It is paramount that the client re-synchronize state with server before it attempts any other operation that takes a seqid and/or a stateid with the same - nfs_lockowner. This is straightforward to do without a special re- + lock_owner. This is straightforward to do without a special re- synchronize operation. Since the server maintains the last lock request and response - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - received on the nfs_lockowner, for each nfs_lockowner, the client - should cache the last lock request it sent such that the lock request - did not receive a response. From this, the next time the client does - a lock operation for the nfs_lockowner, it can send the cached - request, if there is one, and if the request was one that established - state (e.g. a LOCK or OPEN operation) the client can follow up with a - request to remove the state (e.g. a LOCKU or CLOSE operation). With - this approach, the sequencing and stateid information on the client - and server for the given nfs_lockowner will re-synchronize and in + received on the lock_owner, for each lock_owner, the client should + cache the last lock request it sent such that the lock request did + not receive a response. From this, the next time the client does a + lock operation for the lock_owner, it can send the cached request, if + there is one, and if the request was one that established state (e.g. + a LOCK or OPEN operation), the server will return the cached result + or if never saw the request, perform it. The client can follow up + with a request to remove the state (e.g. a LOCKU or CLOSE operation). + With this approach, the sequencing and stateid information on the + client and server for the given lock_owner will re-synchronize and in turn the lock state will re-synchronize. -8.7. Server Revocation of Locks +8.8. Server Revocation of Locks At any point, the server can revoke locks held by a client and the client must be prepared for this event. When the client detects that its locks have been or may have been revoked, the client is responsible for validating the state information between itself and the server. Validating locking state for the client means that it must verify or reclaim state for each lock currently held. The first instance of lock revocation is upon server reboot or re- initialization. In this instance the client will receive an error (NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID or NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID) and the client will proceed with normal crash recovery as described in the previous + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + section. The second lock revocation event is the inability to renew the lease - period. While this is considered a rare or unusual event, the client - must be prepared to recover. Both the server and client will be able - to detect the failure to renew the lease and are capable of - recovering without data corruption. For the server, it tracks the + before expiration. While this is considered a rare or unusual event, + the client must be prepared to recover. Both the server and client + will be able to detect the failure to renew the lease and are capable + of recovering without data corruption. For the server, it tracks the last renewal event serviced for the client and knows when the lease will expire. Similarly, the client must track operations which will renew the lease period. Using the time that each such request was sent and the time that the corresponding reply was received, the client should bound the time that the corresponding renewal could have occurred on the server and thus determine if it is possible that a lease period expiration could have occurred. The third lock revocation event can occur as a result of administrative intervention within the lease period. While this is considered a rare event, it is possible that the server's administrator has decided to release or revoke a particular lock held by the client. As a result of revocation, the client will receive an error of NFS4ERR_EXPIRED and the error is received within the lease period for the lock. In this instance the client may assume that - only the nfs_lockowner's locks have been lost. The client notifies - the lock holder appropriately. The client may not assume the lease + only the lock_owner's locks have been lost. The client notifies the + lock holder appropriately. The client may not assume the lease period has been renewed as a result of failed operation. When the client determines the lease period may have expired, the - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - client must mark all locks held for the associated lease as "unvalidated". This means the client has been unable to re-establish or confirm the appropriate lock state with the server. As described in the previous section on crash recovery, there are scenarios in which the server may grant conflicting locks after the lease period has expired for a client. When it is possible that the lease period has expired, the client must validate each lock currently held to ensure that a conflicting lock has not been granted. The client may accomplish this task by issuing an I/O request, either a pending I/O or a zero-length read, specifying the stateid associated with the lock in question. If the response to the request is success, the client has validated all of the locks governed by that stateid and re-established the appropriate state between itself and the server. If the I/O request is not successful, then one or more of the locks associated with the stateid was revoked by the server and the client must notify the owner. -8.8. Share Reservations +8.9. Share Reservations A share reservation is a mechanism to control access to a file. It is a separate and independent mechanism from record locking. When a client opens a file, it issues an OPEN operation to the server specifying the type of access required (READ, WRITE, or BOTH) and the type of access to deny others (deny NONE, READ, WRITE, or BOTH). If + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + the OPEN fails the client will fail the application's open request. Pseudo-code definition of the semantics: if ((request.access & file_state.deny)) || (request.deny & file_state.access)) return (NFS4ERR_DENIED) + This checking of share reservations on OPEN is done with no exception + for an existing OPEN for the same open_owner. + The constants used for the OPEN and OPEN_DOWNGRADE operations for the access and deny fields are as follows: const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_READ = 0x00000001; const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WRITE = 0x00000002; const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_BOTH = 0x00000003; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_NONE = 0x00000000; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_READ = 0x00000001; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE = 0x00000002; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH = 0x00000003; -8.9. OPEN/CLOSE Operations +8.10. OPEN/CLOSE Operations To provide correct share semantics, a client MUST use the OPEN operation to obtain the initial filehandle and indicate the desired access and what if any access to deny. Even if the client intends to - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - use a stateid of all 0's or all 1's, it must still obtain the filehandle for the regular file with the OPEN operation so the appropriate share semantics can be applied. For clients that do not have a deny mode built into their open programming interfaces, deny equal to NONE should be used. The OPEN operation with the CREATE flag, also subsumes the CREATE operation for regular files as used in previous versions of the NFS protocol. This allows a create with a share to be done atomically. - The CLOSE operation removes all share locks held by the nfs_lockowner - on that file. If record locks are held, the client SHOULD release - all locks before issuing a CLOSE. The server MAY free all + The CLOSE operation removes all share reservations held by the + lock_owner on that file. If record locks are held, the client SHOULD + release all locks before issuing a CLOSE. The server MAY free all outstanding locks on CLOSE but some servers may not support the CLOSE of a file that still has record locks held. The server MUST return - failure if any locks would exist after the CLOSE. + failure, NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD, if any locks would exist after the + CLOSE. The LOOKUP operation will return a filehandle without establishing any lock state on the server. Without a valid stateid, the server will assume the client has the least access. For example, a file opened with deny READ/WRITE cannot be accessed using a filehandle + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + obtained through LOOKUP because it would not have a valid stateid (i.e. using a stateid of all bits 0 or all bits 1). -8.10. Open Upgrade and Downgrade +8.10.1. Close and Retention of State Information + + Since a CLOSE operation requests deallocation of a stateid, dealing + with retransmission of the CLOSE, may pose special difficulties, + since the state information, which normally would be used to + determine the state of the open file being designated, might be + deallocated, resulting in an NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID error. + + Servers may deal with this problem in a number of ways. To provide + the greatest degree assurance that the protocol is being used + properly, a server should, rather than deallocate the stateid, mark + it as close-pending, and retain the stateid with this status, until + later deallocation. In this way, a retransmitted CLOSE can be + recognized since the stateid points to state information with this + distinctive status, so that it can be handled without error. + + When adopting this strategy, a server should retain the state + information until the earliest of: + + o Another validly sequenced request for the same lockowner, that + is not a retransmission. + + o The time that a lockowner is freed by the server due to period + with no activity. + + o All locks for the client are freed as a result of a SETCLIENTID. + + Servers may avoid this complexity, at the cost of less complete + protocol error checking, by simply responding NFS4_OK in the event of + a CLOSE for a deallocated stateid, on the assumption that this case + must be caused by a retranmitted close. When adopting this approach, + it is desirable to at least log an error when returning a no-error + indication in this situation. If the server maintains a reply-cache + mechanism, it can verify the CLOSE is indeed a retransmission and + avoid error logging in most cases. + +8.11. Open Upgrade and Downgrade When an OPEN is done for a file and the lockowner for which the open is being done already has the file open, the result is to upgrade the open file status maintained on the server to include the access and deny bits specified by the new OPEN as well as those for the existing OPEN. The result is that there is one open file, as far as the protocol is concerned, and it includes the union of the access and deny bits for all of the OPEN requests completed. Only a single CLOSE will be done to reset the effects of both OPEN's. Note that + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + the client, when issuing the OPEN, may not know that the same file is in fact being opened. The above only applies if both OPEN's result in the OPEN'ed object being designated by the same filehandle. When the server chooses to export multiple filehandles corresponding to the same file object and returns different filehandles on two different OPEN's of the same file object, the server MUST NOT "OR" together the access and deny bits and coalesce the two open files. Instead the server must maintain separate OPEN's with separate stateid's and will require separate CLOSE's to free them. When multiple open files on the client are merged into a single open file object on the server, the close of one of the open files (on the client) may necessitate change of the access and deny status of the open file on the server. This is because the union of the access and deny bits for the remaining open's may be smaller (i.e. a proper subset) than previously. The OPEN_DOWNGRADE operation is used to - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - make the necessary change and the client should use it to update the server so that share reservation requests by other clients are handled properly. -8.11. Short and Long Leases +8.12. Short and Long Leases When determining the time period for the server lease, the usual lease tradeoffs apply. Short leases are good for fast server recovery at a cost of increased RENEW or READ (with zero length) - requests. Longer leases are certainly kinder and gentler to large - internet servers trying to handle very large numbers of clients. The - number of RENEW requests drop in proportion to the lease time. The - disadvantages of long leases are slower recovery after server failure - (server must wait for leases to expire and grace period before - granting new lock requests) and increased file contention (if client - fails to transmit an unlock request then server must wait for lease - expiration before granting new locks). + requests. Longer leases are certainly kinder and gentler to servers + trying to handle very large numbers of clients. The number of RENEW + requests drop in proportion to the lease time. The disadvantages of + long leases are slower recovery after server failure (server must + wait for leases to expire and grace period before granting new lock + requests) and increased file contention (if client fails to transmit + an unlock request then server must wait for lease expiration before + granting new locks). Long leases are usable if the server is able to store lease state in non-volatile memory. Upon recovery, the server can reconstruct the lease state from its non-volatile memory and continue operation with - its clients and therefore long leases are not an issue. + its clients and therefore long leases would not be an issue. -8.12. Clocks and Calculating Lease Expiration +8.13. Clocks, Propagation Delay, and Calculating Lease Expiration To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, lease times are granted by the server as a time delta. However, there is a requirement that the client and server clocks do not drift excessively over the duration of the lock. There is also the issue of propagation delay across the network which could easily be several hundred milliseconds as well as the possibility that requests will be lost and need to be retransmitted. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + To take propagation delay into account, the client should subtract it from lease times (e.g. if the client estimates the one-way propagation delay as 200 msec, then it can assume that the lease is already 200 msec old when it gets it). In addition, it will take another 200 msec to get a response back to the server. So the client must send a lock renewal or write data back to the server 400 msec before the lease would expire. -8.13. Migration, Replication and State + The server's lease period configuration should take into account the + network distance of the clients that will be accessing the server's + resources. It is expected that the lease period will take into + account the network propogation delays and other network delay + factors for the client population. Since the protocol does not allow + for an automatic method to determine an appropriate lease period, the + server's administrator may have to tune the lease period. + +8.14. Migration, Replication and State When responsibility for handling a given file system is transferred to a new server (migration) or the client chooses to use an alternate server (e.g. in response to server unresponsiveness) in the context of file system replication, the appropriate handling of state shared between the client and server (i.e. locks, leases, stateid's, and - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - clientid's) is as described below. The handling differs between migration and replication. For related discussion of file server state and recover of such see the sections under "File Locking and Share Reservations" -8.13.1. Migration and State + If server replica or a server immigrating a filesystem agrees to, or + is expected to, accept opaque values from the client that originated + from another server, then it is a wise implementation practice for + the servers to encode the "opaque" values in network byte order. This + way, servers acting as replicas or immigrating filesystems will be + able to parse values like stateids, directory cookies, filehandles, + etc. even if their native byte order is different from other servers + cooperating in the replication and migration of the filesystem. + +8.14.1. Migration and State In the case of migration, the servers involved in the migration of a file system SHOULD transfer all server state from the original to the new server. This must be done in a way that is transparent to the client. This state transfer will ease the client's transition when a file system migration occurs. If the servers are successful in transferring all state, the client will continue to use stateid's assigned by the original server. Therefore the new server must recognize these stateid's as valid. This holds true for the clientid as well. Since responsibility for an entire file system is transferred with a migration event, there is no possibility that conflicts will arise on the new server as a result of the transfer of + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + locks. As part of the transfer of information between servers, leases would be transferred as well. The leases being transferred to the new server will typically have a different expiration time from those for - the same client, previously on the new server. To maintain the + the same client, previously on the old server. To maintain the property that all leases on a given server for a given client expire at the same time, the server should advance the expiration time to the later of the leases being transferred or the leases already present. This allows the client to maintain lease renewal of both classes without special effort. The servers may choose not to transfer the state information upon migration. However, this choice is discouraged. In this case, when the client presents state information from the original server, the client must be prepared to receive either NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID or NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID from the new server. The client should then recover its state information as it normally would in response to a server failure. The new server must take care to allow for the recovery of state information as it would in the event of server restart. -8.13.2. Replication and State +8.14.2. Replication and State Since client switch-over in the case of replication is not under server control, the handling of state is different. In this case, leases, stateid's and clientid's do not have validity across a transition from one server to another. The client must re-establish its locks on the new server. This can be compared to the re- establishment of locks by means of reclaim-type requests after a server reboot. The difference is that the server has no provision to distinguish requests reclaiming locks from those obtaining new locks - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - or to defer the latter. Thus, a client re-establishing a lock on the new server (by means of a LOCK or OPEN request), may have the requests denied due to a conflicting lock. Since replication is intended for read-only use of filesystems, such denial of locks should not pose large difficulties in practice. When an attempt to re-establish a lock on a new server is denied, the client should treat the situation as if his original lock had been revoked. -8.13.3. Notification of Migrated Lease +8.14.3. Notification of Migrated Lease In the case of lease renewal, the client may not be submitting requests for a file system that has been migrated to another server. This can occur because of the implicit lease renewal mechanism. The - client renews leases for all file systems when submitting a request - to any one file system at the server. + client renews leases for all filesystems when submitting a request to + any one filesystem at the server. In order for the client to schedule renewal of leases that may have been relocated to the new server, the client must find out about + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + lease relocation before those leases expire. To accomplish this, all operations which implicitly renew leases for a client (i.e. OPEN, CLOSE, READ, WRITE, RENEW, LOCK, LOCKT, LOCKU), will return the error NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED if responsibility for any of the leases to be renewed has been transferred to a new server. This condition will continue until the client receives an NFS4ERR_MOVED error and the server receives the subsequent GETATTR(fs_locations) for an access to each file system for which a lease has been moved to a new server. When a client receives an NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED error, it should perform some operation, such as a RENEW, on each file system associated with the server in question. When the client receives an NFS4ERR_MOVED error, the client can follow the normal process to obtain the new server information (through the fs_locations attribute) and perform renewal of those leases on the new server. If - the server has not had state transferred to it transparently, it will - receive either NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID or NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID from - the new server, as described above, and can then recover state - information as it does in the event of server failure. + the server has not had state transferred to it transparently, the + client will receive either NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID or + NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID from the new server, as described above, and + the client can then recover state information as it does in the event + of server failure. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +8.14.4. Migration and the Lease_time Attribute + + In order that the client may appropriately manage its leases in the + case of migration, the destination server must establish proper + values for the lease_time attribute. + + When state is transferred transparently, that state should include + the correct value of the lease_time attribute. The lease_time + attribute on the destination server must never be less than that on + the source since this would result in premature expiration of leases + granted by the source server. Upon migration in which state is + transferred transparently, the client is under no obligation to re- + fetch the lease_time attribute and may continue to use the value + previously fetched (on the source server). + + If state has not been transferred transparently (i.e. the client sees + a real or simulated server reboot), the client should fetch the value + of lease_time on the new (i.e. destination) server, and use it for + subsequent locking requests. However the server must respect a grace + period at least as long as the lease_time on the source server, in + order to ensure that clients have ample time to reclaim their locks + before potentially conflicting non-reclaimed locks are granted. The + means by which the new server obtains the value of lease_time on the + old server is left to the server implementations. It is not + specified by the NFS version 4 protocol. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 9. Client-Side Caching Client-side caching of data, of file attributes, and of file names is essential to providing good performance with the NFS protocol. Providing distributed cache coherence is a difficult problem and previous versions of the NFS protocol have not attempted it. Instead, several NFS client implementation techniques have been used to reduce the problems that a lack of coherence poses for users. These techniques have not been clearly defined by earlier protocol @@ -3704,21 +4335,21 @@ performance is to allow a client that repeatedly opens a file to do so without reference to the server. This is done until potentially conflicting operations from another client actually occur. A similar situation arises in connection with file locking. Sending file lock and unlock requests to the server as well as the read and write requests necessary to make data caching consistent with the locking semantics (see the section "Data Caching and File Locking") can severely limit performance. When locking is used to provide -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 protection against infrequent conflicts, a large penalty is incurred. This penalty may discourage the use of file locking by applications. The NFS version 4 protocol provides more aggressive caching strategies with the following design goals: o Compatibility with a large range of server semantics. o Provide the same caching benefits as previous versions of the @@ -3741,37 +4372,37 @@ responsibilities when another client engages in sharing of a delegated file. A delegation is passed from the server to the client, specifying the object of the delegation and the type of delegation. There are different types of delegations but each type contains a stateid to be used to represent the delegation when performing operations that depend on the delegation. This stateid is similar to those associated with locks and share reservations but differs in that the stateid for a delegation is associated with a clientid and may be - used on behalf of all the nfs_lockowners for the given client. A + used on behalf of all the open_owners for the given client. A delegation is made to the client as a whole and not to any specific process or thread of control within it. Because callback RPCs may not work in all environments (due to firewalls, for example), correct protocol operation does not depend on them. Preliminary testing of callback functionality by means of a CB_NULL procedure determines whether callbacks can be supported. The CB_NULL procedure checks the continuity of the callback path. A server makes a preliminary assessment of callback availability to a given client and avoids delegating responsibilities until it has determined that callbacks are supported. Because the granting of a delegation is always conditional upon the absence of conflicting access, clients must not assume that a delegation will be granted and they must always be prepared for OPENs to be processed without any -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 delegations being granted. Once granted, a delegation behaves in most ways like a lock. There is an associated lease that is subject to renewal together with all of the other leases held by that client. Unlike locks, an operation by a second client to a delegated file will cause the server to recall a delegation through a callback. @@ -3810,76 +4441,83 @@ There are three situations that delegation recovery must deal with: o Client reboot or restart o Server reboot or restart o Network partition (full or callback-only) In the event the client reboots or restarts, the failure to renew -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 leases will result in the revocation of record locks and share reservations. Delegations, however, may be treated a bit differently. There will be situations in which delegations will need to be reestablished after a client reboots or restarts. The reason for this is the client may have file data stored locally and this data was associated with the previously held delegations. The client will need to reestablish the appropriate file state on the server. - To allow for this type of client recovery, the server may extend the + To allow for this type of client recovery, the server MAY extend the period for delegation recovery beyond the typical lease expiration period. This implies that requests from other clients that conflict with these delegations will need to wait. Because the normal recall process may require significant time for the client to flush changed state to the server, other clients need be prepared for delays that occur because of a conflicting delegation. This longer interval would increase the window for clients to reboot and consult stable storage so that the delegations can be reclaimed. For open delegations, such delegations are reclaimed using OPEN with a claim type of CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV. (See the sections on "Data Caching and Revocation" and "Operation 18: OPEN" for discussion of open delegation and the details of OPEN respectively). + A server MAY support a claim type of CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV, but if it + does, it MUST NOT remove delegations upon SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, and + instead MUST, for a period of time no less than that of the value of + the lease_time attribute, maintain the client's delegations to allow + time for the client to issue CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV requests. The server + that supports CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV MUST support the DELEGPURGE + operation. + When the server reboots or restarts, delegations are reclaimed (using - the OPEN operation with CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV) in a similar fashion to + the OPEN operation with CLAIM_PREVIOUS) in a similar fashion to record locks and share reservations. However, there is a slight semantic difference. In the normal case if the server decides that a delegation should not be granted, it performs the requested action (e.g. OPEN) without granting any delegation. For reclaim, the server grants the delegation but a special designation is applied so that the client treats the delegation as having been granted but recalled by the server. Because of this, the client has the duty to write all modified state to the server and then return the delegation. This process of handling delegation reclaim reconciles three principles of - the NFS Version 4 protocol: + the NFS version 4 protocol: o Upon reclaim, a client reporting resources assigned to it by an earlier server instance must be granted those resources. o The server has unquestionable authority to determine whether delegations are to be granted and, once granted, whether they are to be continued. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + o The use of callbacks is not to be depended upon until the client has proven its ability to receive them. When a network partition occurs, delegations are subject to freeing by the server when the lease renewal period expires. This is similar to the behavior for locks and share reservations. For delegations, however, the server may extend the period in which conflicting - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - requests are held off. Eventually the occurrence of a conflicting request from another client will cause revocation of the delegation. A loss of the callback path (e.g. by later network configuration change) will have the same effect. A recall request will fail and revocation of the delegation will result. A client normally finds out about revocation of a delegation when it uses a stateid associated with a delegation and receives the error NFS4ERR_EXPIRED. It also may find out about delegation revocation after a client reboot when it attempts to reclaim a delegation and @@ -3909,84 +4547,100 @@ protocol's data caching must be implemented such that it does not invalidate the assumptions that those using these facilities depend upon. 9.3.1. Data Caching and OPENs In order to avoid invalidating the sharing assumptions that applications rely on, NFS version 4 clients should not provide cached data to applications or modify it on behalf of an application when it would not be valid to obtain or modify that same data via a READ or + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + WRITE operation. Furthermore, in the absence of open delegation (see the section "Open Delegation") two additional rules apply. Note that these rules are obeyed in practice by many NFS version 2 and version 3 clients. o First, cached data present on a client must be revalidated after + doing an OPEN. Revalidating means that the client fetches the + change attribute from the server, compares it with the cached + change attribute, and if different, declares the cached data (as + well as the cached attributes) as invalid. This is to ensure + that the data for the OPENed file is still correctly reflected + in the client's cache. This validation must be done at least + when the client's OPEN operation includes DENY=WRITE or BOTH + thus terminating a period in which other clients may have had + the opportunity to open the file with WRITE access. Clients may + choose to do the revalidation more often (i.e. at OPENs + specifying DENY=NONE) to parallel the NFS version 3 protocol's + practice for the benefit of users assuming this degree of cache + revalidation. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - doing an OPEN. This is to ensure that the data for the OPENed - file is still correctly reflected in the client's cache. This - validation must be done at least when the client's OPEN - operation includes DENY=WRITE or BOTH thus terminating a period - in which other clients may have had the opportunity to open the - file with WRITE access. Clients may choose to do the - revalidation more often (i.e. at OPENs specifying DENY=NONE) to - parallel the NFS version 3 protocol's practice for the benefit - of users assuming this degree of cache revalidation. + Since the change attribute is updated for data and metadata + modifications, some client implementors may be tempted to use + the time_modify attribute and not change to validate cached + data, so that metadata changes do not spuriously invalidate + clean data. The implementor is cautioned in this approach. The + change attribute is guaranteed to change for each update to the + file, whereas time_modify is guaranteed to change only at the + granularity of the time_delta attribute. Use by the client's + data cache validation logic of time_modify and not change runs + the risk of the client incorrectly marking stale data as valid. o Second, modified data must be flushed to the server before closing a file OPENed for write. This is complementary to the first rule. If the data is not flushed at CLOSE, the revalidation done after client OPENs as file is unable to achieve its purpose. The other aspect to flushing the data before close is that the data must be committed to stable storage, at the server, before the CLOSE operation is requested by the client. In the case of a server reboot or restart and a CLOSEd file, it may not be possible to retransmit the data to be written to the file. Hence, this requirement. 9.3.2. Data Caching and File Locking For those applications that choose to use file locking instead of share reservations to exclude inconsistent file access, there is an analogous set of constraints that apply to client side data caching. These rules are effective only if the file locking is used in a way that matches in an equivalent way the actual READ and WRITE + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + operations executed. This is as opposed to file locking that is based on pure convention. For example, it is possible to manipulate a two-megabyte file by dividing the file into two one-megabyte regions and protecting access to the two regions by file locks on bytes zero and one. A lock for write on byte zero of the file would represent the right to do READ and WRITE operations on the first region. A lock for write on byte one of the file would represent the right to do READ and WRITE operations on the second region. As long as all applications manipulating the file obey this convention, they - will work on a local file system. However, they may not work with - the NFS version 4 protocol unless clients refrain from data caching. + will work on a local filesystem. However, they may not work with the + NFS version 4 protocol unless clients refrain from data caching. The rules for data caching in the file locking environment are: o First, when a client obtains a file lock for a particular region, the data cache corresponding to that region (if any cache data exists) must be revalidated. If the change attribute indicates that the file may have been updated since the cached data was obtained, the client must flush or invalidate the cached data for the newly locked region. A client might choose to invalidate all of non-modified cached data that it has for the file but the only requirement for correct operation is to invalidate all of the data in the newly locked region. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - o Second, before releasing a write lock for a region, all modified data for that region must be flushed to the server. The modified data must also be written to stable storage. Note that flushing data to the server and the invalidation of cached data must reflect the actual byte ranges locked or unlocked. Rounding these up or down to reflect client cache block boundaries will cause problems if not carefully done. For example, writing a modified block when only half of that block is within an area being unlocked may cause invalid modification to the region outside the @@ -4001,20 +4655,23 @@ The data that is written to the server as a pre-requisite to the unlocking of a region must be written, at the server, to stable storage. The client may accomplish this either with synchronous writes or by following asynchronous writes with a COMMIT operation. This is required because retransmission of the modified data after a server reboot might conflict with a lock held by another client. A client implementation may choose to accommodate applications which use record locking in non-standard ways (e.g. using a record lock as + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + a global semaphore) by flushing to the server more data upon an LOCKU than is covered by the locked range. This may include modified data within files other than the one for which the unlocks are being done. In such cases, the client must not interfere with applications whose READs and WRITEs are being done only within the bounds of record locks which the application holds. For example, an application locks a single byte of a file and proceeds to write that single byte. A client that chose to handle a LOCKU by flushing all modified data to the server could validly write that single byte in response to an unrelated unlock. However, it would not be valid to write the entire @@ -4024,49 +4681,50 @@ modified data into those for which all modifications are done to areas covered by an appropriate record lock and those for which there are modifications not covered by a record lock. Any writes done for the former class of files must not include areas not locked and thus not modified on the client. 9.3.3. Data Caching and Mandatory File Locking Client side data caching needs to respect mandatory file locking when it is in effect. The presence of mandatory file locking for a given - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - file is indicated in the result flags for an OPEN. When mandatory - locking is in effect for a file, the client must check for an - appropriate file lock for data being read or written. If a lock - exists for the range being read or written, the client may satisfy - the request using the client's validated cache. If an appropriate - file lock is not held for the range of the read or write, the read or - write request must not be satisfied by the client's cache and the - request must be sent to the server for processing. When a read or - write request partially overlaps a locked region, the request should - be subdivided into multiple pieces with each region (locked or not) - treated appropriately. + file is indicated when the client gets back NFS4ERR_LOCKED from a + READ or WRITE on a file it has an appropriate share reservation for. + When mandatory locking is in effect for a file, the client must check + for an appropriate file lock for data being read or written. If a + lock exists for the range being read or written, the client may + satisfy the request using the client's validated cache. If an + appropriate file lock is not held for the range of the read or write, + the read or write request must not be satisfied by the client's cache + and the request must be sent to the server for processing. When a + read or write request partially overlaps a locked region, the request + should be subdivided into multiple pieces with each region (locked or + not) treated appropriately. 9.3.4. Data Caching and File Identity When clients cache data, the file data needs to organized according to the file system object to which the data belongs. For NFS version 3 clients, the typical practice has been to assume for the purpose of caching that distinct filehandles represent distinct file system objects. The client then has the choice to organize and maintain the data cache on this basis. In the NFS version 4 protocol, there is now the possibility to have significant deviations from a "one filehandle per object" model because a filehandle may be constructed on the basis of the object's pathname. Therefore, clients need a reliable method to determine if two filehandles designate the same file system object. If clients + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + were simply to assume that all distinct filehandles denote distinct objects and proceed to do data caching on this basis, caching inconsistencies would arise between the distinct client side objects which mapped to the same server side object. By providing a method to differentiate filehandles, the NFS version 4 protocol alleviates a potential functional regression in comparison with the NFS version 3 protocol. Without this method, caching inconsistencies within the same client could occur and this has not been present in previous versions of the NFS protocol. Note that it @@ -4077,23 +4735,20 @@ version 4 client to determine whether two distinct filehandles denote the same server side object: o If GETATTR directed to two filehandles have different values of the fsid attribute, then the filehandles represent distinct objects. o If GETATTR for any file with an fsid that matches the fsid of the two filehandles in question returns a unique_handles attribute with a value of TRUE, then the two objects are - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - distinct. o If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles does not return the fileid attribute for one or both of the handles, then it cannot be determined whether the two objects are the same. Therefore, operations which depend on that knowledge (e.g. client side data caching) cannot be done reliably. o If GETATTR directed to the two filehandles returns different values for the fileid attribute, then they are distinct objects. @@ -4107,20 +4762,22 @@ delegation is recallable, since the circumstances that allowed for the delegation are subject to change. In particular, the server may receive a conflicting OPEN from another client, the server must recall the delegation before deciding whether the OPEN from the other client may be granted. Making a delegation is up to the server and clients should not assume that any particular OPEN either will or will not result in an open delegation. The following is a typical set of conditions that servers might use in deciding whether OPEN should be delegated: +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + o The client must be able to respond to the server's callback requests. The server will use the CB_NULL procedure for a test of callback ability. o The client must have responded properly to previous recalls. o There must be no current open conflicting with the requested delegation. o There should be no current delegation that conflicts with the @@ -4131,23 +4788,20 @@ o The existence of any server-specific semantics of OPEN/CLOSE that would make the required handling incompatible with the prescribed handling that the delegated client would apply (see below). There are two types of open delegations, read and write. A read open delegation allows a client to handle, on its own, requests to open a file for reading that do not deny read access to others. Multiple read open delegations may be outstanding simultaneously and do not - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - conflict. A write open delegation allows the client to handle, on its own, all opens. Only one write open delegation may exist for a given file at a given time and it is inconsistent with any read open delegations. When a client has a read open delegation, it may not make any changes to the contents or attributes of the file but it is assured that no other client may do so. When a client has a write open delegation, it may modify the file data since no other client will be accessing the file's data. The client holding a write delegation may only @@ -4162,45 +4816,46 @@ When an open delegation is made, the response to the OPEN contains an open delegation structure which specifies the following: o the type of delegation (read or write) o space limitation information to control flushing of data on close (write open delegation only, see the section "Open Delegation and Data Caching") +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + o an nfsace4 specifying read and write permissions o a stateid to represent the delegation for READ and WRITE - The stateid is separate and distinct from the stateid for the OPEN - proper. The standard stateid, unlike the delegation stateid, is - associated with a particular nfs_lockowner and will continue to be - valid after the delegation is recalled and the file remains open. + The delegation stateid is separate and distinct from the stateid for + the OPEN proper. The standard stateid, unlike the delegation + stateid, is associated with a particular lock_owner and will continue + to be valid after the delegation is recalled and the file remains + open. When a request internal to the client is made to open a file and open delegation is in effect, it will be accepted or rejected solely on the basis of the following conditions. Any requirement for other checks to be made by the delegate should result in open delegation being denied so that the checks can be made by the server itself. o The access and deny bits for the request and the file as described in the section "Share Reservations". o The read and write permissions as determined below. The nfsace4 passed with delegation can be used to avoid frequent ACCESS calls. The permission check should be as follows: -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - o If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may be done, then it should be granted without reference to the server. o If the nfsace4 indicates that the open may not be done, then an ACCESS request must be sent to the server to obtain the definitive answer. The server may return an nfsace4 that is more restrictive than the actual ACL of the file. This includes an nfsace4 that specifies denial of all access. Note that some common practices such as @@ -4211,20 +4866,22 @@ The use of delegation together with various other forms of caching creates the possibility that no server authentication will ever be performed for a given user since all of the user's requests might be satisfied locally. Where the client is depending on the server for authentication, the client should be sure authentication occurs for each user by use of the ACCESS operation. This should be the case even if an ACCESS operation would not be required otherwise. As mentioned before, the server may enforce frequent authentication by returning an nfsace4 denying all access with every open delegation. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + 9.4.1. Open Delegation and Data Caching OPEN delegation allows much of the message overhead associated with the opening and closing files to be eliminated. An open when an open delegation is in effect does not require that a validation message be sent to the server. The continued endurance of the "read open delegation" provides a guarantee that no OPEN for write and thus no write has occurred. Similarly, when closing a file opened for write and if write open delegation is in effect, the data written does not have to be flushed to the server until the open delegation is @@ -4235,189 +4892,290 @@ For the purposes of open delegation, READs and WRITEs done without an OPEN are treated as the functional equivalents of a corresponding type of OPEN. This refers to the READs and WRITEs that use the special stateids consisting of all zero bits or all one bits. Therefore, READs or WRITEs with a special stateid done by another client will force the server to recall a write open delegation. A WRITE with a special stateid done by another client will force a recall of read open delegations. With delegations, a client is able to avoid writing data to the - server when the CLOSE of a file is serviced. The CLOSE operation is - the usual point at which the client is notified of a lack of stable - storage for the modified file data generated by the application. At - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - the CLOSE, file data is written to the server and through normal - accounting the server is able to determine if the available file - system space for the data has been exceeded (i.e. server returns - NFS4ERR_NOSPC or NFS4ERR_DQUOT). This accounting includes quotas. - The introduction of delegations requires that a alternative method be - in place for the same type of communication to occur between client - and server. + server when the CLOSE of a file is serviced. The file close system + call is the usual point at which the client is notified of a lack of + stable storage for the modified file data generated by the + application. At the close, file data is written to the server and + through normal accounting the server is able to determine if the + available filesystem space for the data has been exceeded (i.e. + server returns NFS4ERR_NOSPC or NFS4ERR_DQUOT). This accounting + includes quotas. The introduction of delegations requires that a + alternative method be in place for the same type of communication to + occur between client and server. In the delegation response, the server provides either the limit of the size of the file or the number of modified blocks and associated block size. The server must ensure that the client will be able to flush data to the server of a size equal to that provided in the original delegation. The server must make this assurance for all outstanding delegations. Therefore, the server must be careful in its management of available space for new or modified data taking into account available file system space and any applicable quotas. The server can recall delegations as a result of managing the available file system space. The client should abide by the server's state space limits for delegations. If the client exceeds the stated limits for the delegation, the server's behavior is undefined. - Based on server conditions, quotas or available file system space, - the server may grant write open delegations with very restrictive - space limitations. The limitations may be defined in a way that will + Based on server conditions, quotas or available filesystem space, the + server may grant write open delegations with very restrictive space + limitations. The limitations may be defined in a way that will always force modified data to be flushed to the server on close. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + With respect to authentication, flushing modified data to the server after a CLOSE has occurred may be problematic. For example, the user - of the application may have logged off of the client and unexpired + of the application may have logged off the client and unexpired authentication credentials may not be present. In this case, the client may need to take special care to ensure that local unexpired credentials will in fact be available. This may be accomplished by tracking the expiration time of credentials and flushing data well in advance of their expiration or by making private copies of credentials to assure their availability when needed. 9.4.2. Open Delegation and File Locks When a client holds a write open delegation, lock operations are performed locally. This includes those required for mandatory file locking. This can be done since the delegation implies that there can be no conflicting locks. Similarly, all of the revalidations that would normally be associated with obtaining locks and the flushing of data associated with the releasing of locks need not be done. -9.4.3. Recall of Open Delegation + When a client holds a read open delegation, lock operations are not + performed locally. All lock operations, including those requesting + non-exclusive locks, are sent to the server for resolution. - The following events necessitate recall of an open delegation: +9.4.3. Handling of CB_GETATTR -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + The server needs to employ special handling for a GETATTR where the + target is a file that has a write open delegation in effect. The + reason for this is that the client holding the write delegation may + have modified the data and the server needs to reflect this change to + the second client that submitted the GETATTR. Therefore, the client + holding the write delegation needs to be interrogated. The server + will use the CB_GETATTR operation. The only attributes that the + server can reliably query via CB_GETATTR are size and change. + + Since CB_GETATTR is being used to satisfy another client's GETATTR + request, the server only needs to know if the client holding the + delegation has a modified version of the file. If the client's copy + of the delegated file is not modified (data or size), the server can + satisfy the second client's GETATTR request from the attributes + stored locally at the server. If the file is modified, the server + only needs to know about this modified state. If the server + determines that the file is currently modified, it will respond to + the second client's GETATTR as if the file had been modified locally + at the server. This means that the server will take the current time + and apply it to the construction of attributes like change and + time_modify. + + Since the form of the change attribute is determined by the server + and is opaque to the client, the client and server need to agree on a + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + method of communicating the modified state of the file. For the size + attribute, the client will report its current view of the file size. + For the change attribute, the handling is more involved. + + For the client, the following steps will be taken when receiving a + write delegation: + + o The value of the change attribute will be obtained from the + server and cached. Let this value be represented by c. + + o The client will create a value greater than c that will be used + for communicating modified data is held at the client. Let this + value be represented by d. + + o When the client is queried via CB_GETATTR for the change + attribute, it checks to see if it holds modified data. If the + file is modified, the value d is returned for the change + attribute value. If this file is not currently modified, the + client returns the value c for the change attribute. + + While the change attribute is opaque to client in the sense that it + has no idea what units of time, if any, the server is counting change + with, it is not opaque in that the client has to treat it as an + integer, and the server has to be able to see the results of the + client's changes to that integer. Therefore, the server MUST encode + the change attribute in network order when sending it to the client, + the client MUST decode it from network order to its native order when + receiving it, and the client MUST encode it network order when + sending it to the server. For this reason, change is defined as an + integer, rather than an opaque array of octets. + + For the server, the following steps will be taken when providing a + write delegation: + + o On providing a write delegation, the server will cache a copy of + the change attribute. Let this value be represented by sc. + + o The server obtains the change attribute from the client. Let + this value be cc. + + o If the value cc is equal to sc, the file is not modified and the + server returns the current values for change and time_modify + (for example) to the client requesting GETATTR. + + o If the value cc is NOT equal to sc, the file is currently + modified at the client and most likely will be modified at the + server at a future time. The server then uses the current time + to construct attributes values for change and time_modify and + returns those values to the requestor. + + o In the case that the file attribute size is different than the + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + server's current value, the server treats this as a modification + regardless of the value of the change attribute retrieved via + CB_GETATTR and responds to the second client as in the last + step. + + This methodology resolves issues of clock differences between client + and server and other scenarios where the use of CB_GETATTR break + down. + +9.4.4. Recall of Open Delegation + + The following events necessitate recall of an open delegation: o Potentially conflicting OPEN request (or READ/WRITE done with "special" stateid) o SETATTR issued by another client o REMOVE request for the file o RENAME request for the file as either source or target of the RENAME Whether a RENAME of a directory in the path leading to the file results in recall of an open delegation depends on the semantics of - the server file system. If that file system denies such RENAMEs when - a file is open, the recall must be performed to determine whether the + the server filesystem. If that filesystem denies such RENAMEs when a + file is open, the recall must be performed to determine whether the file in question is, in fact, open. In addition to the situations above, the server may choose to recall open delegations at any time if resource constraints make it advisable to do so. Clients should always be prepared for the possibility of recall. - The server needs to employ special handling for a GETATTR where the - target is a file that has a write open delegation in effect. In this - case, the client holding the delegation needs to be interrogated. - The server will use a CB_GETATTR callback, if the GETATTR attribute - bits include any of the attributes that a write open delegate may - modify (size, time_modify, change). - When a client receives a recall for an open delegation, it needs to update state on the server before returning the delegation. These same updates must be done whenever a client chooses to return a delegation voluntarily. The following items of state need to be dealt with: o If the file associated with the delegation is no longer open and no previous CLOSE operation has been sent to the server, a CLOSE operation must be sent to the server. o If a file has other open references at the client, then OPEN operations must be sent to the server. The appropriate stateids will be provided by the server for subsequent use by the client since the delegation stateid will not longer be valid. These OPEN requests are done with the claim type of CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR. This will allow the presentation of the + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + delegation stateid so that the client can establish the appropriate rights to perform the OPEN. (see the section "Operation 18: OPEN" for details.) o If there are granted file locks, the corresponding LOCK operations need to be performed. This applies to the write open delegation case only. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - o For a write open delegation, if at the time of recall the file is not open for write, all modified data for the file must be flushed to the server. If the delegation had not existed, the client would have done this data flush before the CLOSE operation. o For a write open delegation when a file is still open at the time of recall, any modified data for the file needs to be flushed to the server. o With the write open delegation in place, it is possible that the file was truncated during the duration of the delegation. For example, the truncation could have occurred as a result of an OPEN UNCHECKED with a size attribute value of zero. Therefore, if a truncation of the file has occurred and this operation has not been propagated to the server, the truncation must occur before any modified data is written to the server. In the case of write open delegation, file locking imposes some - additional requirements. The flushing of any modified data in any - region for which a write lock was released while the write open - delegation was in effect is what is required to precisely maintain - the associated invariant. However, because the write open delegation - implies no other locking by other clients, a simpler implementation - is to flush all modified data for the file (as described just above) - if any write lock has been released while the write open delegation - was in effect. + additional requirements. To precisely maintain the associated + invariant, it is required to flush any modified data in any region + for which a write lock was released while the write delegation was in + effect. However, because the write open delegation implies no other + locking by other clients, a simpler implementation is to flush all + modified data for the file (as described just above) if any write + lock has been released while the write open delegation was in effect. -9.4.4. Delegation Revocation + An implementation need not wait until delegation recall (or deciding + to voluntarily return a delegation) to perform any of the above + actions, if implementation considerations (e.g. resource availability + constraints) make that desirable. Generally, however, the fact that + the actual open state of the file may continue to change makes it not + worthwhile to send information about opens and closes to the server, + except as part of delegation return. Only in the case of closing the + open that resulted in obtaining the delegation would clients be + likely to do this early, since, in that case, the close once done + will not be undone. Regardless of the client's choices on scheduling + these actions, all must be performed before the delegation is + returned, including (when applicable) the close that corresponds to + the open that resulted in the delegation. These actions can be + performed either in previous requests or in previous operations in + the same COMPOUND request. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +9.4.5. Delegation Revocation At the point a delegation is revoked, if there are associated opens on the client, the applications holding these opens need to be notified. This notification usually occurs by returning errors for READ/WRITE operations or when a close is attempted for the open file. If no opens exist for the file at the point the delegation is revoked, then notification of the revocation is unnecessary. However, if there is modified data present at the client for the file, the user of the application should be notified. Unfortunately, it may not be possible to notify the user since active applications may not be present at the client. See the section "Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation" for additional details. 9.5. Data Caching and Revocation When locks and delegations are revoked, the assumptions upon which - successful caching depend are no longer guaranteed. The owner of the - locks or share reservations which have been revoked needs to be - notified. This notification includes applications with a file open - that has a corresponding delegation which has been revoked. Cached - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - data associated with the revocation must be removed from the client. - In the case of modified data existing in the client's cache, that - data must be removed from the client without it being written to the - server. As mentioned, the assumptions made by the client are no + successful caching depend are no longer guaranteed. For any locks or + share reservations that have been revoked, the corresponding owner + needs to be notified. This notification includes applications with a + file open that has a corresponding delegation which has been revoked. + Cached data associated with the revocation must be removed from the + client. In the case of modified data existing in the client's cache, + that data must be removed from the client without it being written to + the server. As mentioned, the assumptions made by the client are no longer valid at the point when a lock or delegation has been revoked. For example, another client may have been granted a conflicting lock after the revocation of the lock at the first client. Therefore, the data within the lock range may have been modified by the other client. Obviously, the first client is unable to guarantee to the application what has occurred to the file in the case of revocation. Notification to a lock owner will in many cases consist of simply returning an error on the next and all subsequent READs/WRITEs to the open file or on the close. Where the methods available to a client @@ -4428,41 +5186,50 @@ violated. Depending on how errors are typically treated for the client operating environment, further levels of notification including logging, console messages, and GUI pop-ups may be appropriate. 9.5.1. Revocation Recovery for Write Open Delegation Revocation recovery for a write open delegation poses the special issue of modified data in the client cache while the file is not open. In this situation, any client which does not flush modified + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + data to the server on each close must ensure that the user receives appropriate notification of the failure as a result of the revocation. Since such situations may require human action to correct problems, notification schemes in which the appropriate user or administrator is notified may be necessary. Logging and console messages are typical examples. If there is modified data on the client, it must not be flushed normally to the server. A client may attempt to provide a copy of the file data as modified during the delegation under a different - name in the file system name space to ease recovery. Unless the - client can determine that the file has not modified by any other - client, this technique must be limited to situations in which a - client has a complete cached copy of the file in question. Use of - such a technique may be limited to files under a certain size or may - only be used when sufficient disk space is guaranteed to be available - within the target file system and when the client has sufficient - buffering resources to keep the cached copy available until it is - properly stored to the target file system. + name in the filesystem name space to ease recovery. Note that when + the client can determine that the file has not been modified by any + other client, or when the client has a complete cached copy of file + in question, such a saved copy of the client's view of the file may + be of particular value for recovery. In other case, recovery using a + copy of the file based partially on the client's cached data and + partially on the server copy as modified by other clients, will be + anything but straightforward, so clients may avoid saving file + contents in these situations or mark the results specially to warn + users of possible problems. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + Saving of such modified data in delegation revocation situations may + be limited to files of a certain size or might be used only when + sufficient disk space is available within the target filesystem. + Such saving may also be restricted to situations when the client has + sufficient buffering resources to keep the cached copy available + until it is properly stored to the target filesystem. 9.6. Attribute Caching The attributes discussed in this section do not include named attributes. Individual named attributes are analogous to files and caching of the data for these needs to be handled just as data caching is for ordinary files. Similarly, LOOKUP results from an OPENATTR directory are to be cached on the same basis as any other pathnames and similarly for directory contents. @@ -4473,20 +5240,22 @@ cached. The exception to this are modifications to attributes that are intimately connected with data caching. Therefore, extending a file by writing data to the local data cache is reflected immediately in the size as seen on the client without this change being immediately reflected on the server. Normally such changes are not propagated directly to the server but when the modified data is flushed to the server, analogous attribute changes are made on the server. When open delegation is in effect, the modified attributes may be returned to the server in the response to a CB_RECALL call. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + The result of local caching of attributes is that the attribute caches maintained on individual clients will not be coherent. Changes made in one order on the server may be seen in a different order on one client and in a third order on a different client. The typical file system application programming interfaces do not provide means to atomically modify or interrogate attributes for multiple files at the same time. The following rules provide an environment where the potential incoherences mentioned above can be reasonably managed. These rules are derived from the practice of @@ -4503,44 +5272,74 @@ server, the updated attribute set is requested as part of the containing RPC. This includes directory operations that update attributes indirectly. This is accomplished by following the modifying operation with a GETATTR operation and then using the results of the GETATTR to update the client's cached attributes. Note that if the full set of attributes to be cached is requested by READDIR, the results can be cached by the client on the same basis as attributes obtained via GETATTR. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - A client may validate its cached version of attributes for a file by - fetching only the change attribute and assuming that if the change - attribute has the same value as it did when the attributes were - cached, then no attributes have changed. The possible exception is - the attribute time_access. + fetching just both the change and time_access attributes and assuming + that if the change attribute has the same value as it did when the + attributes were cached, then no attributes other than time_access + have changed. The reason why time_access is also fetched is because + many servers operate in environments where the operation that updates + change does not update time_access. For example, POSIX file + semantics do not update access time when a file is modified by the + write system call. Therefore, the client that wants a current + time_access value should fetch it with change during the attribute + cache validation processing and update its cached time_access. + + The client may maintain a cache of modified attributes for those + attributes intimately connected with data of modified regular files + (size, time_modify, and change). Other than those three attributes, + the client MUST NOT maintain a cache of modified attributes. Instead, + attribute changes are immediately sent to the server. + + In some operating environments, the equivalent to time_access is + expected to be implicitly updated by each read of the content of the + file object. If an NFS client is caching the content of a file + object, whether it is a regular file, directory, or symbolic link, + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + the client SHOULD NOT update the time_access attribute (via SETATTR + or a small READ or READDIR request) on the server with each read that + is satisfied from cache. The reason is that this can defeat the + performance benefits of caching content, especially since an explicit + SETATTR of time_access may alter the change attribute on the server. + If the change attribute changes, clients that are caching the content + will think the content has changed, and will re-read unmodified data + from the server. Nor is the client encouraged to maintain a modified + version of time_access in its cache, since this would mean that the + client will either eventually have to write the access time to the + server with bad performance effects, or it would never update the + server's time_access, thereby resulting in a situation where an + application that caches access time between a close and open of the + same file observes the access time oscillating between the past and + present. The time_access attribute always means the time of last + access to a file by a read that was satisfied by the server. This way + clients will tend to see only time_access changes that go forward in + time. 9.7. Name Caching The results of LOOKUP and READDIR operations may be cached to avoid the cost of subsequent LOOKUP operations. Just as in the case of attribute caching, inconsistencies may arise among the various client caches. To mitigate the effects of these inconsistencies and given - the context of typical file system APIs, the following rules should - be followed: - - o The results of unsuccessful LOOKUPs should not be cached, unless - they are specifically reverified at the point of use. - - o An upper time boundary is maintained on how long a client name - cache entry can be kept without verifying that the entry has not - been made invalid by a directory change operation performed by - another client. + the context of typical filesystem APIs, an upper time boundary is + maintained on how long a client name cache entry can be kept without + verifying that the entry has not been made invalid by a directory + change operation performed by another client. When a client is not making changes to a directory for which there exist name cache entries, the client needs to periodically fetch attributes for that directory to ensure that it is not being modified. After determining that no modification has occurred, the expiration time for the associated name cache entries may be updated to be the current time plus the name cache staleness bound. When a client is making changes to a given directory, it needs to determine whether there have been changes made to the directory by @@ -4549,30 +5348,30 @@ change_info4 value returned for the operation. The server is able to communicate to the client whether the change_info4 data is provided atomically with respect to the directory operation. If the change values are provided atomically, the client is then able to compare the pre-operation change value with the change value in the client's name cache. If the comparison indicates that the directory was updated by another client, the name cache associated with the modified directory is purged from the client. If the comparison indicates no modification, the name cache can be updated on the client to reflect the directory operation and the associated timeout + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + extended. The post-operation change value needs to be saved as the basis for future change_info4 comparisons. As demonstrated by the scenario above, name caching requires that the client revalidate name cache data by inspecting the change attribute of a directory at the point when the name cache item was cached. This requires that the server update the change attribute for - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - directories when the contents of the corresponding directory is modified. For a client to use the change_info4 information appropriately and correctly, the server must report the pre and post operation change attribute values atomically. When the server is unable to report the before and after values atomically with respect to the directory operation, the server must indicate that fact in the change_info4 return value. When the information is not atomically reported, the client should not assume that other clients have not changed the directory. @@ -4603,33 +5402,33 @@ client needs to use the change_info4 data to determine whether there are other clients modifying the directory. If it is determined that no other client modifications are occurring, the client may update its directory cache to reflect its own changes. As demonstrated previously, directory caching requires that the client revalidate directory cache data by inspecting the change attribute of a directory at the point when the directory was cached. This requires that the server update the change attribute for directories when the contents of the corresponding directory is + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + modified. For a client to use the change_info4 information appropriately and correctly, the server must report the pre and post operation change attribute values atomically. When the server is unable to report the before and after values atomically with respect to the directory operation, the server must indicate that fact in the change_info4 return value. When the information is not atomically reported, the client should not assume that other clients have not - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - changed the directory. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 10. Minor Versioning To address the requirement of an NFS protocol that can evolve as the need arises, the NFS version 4 protocol contains the rules and framework to allow for future minor changes or versioning. The base assumption with respect to minor versioning is that any future accepted minor version must follow the IETF process and be documented in a standards track RFC. Therefore, each minor version @@ -4639,21 +5438,21 @@ requested by the client. The following items represent the basic rules for the development of minor versions. Note that a future minor version may decide to modify or add to the following rules as part of the minor version definition. 1 Procedures are not added or deleted To maintain the general RPC model, NFS version 4 minor versions - will not add or delete procedures from the NFS program. + will not add to or delete procedures from the NFS program. 2 Minor versions may add operations to the COMPOUND and CB_COMPOUND procedures. The addition of operations to the COMPOUND and CB_COMPOUND procedures does not affect the RPC model. 2.1 Minor versions may append attributes to GETATTR4args, bitmap4, and GETATTR4res. @@ -4664,21 +5463,21 @@ documented attribute. Since attribute results are specified as an opaque array of per-attribute XDR encoded results, the complexity of adding new attributes in the midst of the current definitions will be too burdensome. 3 Minor versions must not modify the structure of an existing operation's arguments or results. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Again the complexity of handling multiple structure definitions for a single operation is too burdensome. New operations should be added instead of modifying existing structures for a minor version. This rule does not preclude the following adaptations in a minor version. o adding bits to flag fields such as new attributes to @@ -4712,21 +5511,21 @@ the request as an XDR decode error. This approach allows for the obsolescence of an operation while maintaining its structure so that a future minor version can reintroduce the operation. 8.1 Minor versions may declare attributes mandatory to NOT implement. 8.2 Minor versions may declare flag bits or enumeration values as mandatory to NOT implement. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 9 Minor versions may downgrade features from mandatory to recommended, or recommended to optional. 10 Minor versions may upgrade features from optional to recommended or recommended to mandatory. 11 A client and server that support minor version X must support minor versions 0 (zero) through X-1 as well. @@ -4735,84 +5534,77 @@ This rule allows for the introduction of new functionality and forces the use of implementation experience before designating a feature as mandatory. 13 A client MUST NOT attempt to use a stateid, file handle, or similar returned object from the COMPOUND procedure with minor version X for another COMPOUND procedure with minor version Y, where X != Y. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 11. Internationalization The primary issue in which NFS needs to deal with internationalization, or I18N, is with respect to file names and other strings as used within the protocol. The choice of string representation must allow reasonable name/string access to clients which use various languages. The UTF-8 encoding of the UCS as defined by [ISO10646] allows for this type of access and follows the policy described in "IETF Policy on Character Sets and Languages", [RFC2277]. This choice is explained further in the following. 11.1. Universal Versus Local Character Sets [RFC1345] describes a table of 16 bit characters for many different - languages (the bit encodings match Unicode, though of course RFC1345 - is somewhat out of date with respect to current Unicode assignments). - Each character from each language has a unique 16 bit value in the 16 - bit character set. Thus this table can be thought of as a universal - character set. [RFC1345] then talks about groupings of subsets of - the entire 16 bit character set into "Charset Tables". For example - one might take all the Greek characters from the 16 bit table (which - are consecutively allocated), and normalize their offsets to a table - that fits in 7 bits. Thus it is determined that "lower case alpha" - is in the same position as "upper case a" in the US-ASCII table, and - "upper case alpha" is in the same position as "lower case a" in the - US-ASCII table. + languages (the bit encodings match Unicode, though of course + [RFC1345] is somewhat out of date with respect to current Unicode + assignments). Each character from each language has a unique 16 bit + value in the 16 bit character set. Thus this table can be thought of + as a universal character set. [RFC1345] then talks about groupings + of subsets of the entire 16 bit character set into "Charset Tables". + For example one might take all the Greek characters from the 16 bit + table (which are consecutively allocated), and normalize their + offsets to a table that fits in 7 bits. Thus it is determined that + "lower case alpha" is in the same position as "upper case a" in the + US-ASCII table, and "upper case alpha" is in the same position as + "lower case a" in the US-ASCII table. These normalized subset character sets can be thought of as "local character sets", suitable for an operating system locale. Local character sets are not suitable for the NFS protocol. Consider someone who creates a file with a name in a Swedish character set. If someone else later goes to access the file with their locale set to the Swedish language, then there are no problems. But if someone in say the US-ASCII locale goes to access the file, the file name will look very different, because the Swedish characters in the 7 bit table will now be represented in US-ASCII characters on the display. It would be preferable to give the US-ASCII user a way to display the file name using Swedish glyphs. In order to do that, the NFS protocol would have to include the locale with the file name on each operation to create a file. - But then what of the situation when there is a path name on the - server like: - - /component-1/component-2/component-3 - - Each component could have been created with a different locale. If - one issues CREATE with multi-component path name, and if some of the - leading components already exist, what is to be done with the - existing components? Is the current locale attribute replaced with - the user's current one? These types of situations quickly become too - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - complex when there is an alternate solution. + However, the complexity burden of defining such locales in a way that + could be understood by all clients and servers, and maintaining them + in the face of changes would be considerable. A better solution is + desirable. If the NFS version 4 protocol used a universal 16 bit or 32 bit character set (or an encoding of a 16 bit or 32 bit character set into octets), then the server and client need not care if the locale of the user accessing the file is different than the locale of the user who created the file. The unique 16 bit or 32 bit encoding of + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + the character allows for determination of what language the character is from and also how to display that character on the client. The server need not know what locales are used. 11.2. Overview of Universal Character Set Standards The previous section makes a case for using a universal character set. This section makes the case for using UTF-8 as the specific universal character set for the NFS version 4 protocol. @@ -4840,28 +5632,28 @@ UCS-4 a four octet per character encoding that permits the encoding of up to 2^31 characters. UTF UTF is an abbreviation of the term "UCS transformation format" and is used in the naming of various standards for encoding of UCS characters as described below. UTF-1 Only historical interest; it has been removed from 10646-1 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - UTF-7 Encodes the entire "repertoire" of UCS "characters using only octets with the higher order bit clear". [RFC2152] describes UTF-7. UTF-7 accomplishes this by reserving one of the 7bit US-ASCII characters as a "shift" character to indicate non-US-ASCII characters. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + UTF-8 Unlike UTF-7, uses all 8 bits of the octets. US-ASCII characters are encoded as before unchanged. Any octet with the high bit cleared can only mean a US-ASCII character. The high bit set means that a UCS character is being encoded. UTF-16 Encodes UCS-4 characters into UCS-2 characters using a reserved range in UCS-2. Unicode Unicode and UCS-2 are the same; [RFC2279] states: @@ -4891,28 +5683,29 @@ UTF-8 solves problems for NFS that exist with the use of UCS and Unicode. UTF-8 will encode 16 bit and 32 bit characters in a way that will be compact for most users. The encoding table from UCS-4 to UTF-8, as copied from [RFC2279]: UCS-4 range (hex.) UTF-8 octet sequence (binary) 0000 0000-0000 007F 0xxxxxxx 0000 0080-0000 07FF 110xxxxx 10xxxxxx 0000 0800-0000 FFFF 1110xxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - 0001 0000-001F FFFF 11110xxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 0020 0000-03FF FFFF 111110xx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 0400 0000-7FFF FFFF 1111110x 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx 10xxxxxx See [RFC2279] for precise encoding and decoding rules. Note because + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + of UTF-16, the algorithm from Unicode/UCS-2 to UTF-8 needs to account for the reserved range between D800 and DFFF. Note that the 16 bit UCS or Unicode characters require no more than 3 octets to encode into UTF-8 Interestingly, UTF-8 has room to handle characters larger than 31 bits, because the leading octet of form: 1111111x @@ -4942,21 +5735,46 @@ The NFS version 4 protocol does not mandate the use of a particular normalization form at this time. A later revision of this specification may specify a particular normalization form. Therefore, the server and client can expect that they may receive unnormalized characters within protocol requests and responses. If the operating environment requires normalization, then the implementation must normalize the various UTF-8 encoded strings within the protocol before presenting the information to an application (at the client) or local file system (at the server). -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +11.6. UTF-8 Related Errors + + Where the client sends an invalid UTF-8 string, the server should + return an NFS4ERR_INVAL error. This includes cases in which + inappropriate prefixes are detected and where the count includes + trailing bytes that do not constitute a full UCS character. + + Where the client supplied string is valid UTF-8 but contains + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + characters that are not supported by the server as a value for that + string (e.g. names containing characters that have more than two + octets on a filesystem that supports Unicode characters only), the + server should return an NFS4ERR_BADCHAR error. + + Where a UTF-8 string is used as a file name, and the filesystem, + while supporting all of the characters within the name, does not + allow that particular name to be used, the error should return the + error NFS4ERR_BADNAME. This includes situations in which the server + filesystem imposes a normalization constraint on name strings, but + will also include such situations as filesystem prohibitions of "." + and ".." as file names for certain operations, and other such + constraints. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 12. Error Definitions NFS error numbers are assigned to failed operations within a compound request. A compound request contains a number of NFS operations that have their results encoded in sequence in a compound reply. The results of successful operations will consist of an NFS4_OK status followed by the encoded results of the operation. If an NFS operation fails, an error status will be entered in the reply and the compound request will be terminated. @@ -4968,47 +5786,65 @@ NFS4ERR_ACCESS Permission denied. The caller does not have the correct permission to perform the requested operation. Contrast this with NFS4ERR_PERM, which restricts itself to owner or privileged user permission failures. NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP An attribute specified is not supported by the server. Does not apply to the GETATTR operation. + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR A UTF-8 string contains a character which is + not supported by the server in the context in + which it being used. + + NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE READDIR cookie is stale. + NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE Illegal NFS file handle. The file handle failed internal consistency checks. + NFS4ERR_BADNAME A name string in a request consists of valid + UTF-8 characters supported by the server but + the name is not supported by the server as a + valid name for current operation. + NFS4ERR_BADOWNER An owner, owner_group, or ACL attribute value can not be translated to local representation. NFS4ERR_BADTYPE An attempt was made to create an object of a type not supported by the server. - NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE READDIR cookie is stale. + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE The range for a LOCK, LOCKT, or LOCKU operation + is not appropriate to the allowable range of + offsets for the server. NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID The sequence number in a locking request is neither the next expected number or the last + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + number processed. NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID A stateid generated by the current server instance, but which does not designate any locking state (either current or superseded) for a current lockowner-file pair, was used. NFS4ERR_BADXDR The server encountered an XDR decoding error while processing an operation. - NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE The SETCLIENTID procedure has found that a + NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE The SETCLIENTID operation has found that a client id is already in use by another client. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK The server has been able to determine a file + locking deadlock condition for a blocking lock + request. NFS4ERR_DELAY The server initiated the request, but was not able to complete it in a timely fashion. The client should wait and then try the request with a new RPC transaction ID. For example, this error should be returned from a server that supports hierarchical storage and receives a request to process a file that has been migrated. In this case, the server should start the immigration process and respond to client @@ -5022,122 +5858,141 @@ is encouraged to retry the lock request until the lock is accepted. NFS4ERR_DQUOT Resource (quota) hard limit exceeded. The user's resource limit on the server has been exceeded. NFS4ERR_EXIST File exists. The file specified already exists. NFS4ERR_EXPIRED A lease has expired that is being used in the - current procedure. + current operation. NFS4ERR_FBIG File too large. The operation would have caused a file to grow beyond the server's limit. NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED The file handle provided is volatile and has expired at the server. + NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN The operation can not be successfully processed + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + because a file involved in the operation is + currently open. + NFS4ERR_GRACE The server is in its recovery or grace period which should match the lease period of the server. NFS4ERR_INVAL Invalid argument or unsupported argument for an operation. Two examples are attempting a READLINK on an object other than a symbolic link or attempting to SETATTR a time field on a server that does not support this operation. NFS4ERR_IO I/O error. A hard error (for example, a disk error) occurred while processing the requested operation. NFS4ERR_ISDIR Is a directory. The caller specified a directory in a non-directory operation. - NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED A lease being renewed is associated with a file - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - system that has been migrated to a new server. + NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED A lease being renewed is associated with a + filesystem that has been migrated to a new + server. NFS4ERR_LOCKED A read or write operation was attempted on a locked file. + NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP Server does not support atomic upgrade or + downgrade of locks. + NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE A lock request is operating on a sub-range of a current lock for the lock owner and the server does not support this type of request. + NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD A CLOSE was attempted and file locks would + exist after the CLOSE. + NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH The server has received a request that specifies an unsupported minor version. The server must return a COMPOUND4res with a zero length operations result array. NFS4ERR_MLINK Too many hard links. NFS4ERR_MOVED The filesystem which contains the current filehandle object has been relocated or migrated to another server. The client may obtain the new filesystem location by obtaining the "fs_locations" attribute for the current filehandle. For further discussion, refer to the section "Filesystem Migration or + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Relocation". NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG The filename in an operation was too long. NFS4ERR_NODEV No such device. NFS4ERR_NOENT No such file or directory. The file or directory name specified does not exist. - NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE The logical current file handle value has not - been set properly. This may be a result of a - malformed COMPOUND operation (i.e. no PUTFH or - PUTROOTFH before an operation that requires the - current file handle be set). + NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE The logical current filehandle value (or, in + the case of RESTOREFH, the saved filehandle + value) has not been set properly. This may be + a result of a malformed COMPOUND operation + (i.e. no PUTFH or PUTROOTFH before an operation + that requires the current filehandle be set). NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE A reclaim of client state has fallen outside of the grace period of the server. As a result, the server can not guarantee that conflicting state has not been provided to another client. NFS4ERR_NOSPC No space left on device. The operation would have caused the server's file system to exceed its limit. NFS4ERR_NOTDIR Not a directory. The caller specified a non- directory in a directory operation. NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY An attempt was made to remove a directory that - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - was not empty. NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP Operation is not supported. NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME This error is returned by the VERIFY operation to signify that the attributes compared were not the same as provided in the client's request. NFS4ERR_NXIO I/O error. No such device or address. NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID A stateid which designates the locking state for a lockowner-file at an earlier time was used. - NFS4ERR_OPENMODE The client attempted a READ, WRITE, or SETATTR - operation not sanctioned by the stateid passed - (e.g. writing to a file opened only for read). + NFS4ERR_OPENMODE The client attempted a READ, WRITE, LOCK or + SETATTR operation not sanctioned by the stateid + passed (e.g. writing to a file opened only for + read). + + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL An illegal operation value has been specified + in the argop field of a COMPOUND or CB_COMPOUND + procedure. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 NFS4ERR_PERM Not owner. The operation was not allowed because the caller is either not a privileged user (root) or not the owner of the target of the operation. NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC The encoded response to a READDIR request exceeds the size limit set by the initial request. @@ -5145,95 +6000,99 @@ match any of the server's state consistency checks and is bad. NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT The reclaim provided by the client has encountered a conflict and can not be provided. Potentially indicates a misbehaving client. NFS4ERR_RESOURCE For the processing of the COMPOUND procedure, the server may exhaust available resources and - can not continue processing procedures within - the COMPOUND operation. This error will be + can not continue processing operationss within + the COMPOUND procedure. This error will be returned from the server in those instances of resource exhaustion related to the processing of the COMPOUND procedure. - NFS4ERR_ROFS Read-only file system. A modifying operation - was attempted on a read-only file system. + NFS4ERR_ROFS Read-only filesystem. A modifying operation was + attempted on a read-only filesystem. NFS4ERR_SAME This error is returned by the NVERIFY operation to signify that the attributes compared were the same as provided in the client's request. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT An error occurred on the server which does not map to any of the legal NFS version 4 protocol error values. The client should translate this into an appropriate error. UNIX clients may choose to translate this to EIO. NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED An attempt to OPEN a file with a share reservation has failed because of a share conflict. - NFS4ERR_STALE Invalid file handle. The file handle given in - the arguments was invalid. The file referred to - by that file handle no longer exists or access - to it has been revoked. + NFS4ERR_STALE Invalid filehandle. The filehandle given in the + arguments was invalid. The file referred to by + that filehandle no longer exists or access to + it has been revoked. NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID A clientid not recognized by the server was used in a locking or SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM request. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID A stateid generated by an earlier server instance was used. - NFS4ERR_SYMLINK The current file handle provided for a LOOKUP - is not a directory but a symbolic link. Also - used if the final component of the OPEN path is - a symbolic link. + NFS4ERR_SYMLINK The current filehandle provided for a LOOKUP is + not a directory but a symbolic link. Also used + if the final component of the OPEN path is a + symbolic link. NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL Buffer or request is too small. NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC The security mechanism being used by the client - for the procedure does not match the server's + for the operation does not match the server's security policy. The client should change the security mechanism being used and retry the operation. - NFS4ERR_XDEV Attempt to do a cross-device hard link. + NFS4ERR_XDEV Attempt to do an operation between different + fsids. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -13. NFS Version 4 Requests +13. NFS version 4 Requests For the NFS version 4 RPC program, there are two traditional RPC procedures: NULL and COMPOUND. All other functionality is defined as a set of operations and these operations are defined in normal XDR/RPC syntax and semantics. However, these operations are encapsulated within the COMPOUND procedure. This requires that the client combine one or more of the NFS version 4 operations into a single request. The NFS4_CALLBACK program is used to provide server to client signaling and is constructed in a similar fashion as the NFS version 4 program. The procedures CB_NULL and CB_COMPOUND are defined in the same way as NULL and COMPOUND are within the NFS program. The CB_COMPOUND request also encapsulates the remaining operations of the NFS4_CALLBACK program. There is no predefined RPC program number for the NFS4_CALLBACK program. It is up to the client to specify a program number in the "transient" program range. The program and port number of the NFS4_CALLBACK program are provided by the client - as part of the SETCLIENTID operation and therefore is fixed for the - life of the client instantiation. + as part of the SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM sequence. The program + and port can be changed by another SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + sequence, and it is possible to use the sequence to change them + within a client incarnation without removing relevant leased client + state. 13.1. Compound Procedure The COMPOUND procedure provides the opportunity for better performance within high latency networks. The client can avoid cumulative latency of multiple RPCs by combining multiple dependent operations into a single COMPOUND procedure. A compound operation may provide for protocol simplification by allowing the client to combine basic procedures into a single request that is customized for the client's environment. @@ -5247,26 +6106,26 @@ | tag | minorversion | numops | op + args | op + args | op + args | +-----+--------------+--------+-----------+-----------+-----------+-- and the reply's structure is: +------------+-----+--------+-----------------------+-- |last status | tag | numres | status + op + results | +------------+-----+--------+-----------------------+-- The numops and numres fields, used in the depiction above, represent + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + the count for the counted array encoding use to signify the number of arguments or results encoded in the request and response. As per the XDR encoding, these counts must match exactly the number of operation - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - arguments or results encoded. 13.2. Evaluation of a Compound Request The server will process the COMPOUND procedure by evaluating each of the operations within the COMPOUND procedure in order. Each component operation consists of a 32 bit operation code, followed by the argument of length determined by the type of operation. The results of each operation are encoded in sequence into a reply buffer. The results of each operation are preceded by the opcode and @@ -5300,43 +6159,43 @@ 13.3. Synchronous Modifying Operations NFS version 4 operations that modify the file system are synchronous. When an operation is successfully completed at the server, the client can depend that any data associated with the request is now on stable storage (the one exception is in the case of the file data in a WRITE operation with the UNSTABLE option specified). This implies that any previous operations within the same compound + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + request are also reflected in stable storage. This behavior enables the client's ability to recover from a partially executed compound request which may resulted from the failure of the server. For - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - example, if a compound request contains operations A and B and the server is unable to send a response to the client, depending on the progress the server made in servicing the request the result of both operations may be reflected in stable storage or just operation A may be reflected. The server must not have just the results of operation B in stable storage. 13.4. Operation Values The operations encoded in the COMPOUND procedure are identified by operation values. To avoid overlap with the RPC procedure numbers, operations 0 (zero) and 1 are not defined. Operation 2 is not defined but reserved for future use with minor versioning. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -14. NFS Version 4 Procedures +14. NFS version 4 Procedures 14.1. Procedure 0: NULL - No Operation SYNOPSIS ARGUMENT void; @@ -5350,21 +6209,21 @@ Standard NULL procedure. Void argument, void response. This procedure has no functionality associated with it. Because of this it is sometimes used to measure the overhead of processing a service request. Therefore, the server should ensure that no unnecessary work is done in servicing this procedure. ERRORS None. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2. Procedure 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operations SYNOPSIS compoundargs -> compoundres ARGUMENT union nfs_argop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 argop) { @@ -5399,21 +6258,21 @@ the COMPOUND procedure as a wrapper. The COMPOUND procedure is used to combine individual operations into a single RPC request. The server interprets each of the operations in turn. If an operation is executed by the server and the status of that operation is NFS4_OK, then the next operation in the COMPOUND procedure is executed. The server continues this process until there are no more operations to be executed or one of the operations has a status value other than NFS4_OK. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 In the processing of the COMPOUND procedure, the server may find that it does not have the available resources to execute any or all of the operations within the COMPOUND sequence. In this case, the error NFS4ERR_RESOURCE will be returned for the particular operation within the COMPOUND procedure where the resource exhaustion occurred. This assumes that all previous operations within the COMPOUND sequence have been evaluated successfully. The results for all of the evaluated operations must be returned to the client. @@ -5438,67 +6297,66 @@ NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH and a zero length resultdata array. Contained within the COMPOUND results is a "status" field. If the results array length is non-zero, this status must be equivalent to the status of the last operation that was executed within the COMPOUND procedure. Therefore, if an operation incurred an error then the "status" value will be the same error value as is being returned for the operation that failed. Note that operations, 0 (zero) and 1 (one) are not defined for the - COMPOUND procedure. If the server receives an operation array with - either of these included, an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP must be - returned. Operation 2 is not defined but reserved for future - definition and use with minor versioning. If the server receives a - operation array that contains operation 2 and the minorversion - field has a value of 0 (zero), an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is - returned. If an operation array contains an operation 2 and the - minorversion field is non-zero and the server does not support the - minor version, the server returns an error of + COMPOUND procedure. Operation 2 is not defined but reserved for + future definition and use with minor versioning. If the server + receives a operation array that contains operation 2 and the + minorversion field has a value of 0 (zero), an error of + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL, as described in the next paragraph, is returned + to the client. If an operation array contains an operation 2 and + the minorversion field is non-zero and the server does not support + the minor version, the server returns an error of NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH. Therefore, the NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH error takes precedence over all other errors. It is possible that the server receives a request that contains an - operation that is beyond the last defined operation (e.g. + operation that is less than the first legal operation (OP_ACCESS) + or greater than the last legal operation (OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER). -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - OP_WRITE). In this case, the server obviously will fail the - unknown operation. If this occurs, the server will return an - operation "opcode" that is 1 greater than the largest defined - operation. For example, the server would return an opcode of - OP_WRITE + 1. The server would then return a status of - NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP to indicate an operation that is not defined and - therefore not supported. + In this case, the server's response will encode the opcode + OP_ILLEGAL rather than the illegal opcode of the request. The + status field in the ILLEGAL return results will set to + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL. The COMPOUND procedure's return results will + also be NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL. The definition of the "tag" in the request is left to the implementor. It may be used to summarize the content of the compound request for the benefit of packet sniffers and engineers debugging implementations. However, the value of "tag" in the - response MUST be the same value as provided in the request. + response SHOULD be the same value as provided in the request. This + applies to the tag field of the CB_COMPOUND procedure as well. IMPLEMENTATION Since an error of any type may occur after only a portion of the operations have been evaluated, the client must be prepared to recover from any failure. If the source of an NFS4ERR_RESOURCE error was a complex or lengthy set of operations, it is likely that if the number of operations were reduced the server would be able to evaluate them successfully. Therefore, the client is responsible for dealing with this type of complexity in recovery. ERRORS All errors defined in the protocol -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.1. Operation 3: ACCESS - Check Access Rights SYNOPSIS (cfh), accessreq -> supported, accessrights ARGUMENT const ACCESS4_READ = 0x00000001; @@ -5534,21 +6392,21 @@ system object specified by the current filehandle. The client encodes the set of access rights that are to be checked in the bit mask "access". The server checks the permissions encoded in the bit mask. If a status of NFS4_OK is returned, two bit masks are included in the response. The first, "supported", represents the access rights for which the server can verify reliably. The second, "access", represents the access rights available to the user for the filehandle provided. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Note that the supported field will contain only as many values as was originally sent in the arguments. For example, if the client sends an ACCESS operation with only the ACCESS4_READ value set and the server supports this value, the server will return only ACCESS4_READ even if it could have reliably checked other values. The results of this operation are necessarily advisory in nature. A return status of NFS4_OK and the appropriate bit set in the bit mask does not imply that such access will be allowed to the file @@ -5569,44 +6427,41 @@ ACCESS4_DELETE Delete an existing directory entry (no meaning for non-directory objects). ACCESS4_EXECUTE Execute file (no meaning for a directory). On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION - For the NFS version 4 protocol, the use of the ACCESS procedure - when opening a regular file is deprecated in favor of using OPEN. - In general, it is not sufficient for the client to attempt to deduce access permissions by inspecting the uid, gid, and mode fields in the file attributes or by attempting to interpret the contents of the ACL attribute. This is because the server may perform uid or gid mapping or enforce additional access control restrictions. It is also possible that the server may not be in the same ID space as the client. In these cases (and perhaps others), the client can not reliably perform an access check with only current file attributes. In the NFS version 2 protocol, the only reliable way to determine whether an operation was allowed was to try it and see if it - succeeded or failed. Using the ACCESS procedure in the NFS version + succeeded or failed. Using the ACCESS operation in the NFS version 4 protocol, the client can ask the server to indicate whether or not one or more classes of operations are permitted. The ACCESS - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - operation is provided to allow clients to check before doing a series of operations which will result in an access failure. The OPEN operation provides a point where the server can verify access + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + to the file object and method to return that information to the client. The ACCESS operation is still useful for directory operations or for use in the case the UNIX API "access" is used on the client. The information returned by the server in response to an ACCESS call is not permanent. It was correct at the exact time that the server performed the checks, but not necessarily afterwards. The server can revoke access permission at any time. @@ -5633,23 +6488,22 @@ NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.2. Operation 4: CLOSE - Close File SYNOPSIS (cfh), seqid, open_stateid -> open_stateid ARGUMENT struct CLOSE4args { @@ -5683,21 +6537,21 @@ locks would exist after the CLOSE. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION Even though CLOSE returns a stateid, this stateid is not useful to the client and should be treated as deprecated. CLOSE "shuts down" the state associated with all OPENs for the file by a single -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 open_owner. As noted above, CLOSE will either release all file locking state or return an error. Therefore, the stateid returned by CLOSE is not useful for operations that follow. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID @@ -5711,21 +6565,21 @@ NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.3. Operation 5: COMMIT - Commit Cached Data SYNOPSIS (cfh), offset, count -> verifier ARGUMENT struct COMMIT4args { @@ -5758,34 +6612,34 @@ is to begin. An offset value of 0 (zero) means to flush data starting at the beginning of the file. The count specifies the number of bytes of data to flush. If count is 0 (zero), a flush from offset to the end of the file is done. The server returns a write verifier upon successful completion of the COMMIT. The write verifier is used by the client to determine if the server has restarted or rebooted between the initial WRITE(s) and the COMMIT. The client does this by comparing the write verifier returned from the initial writes and the verifier - returned by the COMMIT procedure. The server must vary the value + returned by the COMMIT operation. The server must vary the value of the write verifier at each server event or instantiation that may lead to a loss of uncommitted data. Most commonly this occurs when the server is rebooted; however, other events at the server -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 may result in uncommitted data loss as well. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION - The COMMIT procedure is similar in operation and semantics to the + The COMMIT operation is similar in operation and semantics to the POSIX fsync(2) system call that synchronizes a file's state with the disk (file data and metadata is flushed to disk or stable storage). COMMIT performs the same operation for a client, flushing any unsynchronized data and metadata on the server to the server's disk or stable storage for the specified file. Like fsync(2), it may be that there is some modified data or no modified data to synchronize. The data may have been synchronized by the server's normal periodic buffer synchronization activity. COMMIT should return NFS4_OK, unless there has been an unexpected error. @@ -5817,21 +6671,21 @@ close. In this case, the client would gather all of the buffers for this file that contain uncommitted data, do the COMMIT operation with an offset of 0 and count of 0, and then free all of those buffers. Any other dirty buffers would be sent to the server in the normal fashion. After a buffer is written by the client with the stable parameter set to UNSTABLE4, the buffer must be considered as modified by the client until the buffer has either been flushed via a COMMIT -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 operation or written via a WRITE operation with stable parameter set to FILE_SYNC4 or DATA_SYNC4. This is done to prevent the buffer from being freed and reused before the data can be flushed to stable storage on the server. When a response is returned from either a WRITE or a COMMIT operation and it contains a write verifier that is different than previously returned by the server, the client will need to retransmit all of the buffers containing uncommitted cached data to @@ -5857,23 +6711,22 @@ NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.4. Operation 6: CREATE - Create a Non-Regular File Object SYNOPSIS (cfh), name, type, attrs -> (cfh), change_info, attrs_set ARGUMENT union createtype4 switch (nfs_ftype4 type) { @@ -5883,49 +6736,49 @@ case NF4CHR: specdata4 devdata; case NF4SOCK: case NF4FIFO: case NF4DIR: void; }; struct CREATE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory for creation */ - component4 objname; createtype4 objtype; + component4 objname; fattr4 createattrs; }; RESULT struct CREATE4resok { change_info4 cinfo; bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes set */ }; union CREATE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: CREATE4resok resok4; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The CREATE operation creates a non-regular file object in a - directory with a given name. The OPEN procedure MUST be used to + directory with a given name. The OPEN operation MUST be used to create a regular file. The objname specifies the name for the new object. The objtype determines the type of object to be created: directory, symlink, -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 etc. If an object of the same name already exists in the directory, the server will return the error NFS4ERR_EXIST. For the directory where the new file object was created, the server returns change_info4 information in cinfo. With the atomic field of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect @@ -5936,62 +6789,81 @@ returned. The current filehandle is replaced by that of the new object. The createattrs specifies the initial set of attributes for the object. The set of attributes may include any writable attribute valid for the object type. When the operation is successful, the server will return to the client an attribute mask signifying which attributes were successfully set for the object. + If createattrs includes neither the owner attribute nor an ACL with + an ACE for the owner, and if the server's filesystem both supports + and requires an owner attribute (or an owner ACE) then the server + MUST derive the owner (or the owner ACE). This would typically be + from the principal indicated in the RPC credentials of the call, + but the server's operating environment or filesystem semantics may + dictate other methods of derivation. Similarly, if createattrs + includes neither the group attribute nor a group ACE, and if the + server's filesystem both supports and requires the notion of a + group attribute (or group ACE), the server MUST derive the group + attribute (or the corresponding owner ACE) for the file. This could + be from the RPC call's credentials, such as the group principal if + the credentials include it (such as with AUTH_SYS), from the group + identifier associated with the principal in the credentials (for + e.g., POSIX systems have a passwd database that has the group + identifier for every user identifier), inherited from directory the + object is created in, or whatever else the server's operating + environment or filesystem semantics dictate. This applies to the + OPEN operation too. + + Conversely, it is possible the client will specify in createattrs + an owner attribute or group attribute or ACL that the principal + indicated the RPC call's credentials does not have permissions to + create files for. The error to be returned in this instance is + NFS4ERR_PERM. This applies to the OPEN operation too. + IMPLEMENTATION +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + If the client desires to set attribute values after the create, a SETATTR operation can be added to the COMPOUND request so that the appropriate attributes will be set. - It may be that the server's implementation places special meaning - on the names "." and ".." where they refer to special directories. - If this is the case and the client requests to CREATE a directory - (or other object) with these names, the server may return - NFS4ERR_INVAL. However, if the server does not place special - meaning on these names and a file object already exists with a - matching name, the server may return NFS4ERR_EXIST. - ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME + NFS4ERR_BADOWNER NFS4ERR_BADTYPE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXIST NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.5. Operation 7: DELEGPURGE - Purge Delegations Awaiting Recovery SYNOPSIS clientid -> ARGUMENT struct DELEGPURGE4args { @@ -6008,38 +6880,42 @@ Purges all of the delegations awaiting recovery for a given client. This is useful for clients which do not commit delegation information to stable storage to indicate that conflicting requests need not be delayed by the server awaiting recovery of delegation information. This operation should be used by clients that record delegation information on stable storage on the client. In this case, DELEGPURGE should be issued immediately after doing delegation - recovery on all delegations know to the client. Doing so will + recovery on all delegations known to the client. Doing so will notify the server that no additional delegations for the client will be recovered allowing it to free resources, and avoid delaying other clients who make requests that conflict with the unrecovered delegations. The set of delegations known to the server and the client may be different. The reason for this is that a client may fail after making a request which resulted in delegation but before it received the results and committed them to the client's stable storage. + The server MAY support DELEGPURGE, but if it does not, it MUST NOT + support CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV. + ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADXDR + NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.6. Operation 8: DELEGRETURN - Return Delegation SYNOPSIS (cfh), stateid -> ARGUMENT struct DELEGRETURN4args { @@ -6051,31 +6927,36 @@ struct DELEGRETURN4res { nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION Returns the delegation represented by the current filehandle and stateid. + Delegations may be returned when recalled or voluntarily (i.e. + before the server has recalled them). In either case the client + must properly propagate state changed under the context of the + delegation to the server before returning the delegation. + ERRORS NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.7. Operation 9: GETATTR - Get Attributes SYNOPSIS (cfh), attrbits -> attrbits, attrvals ARGUMENT struct GETATTR4args { @@ -6112,41 +6993,40 @@ value then it must not return the attribute value and must not set the attribute bit in the result bitmap. The server must return an error if it supports an attribute but cannot obtain its value. In that case no attribute values will be returned. All servers must support the mandatory attributes as specified in the section "File Attributes". On success, the current filehandle retains its value. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 IMPLEMENTATION ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.8. Operation 10: GETFH - Get Current Filehandle SYNOPSIS (cfh) -> filehandle ARGUMENT /* CURRENT_FH: */ @@ -6181,29 +7061,28 @@ PUTFH (directory filehandle) LOOKUP (entry name) GETFH ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_MOVED -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.9. Operation 11: LINK - Create Link to a File SYNOPSIS (sfh), (cfh), newname -> (cfh), change_info ARGUMENT struct LINK4args { @@ -6239,21 +7118,21 @@ For the target directory, the server returns change_info4 information in cinfo. With the atomic field of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect to the link creation. If the newname has a length of 0 (zero), or if newname does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 IMPLEMENTATION Changes to any property of the "hard" linked files are reflected in all of the linked files. When a link is made to a file, the attributes for the file should have a value for numlinks that is one greater than the value before the LINK operation. The statement "file and the target directory must reside within the same file system on the server" means that the fsid fields in the @@ -6262,45 +7141,48 @@ some servers, the filenames, "." and "..", are illegal as newname. In the case that newname is already linked to the file represented by the saved filehandle, the server will return NFS4ERR_EXIST. Note that symbolic links are created with the CREATE operation. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXIST NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED + NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_MLINK NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC NFS4ERR_XDEV -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.10. Operation 12: LOCK - Create Lock SYNOPSIS (cfh) locktype, reclaim, offset, length, locker -> stateid ARGUMENT struct open_to_lock_owner4 { @@ -6315,21 +7197,21 @@ seqid4 lock_seqid; }; union locker4 switch (bool new_lock_owner) { case TRUE: open_to_lock_owner4 open_owner; case FALSE: exist_lock_owner4 lock_owner; }; - enum nfs4_lock_type { + enum nfs_lock_type4 { READ_LT = 1, WRITE_LT = 2, READW_LT = 3, /* blocking read */ WRITEW_LT = 4 /* blocking write */ }; struct LOCK4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ nfs_lock_type4 locktype; bool reclaim; @@ -6338,21 +7220,21 @@ locker4 locker; }; RESULT struct LOCK4denied { offset4 offset; length4 length; nfs_lock_type4 locktype; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 lock_owner4 owner; }; struct LOCK4resok { stateid4 lock_stateid; }; union LOCK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: @@ -6360,158 +7242,214 @@ case NFS4ERR_DENIED: LOCK4denied denied; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The LOCK operation requests a record lock for the byte range specified by the offset and length parameters. The lock type is - also specified to be one of the nfs4_lock_types. If this is a + also specified to be one of the nfs_lock_type4s. If this is a reclaim request, the reclaim parameter will be TRUE; Bytes in a file may be locked even if those bytes are not currently allocated to the file. To lock the file from a specific offset through the end-of-file (no matter how long the file actually is) - use a length field with all bits set to 1 (one). To lock the - entire file, use an offset of 0 (zero) and a length with all bits - set to 1. A length of 0 is reserved and should not be used. + use a length field with all bits set to 1 (one). If the length is + zero, or if a length which is not all bits set to one is specified, + and length when added to the offset exceeds the maximum 64-bit + unsigned integer value, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will result. + + Some servers may only support locking for byte offsets that fit + within 32 bits. If the client specifies a range that includes a + byte beyond the last byte offset of the 32-bit range, but does not + include the last byte offset of the 32-bit and all of the byte + offsets beyond it, up to the end of the valid 64-bit range, such a + 32-bit server MUST return the error NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE. In the case that the lock is denied, the owner, offset, and length of a conflicting lock are returned. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of the conflicting lock, the same offset and length that were provided in the arguments should be returned in the denied results. The File Locking section contains a full description of this and the other file locking operations. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + LOCK operations are subject to permission checks and to checks + against the access type of the associated file. However, the + specific right and modes required for various type of locks, + reflect the semantics of the server-exported filesystem, and are + not specified by the protocol. For example, Windows 2000 allows a + write lock of a file open for READ, while a POSIX-compliant system + does not. + + When the client makes a lock request that corresponds to a range + that the lockowner has locked already (with the same or different + lock type), or to a sub-region of such a range, or to a region + which includes multiple locks already granted to that lockowner, in + whole or in part, and the server does not support such locking + operations (i.e. does not support POSIX locking semantics), the + server will return the error NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE. In that case, the + client may return an error, or it may emulate the required + operations, using only LOCK for ranges that do not include any + bytes already locked by that lock_owner and LOCKU of locks held by + that lock_owner (specifying an exactly-matching range and type). + Similarly, when the client makes a lock request that amounts to + upgrading (changing from a read lock to a write lock) or + downgrading (changing from write lock to a read lock) an existing + record lock, and the server does not support such a lock, the + server will return NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP. Such operations may not + perfectly reflect the required semantics in the face of conflicting + lock requests from other clients. + ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_BADXDR + NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_DENIED NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED + NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID + NFS4ERR_OPENMODE + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.11. Operation 13: LOCKT - Test For Lock SYNOPSIS - (cfh) type, owner, offset, length -> {void, NFS4ERR_DENIED -> + (cfh) locktype, offset, length owner -> {void, NFS4ERR_DENIED -> owner} ARGUMENT struct LOCKT4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ nfs_lock_type4 locktype; - nfs_lockowner4 owner; offset4 offset; length4 length; + lock_owner4 owner; }; RESULT struct LOCK4denied { - nfs_lockowner4 owner; offset4 offset; length4 length; nfs_lock_type4 locktype; + lock_owner4 owner; }; union LOCKT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4ERR_DENIED: LOCK4denied denied; case NFS4_OK: void; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The LOCKT operation tests the lock as specified in the arguments. If a conflicting lock exists, the owner, offset, length, and type of the conflicting lock are returned; if no lock is held, nothing - other than NFS4_OK is returned. + other than NFS4_OK is returned. Lock types READ_LT and READW_LT + are processed in the same way in that a conflicting lock test is + done without regard to blocking or non-blocking. The same is true + for WRITE_LT and WRITEW_LT. + + The ranges are specified as for LOCK. The NFS4ERR_INVAL and + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE errors are returned under the same circumstances + as for LOCK. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION If the server is unable to determine the exact offset and length of - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - the conflicting lock, the same offset and length that were provided in the arguments should be returned in the denied results. The File Locking section contains further discussion of the file locking mechanisms. - LOCKT uses nfs_lockowner4 instead of a stateid4, as LOCK does, to - identify the owner so that the client does not have to open the - file to test for the existence of a lock. + LOCKT uses a lock_owner4 rather a stateid4, as is used in LOCK to + identify the owner. This is because the client does not have to + open the file to test for the existence of a lock, so a stateid may + not be available. + + The test for conflicting locks should exclude locks for the current + lockowner. Note that since such locks are not examined the + possible existence of overlapping ranges may not affect the results + of LOCKT. If the server does examine locks that match the + lockowner for the purpose of range checking, NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE may + be returned.. In the event that it returns NFS4_OK, clients may do + a LOCK and receive NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE on the LOCK request because + of the flexibility provided to the server. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_DENIED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.12. Operation 14: LOCKU - Unlock File SYNOPSIS (cfh) type, seqid, stateid, offset, length -> stateid ARGUMENT struct LOCKU4args { @@ -6528,56 +7466,74 @@ union LOCKU4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: stateid4 stateid; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The LOCKU operation unlocks the record lock specified by the - parameters. + parameters. The client may set the locktype field to any value that + is legal for the nfs_lock_type4 enumerated type, and the server + MUST accept any legal value for locktype. Any legal value for + locktype has no effect on the success or failure of the LOCKU + operation. + + The ranges are specified as for LOCK. The NFS4ERR_INVAL and + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE errors are returned under the same circumstances + as for LOCK. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION - The File Locking section contains a full description of this and - the other file locking procedures. + If the area to be unlocked does not correspond exactly to a lock + actually held by the lockowner the server may return the error + NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE. This includes the case in which the area is + not locked, where the area is a sub-range of the area locked, where + it overlaps the area locked without matching exactly or the area + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + specified includes multiple locks held by the lockowner. In all of + these cases, allowed by POSIX locking semantics, a client receiving + this error, should if it desires support for such operations, + simulate the operation using LOCKU on ranges corresponding to locks + it actually holds, possibly followed by LOCK requests for the sub- + ranges not being unlocked. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_ISDIR - NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED + NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.13. Operation 15: LOOKUP - Lookup Filename SYNOPSIS (cfh), component -> (cfh) ARGUMENT struct LOOKUP4args { @@ -6603,88 +7559,90 @@ exist or because the client does not have permission to evaluate the component, then an error will be returned and the current filehandle will be unchanged. If the component is a zero length string or if any component does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. IMPLEMENTATION - If the client wants to acheive the effect of a multi-component + If the client wants to achieve the effect of a multi-component lookup, it may construct a COMPOUND request such as (and obtain each filehandle): -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 PUTFH (directory filehandle) LOOKUP "pub" GETFH LOOKUP "foo" GETFH LOOKUP "bar" GETFH NFS version 4 servers depart from the semantics of previous NFS versions in allowing LOOKUP requests to cross mountpoints on the server. The client can detect a mountpoint crossing by comparing the fsid attribute of the directory with the fsid attribute of the directory looked up. If the fsids are different then the new - directory is a server mountpoint. Unix clients that detect a + directory is a server mountpoint. UNIX clients that detect a mountpoint crossing will need to mount the server's filesystem. This needs to be done to maintain the file object identity checking - mechanisms common to Unix clients. + mechanisms common to UNIX clients. Servers that limit NFS access to "shares" or "exported" filesystems should provide a pseudo-filesystem into which the exported filesystems can be integrated, so that clients can browse the server's name space. The clients view of a pseudo filesystem will be limited to paths that lead to exported filesystems. Note: previous versions of the protocol assigned special semantics to the names "." and "..". NFS version 4 assigns no special semantics to these names. The LOOKUPP operator must be used to lookup a parent directory. - Note that this procedure does not follow symbolic links. The + Note that this operation does not follow symbolic links. The client is responsible for all parsing of filenames including filenames that are modified by symbolic links encountered during the lookup process. If the current file handle supplied is not a directory but a symbolic link, the error NFS4ERR_SYMLINK is returned as the error. For all other non-directory file types, the error NFS4ERR_NOTDIR is returned. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED - NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG - NFS4ERR_NOENT -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG + NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_SYMLINK NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.14. Operation 16: LOOKUPP - Lookup Parent Directory SYNOPSIS (cfh) -> (cfh) ARGUMENT /* CURRENT_FH: object */ @@ -6721,25 +7679,21 @@ NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.15. Operation 17: NVERIFY - Verify Difference in Attributes SYNOPSIS (cfh), fattr -> - ARGUMENT struct NVERIFY4args { @@ -6764,68 +7718,74 @@ IMPLEMENTATION This operation is useful as a cache validation operator. If the object to which the attributes belong has changed then the following operations may obtain new data associated with that object. For instance, to check if a file has been changed and obtain new data if it has: PUTFH (public) - LOOKUP "pub" "foo" "bar" + LOOKUP "foobar" NVERIFY attrbits attrs READ 0 32767 In the case that a recommended attribute is specified in the NVERIFY operation and the server does not support that attribute - for the file system object, the error NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is returned - to the client. + for the filesystem object, the error NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is returned to + the client. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + When the attribute rdattr_error or any write-only attribute (e.g. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + time_modify_set) is specified, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL is returned to + the client. If both of these conditions apply, the server is free to + return either error. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SAME NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.16. Operation 18: OPEN - Open a Regular File SYNOPSIS - (cfh), claim, openhow, owner, seqid, access, deny -> (cfh), - stateid, cinfo, rflags, open_confirm, attrset delegation + (cfh), seqid, share_access, share_deny, owner, openhow, claim -> + (cfh), stateid, cinfo, rflags, open_confirm, attrset delegation ARGUMENT struct OPEN4args { - open_claim4 claim; - openflag4 openhow; - nfs_lockowner4 owner; seqid4 seqid; uint32_t share_access; uint32_t share_deny; + open_owner4 owner; + openflag4 openhow; + open_claim4 claim; }; enum createmode4 { UNCHECKED4 = 0, GUARDED4 = 1, EXCLUSIVE4 = 2 }; union createhow4 switch (createmode4 mode) { case UNCHECKED4: @@ -6847,21 +7807,21 @@ void; }; /* Next definitions used for OPEN delegation */ enum limit_by4 { NFS_LIMIT_SIZE = 1, NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS = 2 /* others as needed */ }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 struct nfs_modified_limit4 { uint32_t num_blocks; uint32_t bytes_per_block; }; union nfs_space_limit4 switch (limit_by4 limitby) { /* limit specified as file size */ case NFS_LIMIT_SIZE: uint64_t filesize; @@ -6902,21 +7862,21 @@ * rather than by name. */ case CLAIM_PREVIOUS: /* CURRENT_FH: file being reclaimed */ open_delegation_type4 delegate_type; /* * Right to file based on a delegation granted by the server. * File is specified by name. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 */ case CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR: /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ open_claim_delegate_cur4 delegate_cur_info; /* Right to file based on a delegation granted to a previous boot * instance of the client. File is specified by name. */ case CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV: @@ -6955,27 +7915,26 @@ open. */ }; union open_delegation4 switch (open_delegation_type4 delegation_type) { case OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE: void; case OPEN_DELEGATE_READ: open_read_delegation4 read; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 case OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE: open_write_delegation4 write; }; - const OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK = 0x00000001; const OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM= 0x00000002; const OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX = 0x00000004; struct OPEN4resok { stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for open */ change_info4 cinfo; /* Directory Change Info */ uint32_t rflags; /* Result flags */ bitmap4 attrset; /* attributes on create */ open_delegation4 delegation; /* Info on any open delegation */ @@ -7006,30 +7965,36 @@ same file. DESCRIPTION The OPEN operation creates and/or opens a regular file in a directory with the provided name. If the file does not exist at the server and creation is desired, specification of the method of creation is provided by the openhow parameter. The client has the choice of three creation methods: UNCHECKED, GUARDED, or EXCLUSIVE. - UNCHECKED means that the file should be created if a file of that + If the current filehandle is a named attribute directory, OPEN will + then create or open a named attribute file. Note that exclusive -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + create of a named attribute is not supported. If the createmode is + EXCLUSIVE4 and the current filehandle is a named attribute + directory, the server will return EINVAL. + + UNCHECKED means that the file should be created if a file of that name does not exist and encountering an existing regular file of that name is not an error. For this type of create, createattrs specifies the initial set of attributes for the file. The set of attributes may include any writable attribute valid for regular files. When an UNCHECKED create encounters an existing file, the - attributes specified by createattrs is not used, except that when + attributes specified by createattrs are not used, except that when an size of zero is specified, the existing file is truncated. If GUARDED is specified, the server checks for the presence of a duplicate object by name before performing the create. If a duplicate exists, an error of NFS4ERR_EXIST is returned as the status. If the object does not exist, the request is performed as described for UNCHECKED. For each of these cases (UNCHECKED and GUARDED) where the operation is successful, the server will return to the client an attribute mask signifying which attributes were successfully set for the object. @@ -7050,145 +8015,166 @@ For the target directory, the server returns change_info4 information in cinfo. With the atomic field of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect to the link creation. Upon successful creation, the current filehandle is replaced by that of the new object. - The OPEN procedure provides for DOS SHARE capability with the use - of the access and deny fields of the OPEN arguments. The client - specifies at OPEN the required access and deny modes. For clients - that do not directly support SHAREs (i.e. Unix), the expected deny - value is DENY_NONE. In the case that there is a existing SHARE - reservation that conflicts with the OPEN request, the server - returns the error NFS4ERR_DENIED. For a complete SHARE request, - the client must provide values for the owner and seqid fields for - the OPEN argument. For additional discussion of SHARE semantics - see the section on 'Share Reservations'. + The OPEN operation provides for Windows share reservation + capability with the use of the access and deny fields of the OPEN + arguments. The client specifies at OPEN the required access and + deny modes. For clients that do not directly support SHAREs (i.e. + UNIX), the expected deny value is DENY_NONE. In the case that + there is a existing SHARE reservation that conflicts with the OPEN + request, the server returns the error NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED. For a - In the case that the client is recovering state from a server +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + complete SHARE request, the client must provide values for the + owner and seqid fields for the OPEN argument. For additional + discussion of SHARE semantics see the section on 'Share + Reservations'. - failure, the reclaim field of the OPEN argument is used to signify + In the case that the client is recovering state from a server + failure, the claim field of the OPEN argument is used to signify that the request is meant to reclaim state previously held. The "claim" field of the OPEN argument is used to specify the file to be opened and the state information which the client claims to possess. There are four basic claim types which cover the various situations for an OPEN. They are as follows: CLAIM_NULL For the client, this is a new OPEN request and there is no previous state associate with the file for the client. CLAIM_PREVIOUS The client is claiming basic OPEN state for a file that was held previous to a server reboot. Generally used when a - server is returning persistent file - handles; the client may not have the + server is returning persistent + filehandles; the client may not have the file name to reclaim the OPEN. CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR The client is claiming a delegation for OPEN as granted by the server. Generally this is done as part of recalling a delegation. CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV The client is claiming a delegation granted to a previous client instance; - used after the client reboots. + used after the client reboots. The + server MAY support CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV. + If it does support CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV, + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM MUST NOT remove the + client's delegation state, and the + server MUST support the DELEGEPURGE + operation. For OPEN requests whose claim type is other than CLAIM_PREVIOUS (i.e. requests other than those devoted to reclaiming opens after a server reboot) that reach the server during its grace or lease expiration period, the server returns an error of NFS4ERR_GRACE. For any OPEN request, the server may return an open delegation, which allows further opens and closes to be handled locally on the client as described in the section Open Delegation. Note that delegation is up to the server to decide. The client should never assume that delegation will or will not be granted in a particular instance. It should always be prepared for either case. A partial + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + exception is the reclaim (CLAIM_PREVIOUS) case, in which a delegation type is claimed. In this case, delegation will always be granted, although the server may specify an immediate recall in the delegation structure. The rflags returned by a successful OPEN allow the server to return information governing how the open file is to be handled. - OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK indicates to the caller that mandatory locking - is in effect for this file and the client should act appropriately - with regard to data cached on the client. OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM - indicates that the client MUST execute an OPEN_CONFIRM operation - before using the open file. OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX indicates - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - the server's file locking behavior is Posix like with respect to - lock range coalescing. From this the client can choose to manage - file locking state in a way to handle a mis-match of file locking - management. + OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM indicates that the client MUST execute an + OPEN_CONFIRM operation before using the open file. + OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX indicates the server's file locking + behavior is Posix like with respect to lock range coalescing. From + this the client can choose to manage file locking state in a way to + handle a mis-match of file locking management. - If the component is of zero length or if the component does not - obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be - returned. + If the component is of zero length, NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. + The component is also subject to the normal UTF-8, character + support, and name checks. See the section "UTF-8 Related Errors" + for further discussion. When an OPEN is done and the specified lockowner already has the resulting filehandle open, the result is to "OR" together the new share and deny status together with the existing status. In this case, only a single CLOSE need be done, even though multiple OPEN's - were completed. + were completed. When such an OPEN is done, checking of share + reservations for the new OPEN proceeds normally, with no exception + for the existing OPEN held by the same lockowner. If the underlying filesystem at the server is only accessible in a read-only mode and the OPEN request has specified ACCESS_WRITE or ACCESS_BOTH, the server will return NFS4ERR_ROFS to indicate a read-only filesystem. + As with the CREATE operation, the server MUST derive the owner, + owner ACE, group, or group ACE if any of the four attributes are + required and supported by the server's filesystem. For an OPEN + with the EXCLUSIVE4 createmode, the server has no choice, since + such OPEN calls do not include the createattrs field. Conversely, + if createattrs is specified, and includes owner or group (or + corresponding ACEs) that the principal in the RPC call's + credentials does not have authorization to create files for, then + the server may return NFS4ERR_PERM. + + In the case of a OPEN which specifies a size of zero (e.g. + truncation) and the file has named attributes, the named attributes + are left as is. They are not removed. + IMPLEMENTATION - The OPEN procedure contains support for EXCLUSIVE create. The + The OPEN operation contains support for EXCLUSIVE create. The mechanism is similar to the support in NFS version 3 [RFC1813]. As in NFS version 3, this mechanism provides reliable exclusive + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + creation. Exclusive create is invoked when the how parameter is EXCLUSIVE. In this case, the client provides a verifier that can reasonably be expected to be unique. A combination of a client identifier, perhaps the client network address, and a unique number generated by the client, perhaps the RPC transaction identifier, may be appropriate. If the object does not exist, the server creates the object and stores the verifier in stable storage. For file systems that do not provide a mechanism for the storage of arbitrary file attributes, the server may use one or more elements of the object meta-data to store the verifier. The verifier must be stored in stable storage to prevent erroneous failure on retransmission of the request. It is assumed that an exclusive create is being performed because exclusive semantics are critical to the application. Because of the expected usage, exclusive CREATE does not rely solely on the normally volatile duplicate request cache for storage of the verifier. The duplicate request cache in volatile storage does not survive a crash and may actually flush on a long network partition, - opening failure windows. In the UNIX local file system - environment, the expected storage location for the verifier on - creation is the meta-data (time stamps) of the object. For this - reason, an exclusive object create may not include initial - attributes because the server would have nowhere to store the - verifier. - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + opening failure windows. In the UNIX local filesystem environment, + the expected storage location for the verifier on creation is the + meta-data (time stamps) of the object. For this reason, an + exclusive object create may not include initial attributes because + the server would have nowhere to store the verifier. If the server can not support these exclusive create semantics, possibly because of the requirement to commit the verifier to stable storage, it should fail the OPEN request with the error, NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP. During an exclusive CREATE request, if the object already exists, the server reconstructs the object's verifier and compares it with the verifier in the request. If they match, the server treats the request as a success. The request is presumed to be a duplicate of @@ -7201,75 +8187,98 @@ must issue a SETATTR to set the correct object attributes. Until it does so, it should not rely upon any of the object attributes, since the server implementation may need to overload object meta- data to store the verifier. The subsequent SETATTR must not occur in the same COMPOUND request as the OPEN. This separation will guarantee that the exclusive create mechanism will continue to function properly in the face of retransmission of the request. Use of the GUARDED attribute does not provide exactly-once semantics. In particular, if a reply is lost and the server does - not detect the retransmission of the request, the procedure can + not detect the retransmission of the request, the operation can fail with NFS4ERR_EXIST, even though the create was performed + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + successfully. The client would use this behavior in the case that the application has not requested an exclusive create but has asked to have the file truncated when the file is opened. In the case of the client timing out and retransmitting the create request, the client can use GUARDED to prevent against a sequence like: create, write, create (retransmitted) from occurring. For SHARE reservations, the client must specify a value for access that is one of READ, WRITE, or BOTH. For deny, the client must specify one of NONE, READ, WRITE, or BOTH. If the client fails to do this, the server must return NFS4ERR_INVAL. + Based on the access value (READ, WRITE, or BOTH) the client should + check that the requestor has the proper access rights to perform + the specified operation. This would generally be the results of + applying the ACL access rules to the file for the current + requestor. However, just as with the ACCESS operation, the client + should not attempt to second-guess the server's decisions, as + access rights may change and may be subject to server + administrative controls outside the ACL framework. If the + requestor is not authorized to READ or WRITE (depending on the + access value), the server must return NFS4ERR_ACCESS. Note that + since the NFS version 4 protocol does not impose any requirement + that READ's and WRITE's issued for an open file have the same + credentials as the OPEN itself, the server still must do + appropriate access checking on the READ's and WRITE's themselves. + If the component provided to OPEN is a symbolic link, the error NFS4ERR_SYMLINK will be returned to the client. If the current filehandle is not a directory, the error NFS4ERR_NOTDIR will be returned. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR + NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME + NFS4ERR_BADOWNER NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXIST NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG - NFS4ERR_NOENT* + NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE - NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID NFS4ERR_SYMLINK + NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.17. Operation 19: OPENATTR - Open Named Attribute Directory SYNOPSIS (cfh) createdir -> (cfh) ARGUMENT struct OPENATTR4args { @@ -7283,21 +8292,21 @@ /* CURRENT_FH: named attr directory*/ nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION The OPENATTR operation is used to obtain the filehandle of the named attribute directory associated with the current filehandle. The result of the OPENATTR will be a filehandle to an object of type NF4ATTRDIR. From this filehandle, READDIR and LOOKUP - procedures can be used to obtain filehandles for the various named + operations can be used to obtain filehandles for the various named attributes associated with the original file system object. Filehandles returned within the named attribute directory will have a type of NF4NAMEDATTR. The createdir argument allows the client to signify if a named attribute directory should be created as a result of the OPENATTR operation. Some clients may use the OPENATTR operation with a value of FALSE for createdir to determine if any named attributes exist for the object. If none exist, then NFS4ERR_NOENT will be returned. If createdir has a value of TRUE and no named attribute @@ -7305,43 +8314,43 @@ attribute directory assumes that the server has implemented named attribute support in this fashion and is not required to do so by this definition. IMPLEMENTATION If the server does not support named attributes for the current filehandle, an error of NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP will be returned to the client. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY - NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE + NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.18. Operation 20: OPEN_CONFIRM - Confirm Open SYNOPSIS (cfh), seqid, stateid-> stateid ARGUMENT struct OPEN_CONFIRM4args { @@ -7359,116 +8368,118 @@ union OPEN_CONFIRM4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: OPEN_CONFIRM4resok resok4; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION This operation is used to confirm the sequence id usage for the - first time that a nfs_lockowner is used by a client. The stateid + first time that a open_owner is used by a client. The stateid returned from the OPEN operation is used as the argument for this - operation along with the next sequence id for the nfs_lockowner. - The sequence id passed to the OPEN_CONFIRM must be 1 (one) greater - than the seqid passed to the OPEN operation from which the - open_confirm value was obtained. If the server receives an - unexpected sequence id with respect to the original open, then the - server assumes that the client will not confirm the original OPEN - and all state associated with the original OPEN is released by the - server. + operation along with the next sequence id for the open_owner. The + sequence id passed to the OPEN_CONFIRM must be 1 (one) greater than + the seqid passed to the OPEN operation from which the open_confirm + value was obtained. If the server receives an unexpected sequence + id with respect to the original open, then the server assumes that + the client will not confirm the original OPEN and all state + associated with the original OPEN is released by the server. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION - A given client might generate many nfs_lockowner data structures - for a given clientid. The client will periodically either dispose - of its nfs_lockowners or stop using them for indefinite periods of + A given client might generate many open_owner4 data structures for + a given clientid. The client will periodically either dispose of + its open_owner4s or stop using them for indefinite periods of time. + The latter situation is why the NFS version 4 protocol does not -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - time. The latter situation is why the NFS version 4 protocol does - not have a an explicit operation to exit an nfs_lockowner: such an + have an explicit operation to exit an open_owner4: such an operation is of no use in that situation. Instead, to avoid unbounded memory use, the server needs to implement a strategy for - disposing of nfs_lockowners that have no current lock, open, or + disposing of open_owner4s that have no current lock, open, or delegation state for any files and have not been used recently. - The time period used to determine when to dispose of nfs_lockowners + The time period used to determine when to dispose of open_owner4s is an implementation choice. The time period should certainly be no less than the lease time plus any grace period the server wishes to implement beyond a lease time. The OPEN_CONFIRM operation - allows the server to safely dispose of unused nfs_lockowner data + allows the server to safely dispose of unused open_owner4 data structures. In the case that a client issues an OPEN operation and the server - no longer has a record of the nfs_lockowner, the server needs - ensure that this is a new OPEN and not a replay or retransmission. + no longer has a record of the open_owner4, the server needs ensure + that this is a new OPEN and not a replay or retransmission. - A lazy server implementation might require confirmation for every - nfs_lockowner for which it has no record. However, this is not - necessary until the server records the fact that it has disposed of - one nfs_lockowner for the given clientid. + Servers must not require confirmation on OPEN's that grant + delegations or are doing reclaim operations. See section "Use of + Open Confirmation" for details. The server can easily avoid this + by noting whether it has disposed of one open_owner4 for the given + clientid. If the server does not support delegation, it might + simply maintain a single bit that notes whether any open_owner4 + (for any client) has been disposed of. The server must hold unconfirmed OPEN state until one of three events occur. First, the client sends an OPEN_CONFIRM request with the appropriate sequence id and stateid within the lease period. In this case, the OPEN state on the server goes to confirmed, and - the nfs_lockowner on the server is fully established. + the open_owner4 on the server is fully established. Second, the client sends another OPEN request with a sequence id - that is incorrect for the nfs_lockowner (out of sequence). In this + that is incorrect for the open_owner4 (out of sequence). In this case, the server assumes the second OPEN request is valid and the first one is a replay. The server cancels the OPEN state of the first OPEN request, establishes an unconfirmed OPEN state for the second OPEN request, and responds to the second OPEN request with an indication that an OPEN_CONFIRM is needed. The process then repeats itself. While there is a potential for a denial of service attack on the client, it is mitigated if the client and server require the use of a security flavor based on Kerberos V5, LIPKEY, or some other flavor that uses cryptography. What if the server is in the unconfirmed OPEN state for a given - nfs_lockowner, and it receives an operation on the nfs_lockowner - that has a stateid but the operation is not OPEN, or it is - OPEN_CONFIRM but with the wrong stateid? Then, even if the seqid - is correct, the server returns NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID, because the - server assumes the operation is a replay: if the server has no - established OPEN state, then there is no way, for example, a LOCK - operation could be valid. + open_owner4, and it receives an operation on the open_owner4 that + has a stateid but the operation is not OPEN, or it is OPEN_CONFIRM + but with the wrong stateid? Then, even if the seqid is correct, + the server returns NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID, because the server assumes + the operation is a replay: if the server has no established OPEN + state, then there is no way, for example, a LOCK operation could be + valid. Third, neither of the two aforementioned events occur for the - nfs_lockowner within the lease period. In this case, the OPEN - state is cancelled and disposal of the nfs_lockowner can occur. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + open_owner4 within the lease period. In this case, the OPEN state + is cancelled and disposal of the open_owner4 can occur. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_ISDIR NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.19. Operation 21: OPEN_DOWNGRADE - Reduce Open File Access SYNOPSIS (cfh), stateid, seqid, access, deny -> stateid ARGUMENT struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args { @@ -7485,57 +8496,61 @@ stateid4 stateid; }; union OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res switch(nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok resok4; default: void; }; - This operation is used to adjust the access and deny bits for a given - open. This is necessary when a given lockowner opens the same file - multiple times with different access and deny flags. In this - situation, a close of one of the open's may change the appropriate - access and deny flags to remove bits associated with open's no longer - in effect. + DESCRIPTION + + This operation is used to adjust the access and deny bits for a + given open. This is necessary when a given lockowner opens the + same file multiple times with different access and deny flags. In + this situation, a close of one of the open's may change the + appropriate access and deny flags to remove bits associated with + open's no longer in effect. The access and deny bits specified in this operation replace the - current ones for the specified open file. If either the access or - the deny mode specified includes bits not in effect for the open, the - error NFS4ERR_INVAL should be returned. Since access and deny bits - are subsets of those already granted, it is not possible for this - request to be denied because of conflicting share reservations. + current ones for the specified open file. The access and deny bits + specified must be exactly equal to the union of the access and deny + bits specified for some subset of the OPEN's in effect for current + openowner on the current file. If that constraint is not + respected, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL should be returned. Since + access and deny bits are subsets of those already granted, it is + not possible for this request to be denied because of conflicting + share reservations. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.20. Operation 22: PUTFH - Set Current Filehandle SYNOPSIS filehandle -> (cfh) ARGUMENT struct PUTFH4args { @@ -7547,37 +8562,41 @@ struct PUTFH4res { /* CURRENT_FH: */ nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION Replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle provided as an argument. + If the security mechanism used by the requestor does not meet the + requirements of the filehandle provided to this operation, the + server MUST return NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC. + IMPLEMENTATION Commonly used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the context for following operations. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.21. Operation 23: PUTPUBFH - Set Public Filehandle SYNOPSIS - -> (cfh) ARGUMENT void; @@ -7589,73 +8608,73 @@ nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION Replaces the current filehandle with the filehandle that represents the public filehandle of the server's name space. This filehandle may be different from the "root" filehandle which may be associated with some other directory on the server. - The public filehandle represents the concepts embodied in RFC 2054, - RFC 2055, RFC 2224. The intent for NFS version 4 is that the - public filehandle (represented by the PUTPUBFH operation) be used - as a method of providing WebNFS server compatibility with NFS - versions 2 and 3. + The public filehandle represents the concepts embodied in + [RFC2054], [RFC2055], [RFC2224]. The intent for NFS version 4 is + that the public filehandle (represented by the PUTPUBFH operation) + be used as a method of providing WebNFS server compatibility with + NFS versions 2 and 3. The public filehandle and the root filehandle (represented by the PUTROOTFH operation) should be equivalent. If the public and root filehandles are not equivalent, then the public filehandle MUST be a descendant of the root filehandle. IMPLEMENTATION Used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the context for following operations. With the NFS version 2 and 3 public filehandle, the client is able to specify whether the path name provided in the LOOKUP should be evaluated as either an absolute path relative to the server's root - or relative to the public filehandle. RFC 2224 contains further - discussion of the functionality. With NFSv4, that type of + or relative to the public filehandle. [RFC2224] contains further + discussion of the functionality. With NFS version 4, that type of specification is not directly available in the LOOKUP operation. The reason for this is because the component separators needed to specify absolute vs. relative are not allowed in NFS version 4. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Therefore, the client is responsible for constructing its request such that the use of either PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH are used to signify absolute or relative evaluation of an NFS URL respectively. - Note that there are warnings mentioned in RFC 2224 with respect to + Note that there are warnings mentioned in [RFC2224] with respect to the use of absolute evaluation and the restrictions the server may place on that evaluation with respect to how much of its namespace has been made available. These same warnings apply to NFS version 4. It is likely, therefore that because of server implementation details, an NFS version 3 absolute public filehandle lookup may behave differently than an NFS version 4 absolute resolution. - There is a form of security negotiation as described in RFC 2755 + There is a form of security negotiation as described in [RFC2755] that uses the public filehandle a method of employing SNEGO. This method is not available with NFS version 4 as filehandles are not overloaded with special meaning and therefore do not provide the same framework as NFS versions 2 and 3. Clients should therefore use the security negotiation mechanisms described in this RFC. ERRORS NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.22. Operation 24: PUTROOTFH - Set Root Filehandle SYNOPSIS - -> (cfh) ARGUMENT void; @@ -7679,21 +8698,21 @@ Commonly used as the first operator in an NFS request to set the context for following operations. ERRORS NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.23. Operation 25: READ - Read from File SYNOPSIS (cfh), stateid, offset, count -> eof, data ARGUMENT struct READ4args { @@ -7731,89 +8750,98 @@ checking. If the client specifies a count value of 0 (zero), the READ succeeds and returns 0 (zero) bytes of data again subject to access permissions checking. The server may choose to return fewer bytes than specified by the client. The client needs to check for this condition and handle the condition appropriately. The stateid value for a READ request represents a value returned -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - from a previous record lock or share reservation request. Used by - the server to verify that the associated lock is still valid and to - update lease timeouts for the client. + from a previous record lock or share reservation request. The + stateid is used by the server to verify that the associated share + reservation and any record locks are still valid and to update + lease timeouts for the client. If the read ended at the end-of-file (formally, in a correctly formed READ request, if offset + count is equal to the size of the file), or the read request extends beyond the size of the file (if offset + count is greater than the size of the file), eof is returned as TRUE; otherwise it is FALSE. A successful READ of an empty file will always return eof as TRUE. If the current filehandle is not a regular file, an error will be returned to the client. In the case the current filehandle represents a directory, NFS4ERR_ISDIR is return; otherwise, NFS4ERR_INVAL is returned. + For a READ with a stateid value of all bits 0, the server MAY allow + the READ to be serviced subject to mandatory file locks or the + current share deny modes for the file. For a READ with a stateid + value of all bits 1, the server MAY allow READ operations to bypass + locking checks at the server. + On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION It is possible for the server to return fewer than count bytes of data. If the server returns less than the count requested and eof - set to FALSE, the client should issue another READ to get the + is set to FALSE, the client should issue another READ to get the remaining data. A server may return less data than requested under several circumstances. The file may have been truncated by another client or perhaps on the server itself, changing the file size from what the requesting client believes to be the case. This would reduce the actual amount of data available to the client. It is possible that the server may back off the transfer size and reduce the read request return. Server resource exhaustion may also occur necessitating a smaller read return. - If the file is locked the server will return an NFS4ERR_LOCKED - error. Since the lock may be of short duration, the client may - choose to retransmit the READ request (with exponential backoff) - until the operation succeeds. + If mandatory file locking is on for the file, and if the region + corresponding to the data to be read from file is write locked by + an owner not associated the stateid, server will return an + NFS4ERR_LOCKED error. The client should try to get appropriate + read record lock via the LOCK operation before re-attempting the + READ. When the READ completes, the client should release the record + lock via LOCKU. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_ISDIR - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED NFS4ERR_LOCKED NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NXIO NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_OPENMODE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.24. Operation 26: READDIR - Read Directory SYNOPSIS (cfh), cookie, cookieverf, dircount, maxcount, attr_request -> cookieverf { cookie, name, attrs } ARGUMENT struct READDIR4args { @@ -7850,90 +8878,93 @@ default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The READDIR operation retrieves a variable number of entries from a file system directory and returns client requested attributes for each entry along with information to allow the client to request -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 additional directory entries in a subsequent READDIR. The arguments contain a cookie value that represents where the READDIR should start within the directory. A value of 0 (zero) for the cookie is used to start reading at the beginning of the directory. For subsequent READDIR requests, the client specifies a cookie value that is provided by the server on a previous READDIR request. The cookieverf value should be set to 0 (zero) when the cookie value is 0 (zero) (first directory read). On subsequent requests, it should be a cookieverf as returned by the server. The cookieverf must match that returned by the READDIR in which the - cookie was acquired. + cookie was acquired. If the server determines that the cookieverf + is no longer valid for the directory, the error NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME + must be returned. The dircount portion of the argument is a hint of the maximum number of bytes of directory information that should be returned. This value represents the length of the names of the directory entries and the cookie value for these entries. This length represents the XDR encoding of the data (names and cookies) and not - the length in the native format of the server. The server may - return less data. + the length in the native format of the server. The maxcount value of the argument is the maximum number of bytes for the result. This maximum size represents all of the data being - returned and includes the XDR overhead. The server may return less - data. If the server is unable to return a single directory entry - within the maxcount limit, the error NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC will be - returned to the client. + returned within the READDIR4resok structure and includes the XDR + overhead. The server may return less data. If the server is + unable to return a single directory entry within the maxcount + limit, the error NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC will be returned to the + client. Finally, attrbits represents the list of attributes to be returned for each directory entry supplied by the server. On successful return, the server's response will provide a list of directory entries. Each of these entries contains the name of the directory entry, a cookie value for that entry, and the associated - attributes as requested. + attributes as requested. The "eof" flag has a value of TRUE if + there are no more entries in the directory. The cookie value is only meaningful to the server and is used as a "bookmark" for the directory entry. As mentioned, this cookie is used by the client for subsequent READDIR operations so that it may continue reading a directory. The cookie is similar in concept to a READ offset but should not be interpreted as such by the client. Ideally, the cookie value should not change if the directory is modified since the client may be caching these values. In some cases, the server may encounter an error while obtaining the attributes for a directory entry. Instead of returning an error for the entire READDIR operation, the server can instead + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + return the attribute 'fattr4_rdattr_error'. With this, the server is able to communicate the failure to the client and not fail the entire operation in the instance of what might be a transient - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - failure. Obviously, the client must request the fattr4_rdattr_error attribute for this method to work properly. If the client does not request the attribute, the server has no choice but to return failure for the entire READDIR operation. For some file system environments, the directory entries "." and ".." have special meaning and in other environments, they may not. If the server supports these special entries within a directory, they should not be returned to the client as part of the READDIR response. To enable some client environments, the cookie values of - 0, 1, and 2 are to be considered reserved. Note that the Unix + 0, 1, and 2 are to be considered reserved. Note that the UNIX client will use these values when combining the server's response - and local representations to enable a fully formed Unix directory + and local representations to enable a fully formed UNIX directory presentation to the application. For READDIR arguments, cookie values of 1 and 2 should not be used and for READDIR results cookie values of 0, 1, and 2 should not returned. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION @@ -7955,26 +8986,26 @@ values that may become stale. It should be a rare occurrence that a server is unable to continue properly reading a directory with the provided cookie/cookieverf pair. The server should make every effort to avoid this condition since the application at the client may not be able to properly handle this type of failure. The use of the cookieverf will also protect the client from using READDIR cookie values that may be stale. For example, if the file system has been migrated, the server may or may not be able to use the same cookie values to service READDIR as the previous server + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + used. With the client providing the cookieverf, the server is able to provide the appropriate response to the client. This prevents the case where the server may accept a cookie value but the - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - underlying directory has changed and the response is invalid from the client's context of its previous READDIR. Since some servers will not be returning "." and ".." entries as has been done with previous versions of the NFS protocol, the client that requires these entries be present in READDIR responses must fabricate them. ERRORS @@ -7983,28 +9014,28 @@ NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.25. Operation 27: READLINK - Read Symbolic Link SYNOPSIS (cfh) -> linktext ARGUMENT /* CURRENT_FH: symlink */ @@ -8041,39 +9072,38 @@ name that is not meaningful to the server operating system in a symbolic link. A READLINK operation returns the data to the client for interpretation. If different implementations want to share access to symbolic links, then they must agree on the interpretation of the data in the symbolic link. The READLINK operation is only allowed on objects of type NF4LNK. The server should return the error, NFS4ERR_INVAL, if the object is not of type, NF4LNK. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.26. Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object SYNOPSIS (cfh), filename -> change_info ARGUMENT struct REMOVE4args { @@ -8110,59 +9140,86 @@ If the target has a length of 0 (zero), or if target does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION NFS versions 2 and 3 required a different operator RMDIR for -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - directory removal. NFS version 4 REMOVE can be used to delete any - directory entry independent of its file type. + directory removal and REMOVE for non-directory removal. This + allowed clients to skip checking the file type when being passed a + non-directory delete system call (e.g. unlink() in POSIX) to remove + a directory, as well as the converse (e.g. a rmdir() on a non- + directory) because they knew the server would check the file type. + NFS version 4 REMOVE can be used to delete any directory entry + independent of its file type. The implementor of an NFS version 4 + client's entry points from the unlink() and rmdir() system calls + should first check the file type against the types the system call + is allowed to remove before issuing a REMOVE. Alternatively, the + implementor can produce a COMPOUND call that includes a + LOOKUP/VERIFY sequence to verify the file type before a REMOVE + operation in the same COMPOUND call. The concept of last reference is server specific. However, if the numlinks field in the previous attributes of the object had the value 1, the client should not rely on referring to the object via - a file handle. Likewise, the client should not rely on the - resources (disk space, directory entry, and so on) formerly - associated with the object becoming immediately available. Thus, if - a client needs to be able to continue to access a file after using - REMOVE to remove it, the client should take steps to make sure that - the file will still be accessible. The usual mechanism used is to - RENAME the file from its old name to a new hidden name. + a filehandle. Likewise, the client should not rely on the resources + (disk space, directory entry, and so on) formerly associated with + the object becoming immediately available. Thus, if a client needs + to be able to continue to access a file after using REMOVE to + remove it, the client should take steps to make sure that the file + will still be accessible. The usual mechanism used is to RENAME + the file from its old name to a new hidden name. + + If the server finds that the file is still open when the REMOVE + arrives: + + o The server SHOULD NOT delete the file's directory entry if the file + was opened with OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE or OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH. + + o If the file was not opened with OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE or + OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH, the server SHOULD delete the file's + directory. However, until last CLOSE of the file, the server MAY + continue to allow access to the file via its filehandle. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED + NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG NFS4ERR_NOENT + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.27. Operation 29: RENAME - Rename Directory Entry SYNOPSIS (sfh), oldname, (cfh), newname -> source_change_info, target_change_info ARGUMENT @@ -8194,28 +9251,29 @@ by the SAVEFH operation, to newname in the target directory corresponding to the current filehandle. The operation is required to be atomic to the client. Source and target directories must reside on the same file system on the server. On success, the current filehandle will continue to be the target directory. If the target directory already contains an entry with the name, newname, the source object must be compatible with the target: either both are non-directories or both are directories and the target must be empty. If compatible, the existing target is - removed before the rename occurs. If they are not compatible or if - the target is a directory but not empty, the server will return the - error, NFS4ERR_EXIST. - - If oldname and newname both refer to the same file (they might be + removed before the rename occurs (See the IMPLEMENTATION subsection + of the section "Operation 28: REMOVE - Remove Filesystem Object" + for client and server actions whenever a target is removed). If + they are not compatible or if the target is a directory but not + empty, the server will return the error, NFS4ERR_EXIST. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + If oldname and newname both refer to the same file (they might be hard links of each other), then RENAME should perform no action and return success. For both directories involved in the RENAME, the server returns change_info4 information. With the atomic field of the change_info4 struct, the server will indicate if the before and after change attributes were obtained atomically with respect to the rename. If the oldname refers to a named attribute and the saved and @@ -8228,62 +9286,66 @@ NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. IMPLEMENTATION The RENAME operation must be atomic to the client. The statement "source and target directories must reside on the same file system on the server" means that the fsid fields in the attributes for the directories are the same. If they reside on different file systems, the error, NFS4ERR_XDEV, is returned. - A filehandle may or may not become stale or expire on a rename. - However, server implementors are strongly encouraged to attempt to - keep file handles from becoming stale or expiring in this fashion. + Based on the value of the fh_expire_type attribute for the object, + the filehandle may or may not expire on a RENAME. However, server + implementors are strongly encouraged to attempt to keep filehandles + from expiring in this fashion. - On some servers, the filenames, "." and "..", are illegal as either - oldname or newname. In addition, neither oldname nor newname can - be an alias for the source directory. These servers will return - the error, NFS4ERR_INVAL, in these cases. + On some servers, the file names "." and ".." are illegal as either + oldname or newname, and will result in the error NFS4ERR_BADNAME. + In addition, on many servers the case of oldname or newname being + an alias for the source directory will be checked for. Such + servers will return the error NFS4ERR_INVAL in these cases. If either of the source or target filehandles are not directories, the server will return NFS4ERR_NOTDIR. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXIST NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED + NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC - NFS4ERR_XDEV -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.28. Operation 30: RENEW - Renew a Lease SYNOPSIS clientid -> () ARGUMENT struct RENEW4args { @@ -8295,38 +9357,35 @@ struct RENEW4res { nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION The RENEW operation is used by the client to renew leases which it currently holds at a server. In processing the RENEW request, the server renews all leases associated with the client. The associated leases are determined by the clientid provided via the - SETCLIENTID procedure. + SETCLIENTID operation. IMPLEMENTATION ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED - NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED - NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.29. Operation 31: RESTOREFH - Restore Saved Filehandle SYNOPSIS (sfh) -> (cfh) ARGUMENT /* SAVED_FH: */ @@ -8361,29 +9420,30 @@ GETATTR attrbits (file attributes) RESTOREFH GETATTR attrbits (post-op dir attrs) ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_MOVED -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE + NFS4ERR_RESTOREFH NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.30. Operation 32: SAVEFH - Save Current Filehandle SYNOPSIS (cfh) -> (sfh) ARGUMENT /* CURRENT_FH: */ @@ -8408,40 +9468,39 @@ ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.31. Operation 33: SECINFO - Obtain Available Security SYNOPSIS (cfh), name -> { secinfo } ARGUMENT struct SECINFO4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ component4 name; }; RESULT - enum rpc_gss_svc_t { + enum rpc_gss_svc_t {/* From RFC 2203 */ RPC_GSS_SVC_NONE = 1, RPC_GSS_SVC_INTEGRITY = 2, RPC_GSS_SVC_PRIVACY = 3 }; struct rpcsec_gss_info { sec_oid4 oid; qop4 qop; rpc_gss_svc_t service; }; @@ -8459,80 +9518,141 @@ case NFS4_OK: SECINFO4resok resok4; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION The SECINFO operation is used by the client to obtain a list of valid RPC authentication flavors for a specific directory - filehandle, file name pair. The result will contain an array which + filehandle, file name pair. SECINFO should apply the same access -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - represents the security mechanisms available. The array entries - are represented by the secinfo4 structure. The field 'flavor' will - contain a value of AUTH_NONE, AUTH_SYS (as defined in [RFC1831]), - or RPCSEC_GSS (as defined in [RFC2203]). + methodology used for LOOKUP when evaluating the name. Therefore, + if the requestor does not have the appropriate access to LOOKUP the + name then SECINFO must behave the same way and return + NFS4ERR_ACCESS. + + The result will contain an array which represents the security + mechanisms available, with an order corresponding to server's + preferences, the most preferred being first in the array. The + client is free to pick whatever security mechanism it both desires + and supports, or to pick in the server's preference order the first + one it supports. The array entries are represented by the secinfo4 + structure. The field 'flavor' will contain a value of AUTH_NONE, + AUTH_SYS (as defined in [RFC1831]), or RPCSEC_GSS (as defined in + [RFC2203]). For the flavors AUTH_NONE and AUTH_SYS, no additional security information is returned. For a return value of RPCSEC_GSS, a security triple is returned that contains the mechanism object id - (as defined in [RFC2078]), the quality of protection (as defined in - [RFC2078]) and the service type (as defined in [RFC2203]). It is + (as defined in [RFC2743]), the quality of protection (as defined in + [RFC2743]) and the service type (as defined in [RFC2203]). It is possible for SECINFO to return multiple entries with flavor equal to RPCSEC_GSS with different security triple values. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. If the name has a length of 0 (zero), or if name does not obey the UTF-8 definition, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL will be returned. IMPLEMENTATION The SECINFO operation is expected to be used by the NFS client when the error value of NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC is returned from another NFS operation. This signifies to the client that the server's security policy is different from what the client is currently using. At this point, the client is expected to obtain a list of possible security flavors and choose what best suits its policies. - It is recommended that the client issue the SECINFO call protected - by a security triple that uses either rpc_gss_svc_integrity or - rpc_gss_svc_privacy service. The use of rpc_gss_svc_none would - allow an attacker in the middle to modify the SECINFO results such - that the client might select a weaker algorithm in the set allowed - by server, making the client and/or server vulnerable to further - attacks. + As mentioned, the server's security policies will determine when a + client request receives NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC. The operations which may + receive this error are: LINK, LOOKUP, OPEN, PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, + PUTROOTFH, RESTOREFH, RENAME, and indirectly READDIR. LINK and + RENAME will only receive this error if the security used for the + operation is inappropriate for saved filehandle. With the exception + of READDIR, With the exception of READDIR, these operations + represent the point at which the client can instantiate a + filehandle into the "current filehandle" at the server. The + filehandle is either provided by the client (PUTFH, PUTPUBFH, + PUTROOTFH) or generated as a result of a name to filehandle + translation (LOOKUP and OPEN). RESTOREFH is different because the + filehandle is a result of a previous SAVEFH. Even though the + filehandle, for RESTOREFH, might have previously passed the + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + server's inspection for a security match, the server will check it + again on RESTOREFH to ensure that the security policy has not + changed. + + If the client wants to resolve an error return of NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC, + the following will occur: + + o For LOOKUP and OPEN, the client will use SECINFO with the same + current filehandle and name as provided in the original LOOKUP + or OPEN to enumerate the available security triples. + + o For LINK, PUTFH, RENAME, and RESTOREFH, the client will use + SECINFO and provide the parent directory filehandle and object + name which corresponds to the filehandle originally provided by + the PUTFH RESTOREFH, or for LINK and RENAME, the SAVEFH. + + o For PUTROOTFH and PUTPUBFH, the client will be unable to use + the SECINFO operation since SECINFO requires a current + filehandle and none exist for these two operations. Therefore, + the client must iterate through the security triples available + at the client and reattempt the PUTROOTFH or PUTPUBFH + operation. In the unfortunate event none of the MANDATORY + security triples are supported by the client and server, the + client SHOULD try using others that support integrity. Failing + that, the client can try using AUTH_NONE, but because such + forms lack integrity checks, this puts the client at risk. + Nonetheless, the server SHOULD allow the client to use whatever + security form the client requests and the server supports, + since the risks of doing so are on the client. + + The READDIR operation will not directly return the NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC + error. However, if the READDIR request included a request for + attributes, it is possible that the READDIR request's security + triple does not match that of a directory entry. If this is the + case and the client has requested the rdattr_error attribute, the + server will return the NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC error in rdattr_error for + the entry. + + See the section "Security Considerations" for a discussion on the + recommendations for security flavor used by SECINFO. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADNAME NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_MOVED + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG NFS4ERR_NOENT NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTDIR NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.32. Operation 34: SETATTR - Set Attributes SYNOPSIS (cfh), stateid, attrmask, attr_vals -> attrsset ARGUMENT struct SETATTR4args { @@ -8552,38 +9672,38 @@ The SETATTR operation changes one or more of the attributes of a file system object. The new attributes are specified with a bitmap and the attributes that follow the bitmap in bit order. The stateid argument for SETATTR is used to provide file locking context that is necessary for SETATTR requests that set the size attribute. Since setting the size attribute modifies the file's data, it has the same locking requirements as a corresponding WRITE. Any SETATTR that sets the size attribute is incompatible - with a share lock that specifies DENY_WRITE. The area between the - old end-of-file and the new end-of-file is considered to be - modified just as would have been the case had the area in question - been specified as the target of WRITE, for the purpose of checking - conflicts with record locks, for those cases in which a server is - implementing mandatory record locking behavior. A valid stateid - should always be specified. When the file size attribute is not - set, the special stateid consisting of all bits zero should be - passed. + with a share reservation that specifies DENY_WRITE. The area + between the old end-of-file and the new end-of-file is considered + to be modified just as would have been the case had the area in + question been specified as the target of WRITE, for the purpose of + checking conflicts with record locks, for those cases in which a + server is implementing mandatory record locking behavior. A valid + stateid should always be specified. When the file size attribute + is not set, the special stateid consisting of all bits zero should + be passed. On either success or failure of the operation, the server will return the attrsset bitmask to represent what (if any) attributes were successfully set. The attrsset in the response is a subset of the bitmap4 that is part of the obj_attributes in the argument. On success, the current filehandle retains its value. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 IMPLEMENTATION If the request specifies the owner attribute to be set, the server should allow the operation to succeed if the current owner of the object matches the value specified in the request. Some servers may be implemented in a way as to prohibit the setting of the owner attribute unless the requestor has privilege to do so. If the server is lenient in this one case of matching owner values, the client implementation may be simplified in cases of creation of an @@ -8613,46 +9733,48 @@ specifies SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4, the client has provided an nfstime4 to be used for the operation. If the switch union does not specify SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4, the server is to use its current time for the SETATTR operation. If server and client times differ, programs that compare client time to file times can break. A time maintenance protocol should be used to limit client/server time skew. Use of a COMPOUND containing a VERIFY operation specifying only the - time_metadata attribute, immediately followed by a SETATTR, - provides a means whereby a client may specify a request that - emulates the functionality of the SETATTR guard mechanism of NFS - version 3. Since the function of the guard mechanism is to avoid - changes to the file attributes based on stale information, delays - between checking of the guard condition and the setting of the - attributes have the potential to compromise this function, as would - the corresponding delay in the NFS version 4 emulation. Therefore, - NFS version 4 servers should take care to avoid such delays, to the + change attribute, immediately followed by a SETATTR, provides a + means whereby a client may specify a request that emulates the + functionality of the SETATTR guard mechanism of NFS version 3. + Since the function of the guard mechanism is to avoid changes to + the file attributes based on stale information, delays between + checking of the guard condition and the setting of the attributes + have the potential to compromise this function, as would the + corresponding delay in the NFS version 4 emulation. Therefore, NFS + version 4 servers should take care to avoid such delays, to the degree possible, when executing such a request. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 If the server does not support an attribute as requested by the client, the server should return NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP. A mask of the attibutes actually set is returned by SETATTR in all cases. That mask must not include attributes bits not requested to be set by the client, and must be equal to the mask of attributes requested to be set only if the SETATTR completes without error. ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + NFS4ERR_BADOWNER NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FBIG NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_IO @@ -8663,155 +9785,400 @@ NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_OPENMODE NFS4ERR_PERM NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.33. Operation 35: SETCLIENTID - Negotiate Clientid SYNOPSIS - client, callback -> clientid + client, callback, callback_ident -> clientid, setclientid_confirm ARGUMENT struct SETCLIENTID4args { nfs_client_id4 client; cb_client4 callback; uint32_t callback_ident; }; RESULT struct SETCLIENTID4resok { clientid4 clientid; + verifier4 setclientid_confirm; }; union SETCLIENTID4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: SETCLIENTID4resok resok4; case NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE: clientaddr4 client_using; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION - The SETCLIENTID operation introduces the ability of the client to - notify the server of its intention to use a particular client - identifier and verifier pair. Upon successful completion the - server will return a clientid which is used in subsequent file - locking requests and for a confirmation step. The client will use - the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to return the clientid, as a - verifier, to the server. At that point, the client may use the - clientid in subsequent operations that require an nfs_lockowner. + The client uses SETCLIENTID operation to notify the server of its + intention to use a particular client identifier, callback, and + callback_ident for subsequent requests that entail creating lock, + share reservation, and delegation state on the server. Upon + successful completion the server will return a short hand clientid + which, if confirmed via a separate step, will be used in subsequent + file locking and file open requests. Confirmation of the clientid + must be done via the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to return the + clientid and setclientid_confirm values, as verifiers, to the + server. The reason why two verifiers are necessary is that it is + possible to use SETCLIENTID and SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM to modify the + callback and callback_ident information but not the short hand + clientid. In that event, the setclientid_confirm value is + effectively the only verifier. The callback information provided in this operation will be used if the client is provided an open delegation at a future point. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Therefore, the client must correctly reflect the program and port numbers for the callback program at the time SETCLIENTID is used. The callback_ident value is used by the server on the callback. - The client can use the callback_ident as a method of use a single - callback RPC program number while still being able to determine - which server is initiating the callback. - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + The client can use leverage the callback_ident eliminate the need + for more than one callback RPC program number while still being + able to determine which server is initiating the callback. IMPLEMENTATION - The server takes the verifier and client identification supplied in - the nfs_client_id4 and searches for a match of the client - identification. If no match is found the server saves the - principal/uid information along with the verifier and client - identification and returns a unique clientid that is used as a - shorthand reference to the supplied information. + To understand how to implement SETCLIENTID, make the following + notations. Let: - If the server finds a matching client identification, the server - will only assign a new clientid if the principal/uid matches the - original entry. This is to protect against rogue clients - attempting to release client state indiscriminately at the server. - The principal, or principal to user-identifier mapping is taken - from the credential presented in the RPC. As mentioned, the server - will use the credential and associated principal for the matching - with existing clientids. If the client is a traditional host-based - client like a Unix NFS client, then the credential presented may be - the host credential. If the client is a user level client or - lightweight client, the credential used may be the end user's - credential. The client should take care in choosing an appropriate - credential since denial of service attacks could be attempted by a - rogue client that has access to the credential. + x be the value of the client.id subfield of the SETCLIENTID4args + structure. + + v be the value of the client.verifier subfield of the + SETCLIENTID4args structure. + + c be the value of the clientid field returned in the + SETCLIENTID4resok structure. + + k represent the value combination of the fields callback and + callback_ident fields of the SETCLIENTID4args structure. + + s be the setclientid_confirm value returned in the + SETCLIENTID4resok structure. + + { x, v, c, k, s } + be a quintuple for a client record. A client record is + confirmed if there has been a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to + confirm it. Otherwise it is unconfirmed. An unconfirmed + record is established by a SETCLIENTID call. + + Since SETCLIENTID is a non-idempotent operation, let us assume that + the server is implementing the duplicate request cache (DRC). + + When the server gets a SETCLIENTID { v, x, k } request, it + processes it in the following manner. + + o It first looks up the request in the DRC. If there is a hit, it + returns the result cached in the DRC. The server does NOT remove + client state (locks, shares, delegations) nor does it modify any + recorded callback and callback_ident information for client { x + }. + + For any DRC miss, the server takes the client id string x, and + searches for client records for x that the server may have + recorded from previous SETCLIENTID calls. For any confirmed + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + record with the same id string x, if the recorded principal does + not match that of SETCLIENTID call, then the server returns a + NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE error. + + For brevity of discussion, the remaining description of the + processing assumes that there was a DRC miss, and that where the + server has previously recorded a confirmed record for client x, + the aforementioned principal check has successfully passed. + + o The server checks if it has recorded a confirmed recorded for { + v, x, c, l, s }, where l may or may not equal k. If so, and since + the id verifier v of the request matches that which is confirmed + and recorded, the server treats this as a probable callback + information update and records an unconfirmed { v, x, c, k, t } + and leaves the confirmed { v, x, c, l, s } in place, such that t + != s. It does not matter if k equals l or not. Any pre-existing + unconfirmed { v, x, c, *, * } is removed. + + The server returns { c, t }. It is indeed returning the old + clientid4 value c, because the client apparently only wants to + update callback value k to value l. It's possible this request + is one from the Byzantine router that has stale callback + information, but this is not a problem. The callback information + update is only confirmed if followed up by a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + { c, t }. + + The server awaits confirmation of k via SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM { c, + t }. + + The server does NOT remove client (lock/share/delegation) state + for x. + + o The server has previously recorded a confirmed { u, x, c, l, s } + record such that v != u, l may or may not equal k, and has not + recorded any unconfirmed { *, x, *, *, * } record for x. The + server records an unconfirmed { v, x, d, k, t } (d != c, t != s). + + The server returns { d, t }. + + The server awaits confirmation of { d, k } via + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM { d, t }. + + The server does NOT remove client (lock/share/delegation) state + for x. + + o The server has previously recorded a confirmed { u, x, c, l, s } + record such that v != u, l may or may not equal k, and recorded + an unconfirmed { w, x, d, m, t } record such that c != d, t != s, + m may or may not equal k, m may or may not equal l, and k may or + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + may not equal l. Whether w == v or w != v makes no difference. + The server simply removes the unconfirmed { w, x, d, m, t } + record and replaces it with an unconfirmed { v, x, e, k, r } + record, such that e != d, e != c, r != t, r != s. + + The server returns { e, r }. + + The server awaits confirmation of { e, k } via + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM { e, r }. + + The server does NOT remove client (lock/share/delegation) state + for x. + + o The server has no confirmed { *, x, *, *, * } for x. It may or + may not have recorded an unconfirmed { u, x, c, l, s }, where l + may or may not equal k, and u may or may not equal v. Any + unconfirmed record { u, x, c, l, * }, regardless whether u == v + or l == k, is replaced with an unconfirmed record { v, x, d, k, t + } where d != c, t != s. + + The server returns { d, t }. + + The server awaits confirmation of { d, k } via + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM { d, t }. The server does NOT remove client + (lock/share/delegation) state for x. + + The server generates the clientid and setclientid_confirm values + and must take care to ensure that these values are extremely + unlikely to ever be regenerated. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.34. Operation 36: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM - Confirm Clientid SYNOPSIS - clientid -> - + clientid, verifier -> - ARGUMENT struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args { clientid4 clientid; + verifier4 setclientid_confirm; }; RESULT struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res { nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION This operation is used by the client to confirm the results from a previous call to SETCLIENTID. The client provides the server supplied (from a SETCLIENTID response) clientid. The server responds with a simple status of success or failure. IMPLEMENTATION The client must use the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM operation to confirm - its use of client identifier. If the server is holding state for a - client which has presented a new verifier via SETCLIENTID, then the - state will not be released, as described in the section "Client - Failure and Recovery", until a valid SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM is - received. Upon successful confirmation the server will release the - previous state held on behalf of the client. + the following two distinct cases: + + o The client's use of a new shorthand client identifier (as + returned from the server in the response to SETCLIENTID), a new + callback value (as specified in the arguments to SETCLIENTID) and + a new callback_ident (as specified in the arguments to + SETCLIENTID) value. The client's use of SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM in + this case also confirms the removal of any of the client's + previous relevant leased state. Relevant leased client state + includes record locks, share reservations, and where the server + does not support the CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV claim type, delegations. + If the server supports CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV, then + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM MUST NOT remove delegations for this client; + relevant leased client state would then just include record locks + and share reservations. + + o The client's re-use of an old, previously confirmed, shorthand + client identifier, a new callback value, and a new callback_ident + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + value. The client's use of SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM in this case MUST + NOT result in the removal of any previous leased state (locks, + share reservations, and delegations) + + We use the same notation and definitions for v, x, c, k, s, and + unconfirmed and confirmed client records as introduced in the + description of the SETCLIENTID operation. The arguments to + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM are indicated by the notation { c, s }, where c + is a value of type clientid4, and s is a value of type verifier4 + corresponding to the setclientid_confirm field. + + As with SETCLIENTID, SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM is a nonidempotent + operation, and we assume that the server is implementing the + duplicate request cache (DRC). + + When the server gets a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM { c, s } request, it + processes it in the following manner. + + o It first looks up the request in the DRC. If there is a hit, it + returns the result cached in the DRC. The server does not remove + any relevant leased client state nor does it modify any recorded + callback and callback_ident information for client { x } as + represented by the short hand value c. + + For a DRC miss, the server checks for client records that match the + short hand value c. The processing cases are as follows: + + o The server has recorded an unconfirmed { v, x, c, k, s } record + and a confirmed { v, x, c, l, t } record, such that s != t. If + the principals of the records do not match that of the + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, the server returns NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE, and + no relevant leased client state is removed and no recorded + callback and callback_ident information for client { x } is + changed. Otherwise, the confirmed { v, x, c, l, t } record is + removed and the unconfirmed { v, x, c, k, s } is marked as + confirmed, thereby modifying recorded and confirmed callback and + callback_ident information for client { x }. + + The server does not remove any relevant leased client state. + + The server returns NFS4_OK. + + o The server has not recorded an unconfirmed { v, x, c, *, * } and + has recorded a confirmed { v, x, c, *, s }. If the principals of + the record and of SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM do not match, the server + returns NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE without removing any relevant leased + client state and without changing recorded callback and + callback_ident values for client { x }. + + If the principals match, then what has likely happened is that + the client never got the response from the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, + and the DRC entry has been purged. Whatever the scenario, since + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + the principals match, as well as { c, s } matching a confirmed + record, the server leaves client x's relevant leased client state + intact, leaves its callback and callback_ident values unmodified, + and returns NFS4_OK. + + o The server has not recorded a confirmed { *, *, c, *, * }, and + has recorded an unconfirmed { *, x, c, k, s }. Even if this is a + retry from client, nonetheless the client's first + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM attempt was not received by the server. + Retry or not, the server doesn't know, but it processes it as if + were a first try. If the principal of the unconfirmed { *, x, c, + k, s } record mismatches that of the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM request + the server returns NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE without removing any + relevant leased client state. + + Otherwise, the server records a confirmed { *, x, c, k, s }. If + there is also a confirmed { *, x, d, *, t }, the server MUST + remove the client x's relevant leased client state, and overwrite + the callback state with k. The confirmed record { *, x, d, *, t } + is removed. + + Server returns NFS4_OK. + + o The server has no record of a confirmed or unconfirmed { *, *, c, + *, s }. Return NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID. The server does not + remove any relevant leased client state, nor does it modify any + recorded callback and callback_ident information for any client. + + The server needs to cache unconfirmed { v, x, c, k, s } client + records and await for some time their confirmation. As should be + clear from the record processing discussions for SETCLIENTID and + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM, there are cases where the server does not + deterministically remove unconfirmed client records. To avoid + running out of resources, the server is not required to hold + unconfirmed records indefinitely. One strategy the server might + use is to set a limit on how many unconfirmed client records it + will maintain, and then when the limit would be exceeded, remove + the oldest record. Another strategy might be to remove an + unconfirmed record when some amount of time has elapsed. The choice + of the amount of time is fairly arbitrary but it is surely no + higher than the server's lease time period. Consider that leases + need to be renewed before the lease time expires via an operation + from the client. If the client cannot issue a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM + after a SETCLIENTID before a perod of time equal to that of a lease + expires, then the client is unlikely to be able maintain state on + the server during steady state operation. + + If the client does send a SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM for an unconfirmed + record that the server has already deleted, the client will get + NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID back. If so, the client should then start + over, and send SETCLIENTID to reestablish an unconfirmed client + record and get back an unconfirmed clientid and setclientid_confirm + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + verifier. The client should then send the SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM to + confirm the clientid. + + SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM does not establish or renew a lease. However, + if SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM removes relevant leased client state, and + that state does not include existing delegations, the server MUST + allow the client a period of time no less than the value of + lease_time attribute, to reclaim, (via the CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV + claim tpe of the OPEN operation) its delegations before removing + unreclaimed delegations. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.35. Operation 37: VERIFY - Verify Same Attributes SYNOPSIS (cfh), fattr -> - ARGUMENT struct VERIFY4args { @@ -8849,43 +10216,48 @@ REMOVE (file name) This sequence does not prevent a second client from removing and creating a new file in the middle of this sequence but it does help avoid the unintended result. In the case that a recommended attribute is specified in the VERIFY operation and the server does not support that attribute for the file system object, the error NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP is returned to the -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 client. + When the attribute rdattr_error or any write-only attribute (e.g. + time_modify_set) is specified, the error NFS4ERR_INVAL is returned to + the client. If both of these conditions apply, the server is free to + return either error. + ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED NFS4ERR_INVAL NFS4ERR_MOVED NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.36. Operation 38: WRITE - Write to File SYNOPSIS (cfh), stateid, offset, stable, data -> count, committed, writeverf ARGUMENT enum stable_how4 { @@ -8923,21 +10295,21 @@ target file is specified by the current filehandle. The offset specifies the offset where the data should be written. An offset of 0 (zero) specifies that the write should start at the beginning of the file. The count, as encoded as part of the opaque data parameter, represents the number of bytes of data that are to be written. If the count is 0 (zero), the WRITE will succeed and return a count of 0 (zero) subject to permissions checking. The server may choose to write fewer bytes than requested by the client. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Part of the write request is a specification of how the write is to be performed. The client specifies with the stable parameter the method of how the data is to be processed by the server. If stable is FILE_SYNC4, the server must commit the data written plus all file system metadata to stable storage before returning results. This corresponds to the NFS version 2 protocol semantics. Any other behavior constitutes a protocol violation. If stable is DATA_SYNC4, then the server must commit all of the data to stable storage and enough of the metadata to retrieve the data before @@ -8945,24 +10317,25 @@ in the same fashion as FILE_SYNC4, but with a possible performance drop. If stable is UNSTABLE4, the server is free to commit any part of the data and the metadata to stable storage, including all or none, before returning a reply to the client. There is no guarantee whether or when any uncommitted data will subsequently be committed to stable storage. The only guarantees made by the server are that it will not destroy any data without changing the value of verf and that it will not commit the data and metadata at a level less than that requested by the client. - The stateid returned from a previous record lock or share - reservation request is provided as part of the argument. The - stateid is used by the server to verify that the associated lock is - still valid and to update lease timeouts for the client. + The stateid value for a WRITE request represents a value returned + from a previous record lock or share reservation request. The + stateid is used by the server to verify that the associated share + reservation and any record locks are still valid and to update + lease timeouts for the client. Upon successful completion, the following results are returned. The count result is the number of bytes of data written to the file. The server may write fewer bytes than requested. If so, the actual number of bytes written starting at location, offset, is returned. The server also returns an indication of the level of commitment of the data and metadata via committed. If the server committed all data and metadata to stable storage, committed should be set to @@ -8976,32 +10349,38 @@ FILE_SYNC4, DATA_SYNC4, or UNSTABLE4. The final portion of the result is the write verifier. The write verifier is a cookie that the client can use to determine whether the server has changed instance (boot) state between a call to WRITE and a subsequent call to either WRITE or COMMIT. This cookie must be consistent during a single instance of the NFS version 4 protocol service and must be unique between instances of the NFS version 4 protocol server, where uncommitted data may be lost. - If a client writes data to the server with the stable argument set - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + If a client writes data to the server with the stable argument set to UNSTABLE4 and the reply yields a committed response of DATA_SYNC4 or UNSTABLE4, the client will follow up some time in the future with a COMMIT operation to synchronize outstanding asynchronous data and metadata with the server's stable storage, barring client error. It is possible that due to client crash or other error that a subsequent COMMIT will not be received by the server. + For a WRITE with a stateid value of all bits 0, the server MAY + allow the WRITE to be serviced subject to mandatory file locks or + the current share deny modes for the file. For a WRITE with a + stateid value of all bits 1, the server MUST NOT allow the WRITE + operation to bypass locking checks at the server and are treated + exactly the same as if a stateid of all bits 0 were used. + On success, the current filehandle retains its value. IMPLEMENTATION It is possible for the server to write fewer bytes of data than requested by the client. In this case, the server should not return an error unless no data was written at all. If the server writes less than the number of bytes specified, the client should issue another WRITE to write the remaining data. @@ -9021,49 +10400,76 @@ 3. Repeated software crashes, including reboot cycle. This definition does not address failure of the stable storage module itself. The verifier is defined to allow a client to detect different instances of an NFS version 4 protocol server over which cached, uncommitted data may be lost. In the most likely case, the verifier allows the client to detect server reboots. This information is required so that the client can safely determine whether the server + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + could have lost cached data. If the server fails unexpectedly and the client has uncommitted data from previous WRITE requests (done with the stable argument set to UNSTABLE4 and in which the result committed was returned as UNSTABLE4 as well) it may not have flushed cached data to stable storage. The burden of recovery is on the client and the client will need to retransmit the data to the server. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - A suggested verifier would be to use the time that the server was booted or the time the server was last started (if restarting the server without a reboot results in lost buffers). The committed field in the results allows the client to do more effective caching. If the server is committing all WRITE requests to stable storage, then it should return with committed set to FILE_SYNC4, regardless of the value of the stable field in the arguments. A server that uses an NVRAM accelerator may choose to implement this policy. The client can use this to increase the effectiveness of the cache by discarding cached data that has already been committed on the server. Some implementations may return NFS4ERR_NOSPC instead of NFS4ERR_DQUOT when a user's quota is exceeded. In the case that the current filehandle is a directory, the server will return NFS4ERR_ISDIR. If the current filehandle is not a regular file or a directory, the server will return NFS4ERR_INVAL. + If mandatory file locking is on for the file, and corresponding + record of the to be written file is read or write locked by an + owner that is not associated with the stateid, the server will + return NFS4ERR_LOCKED. If so, the client must check if the owner + corresponding to the stateid used with the WRITE operation has a + conflicting read lock that overlaps with the region that was to be + written. If the stateid's owner has no conflicting read lock, then + the client should try to get the appropriate write record lock via + the LOCK operation before re-attempting the WRITE. When the WRITE + completes, the client should release the record lock via LOCKU. + + If the stateid's owner had a conflicting read lock, then the client + has no choice but to return an error to the application that + attempted the WRITE. The reason is that since the stateid's owner + had a read lock, the server either attempted to temporarily + effectively upgrade this read lock to a write lock, or the server + has no upgrade capability. If the server attempted to upgrade the + read lock and failed, it is pointless for the client to re-attempt + the upgrade via the LOCK operation, because there might be another + client also trying to upgrade. If two clients are blocked trying + upgrade the same lock, the clients deadlock. If the server has no + upgrade capability, then it pointless to try a LOCK operation to + upgrade. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + ERRORS NFS4ERR_ACCESS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_DELAY NFS4ERR_DQUOT NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_FBIG @@ -9078,23 +10484,22 @@ NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE NFS4ERR_NOSPC NFS4ERR_NXIO NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID NFS4ERR_OPENMODE NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_ROFS NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT NFS4ERR_STALE NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID - NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 14.2.37. Operation 39: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER - Release Lockowner State SYNOPSIS lockowner -> () ARGUMENT struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args { @@ -9104,40 +10509,93 @@ RESULT struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res { nfsstat4 status; }; DESCRIPTION This operation is used to notify the server that the lock_owner is no longer in use by the client. This allows the server to release - cached state related to the specified lock_owner. + cached state related to the specified lock_owner. If file locks, + associated with the lock_owner, are held at the server, the error + NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD will be returned and no further action will be + taken. IMPLEMENTATION The client may choose to use this operation to ease the amount of - server state that is cached. + server state that is held. Depending on behavior of applications + at the client, it may be important for the client to use this + operation since the server has certain obligations with respect to + holding a reference to a lock_owner as long as the associated file + is open. Therefore, if the client knows for certain that the + lock_owner will no longer be used under the context of the + associated open_owner4, it should use RELEASE_LOCKOWNER. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_EXPIRED NFS4ERR_GRACE NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED + NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 -15. NFS Version 4 Callback Procedures +14.2.38. Operation 10044: ILLEGAL - Illegal operation + + SYNOPSIS + + + + ARGUMENT + + void; + + RESULT + + struct ILLEGAL4res { + nfsstat4 status; + }; + + DESCRIPTION + + This operation is a placeholder for encoding a result to handle the + case of the client sending an operation code within COMPOUND that + is not supported. See the COMPOUND procedure description for more + details. + + The status field of ILLEGAL4res MUST be set to NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL. + + IMPLEMENTATION + + A client will probably not send an operation with code OP_ILLEGAL + but if it does, the response will be ILLEGAL4res just as it would + be with any other invalid operation code. Note that if the server + gets an illegal operation code that is not OP_ILLEGAL, and if the + server checks for legal operation codes during the XDR decode + phase, then the ILLEGAL4res would not be returned. + + ERRORS + + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +15. NFS version 4 Callback Procedures The procedures used for callbacks are defined in the following sections. In the interest of clarity, the terms "client" and "server" refer to NFS clients and servers, despite the fact that for an individual callback RPC, the sense of these terms would be precisely the opposite. 15.1. Procedure 0: CB_NULL - No Operation SYNOPSIS @@ -9156,38 +10614,40 @@ Standard NULL procedure. Void argument, void response. Even though there is no direct functionality associated with this procedure, the server will use CB_NULL to confirm the existence of a path for RPCs from server to client. ERRORS None. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 15.2. Procedure 1: CB_COMPOUND - Compound Operations SYNOPSIS compoundargs -> compoundres ARGUMENT enum nfs_cb_opnum4 { OP_CB_GETATTR = 3, - OP_CB_RECALL = 4 + OP_CB_RECALL = 4, + OP_CB_ILLEGAL = 10044 }; union nfs_cb_argop4 switch (unsigned argop) { case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4args opcbgetattr; case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4args opcbrecall; + case OP_CB_ILLEGAL: void opcbillegal; }; struct CB_COMPOUND4args { utf8string tag; uint32_t minorversion; uint32_t callback_ident; nfs_cb_argop4 argarray<>; }; RESULT @@ -9205,64 +10665,65 @@ DESCRIPTION The CB_COMPOUND procedure is used to combine one or more of the callback procedures into a single RPC request. The main callback RPC program has two main procedures: CB_NULL and CB_COMPOUND. All other operations use the CB_COMPOUND procedure as a wrapper. In the processing of the CB_COMPOUND procedure, the client may find that it does not have the available resources to execute any or all - of the operations within the CB_COMPOUND sequence. In this case, - the error NFS4ERR_RESOURCE will be returned for the particular -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + of the operations within the CB_COMPOUND sequence. In this case, + the error NFS4ERR_RESOURCE will be returned for the particular operation within the CB_COMPOUND procedure where the resource exhaustion occurred. This assumes that all previous operations within the CB_COMPOUND sequence have been evaluated successfully. Contained within the CB_COMPOUND results is a 'status' field. This status must be equivalent to the status of the last operation that was executed within the CB_COMPOUND procedure. Therefore, if an operation incurred an error then the 'status' value will be the same error value as is being returned for the operation that failed. - The definition of the "tag" in the request is left to the - implementor. It may be used to summarize the content of the - callback compound request for the benefit of packet sniffers and - engineers debugging implementations. However, the value of "tag" - in the response MUST be the same value as provided in the request. + For the definition of the "tag" field, see the section "Procedure + 1: COMPOUND - Compound Operatoins". The value of callback_ident is supplied by the client during SETCLIENTID. The server must use the client supplied callback_ident during the CB_COMPOUND to allow the client to properly identify the server. + Illegal operation codes are handled in the same way as they are + handled for the COMPOUND procedure. + IMPLEMENTATION The CB_COMPOUND procedure is used to combine individual operations into a single RPC request. The client interprets each of the operations in turn. If an operation is executed by the client and the status of that operation is NFS4_OK, then the next operation in the CB_COMPOUND procedure is executed. The client continues this process until there are no more operations to be executed or one of the operations has a status value other than NFS4_OK. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL NFS4ERR_RESOURCE -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 15.2.1. Operation 3: CB_GETATTR - Get Attributes SYNOPSIS fh, attrbits -> attrbits, attrvals ARGUMENT struct CB_GETATTR4args { @@ -9278,40 +10739,46 @@ union CB_GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: CB_GETATTR4resok resok4; default: void; }; DESCRIPTION - The CB_GETATTR operation is used to obtain the attributes modified - by an open delegate to allow the server to respond to GETATTR - requests for a file which is the subject of an open delegation. + The CB_GETATTR operation is used by the server to obtain the + current modified state of a file that has been write delegated. + The attributes size and change are the only ones guaranteed to be + serviced by the client. See the section "Handling of CB_GETATTR" + for a full description of how the client and server are to interact + with the use of CB_GETATTR. - If the handle specified is not one for which the client holds a + If the filehandle specified is not one for which the client holds a write open delegation, an NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE error is returned. IMPLEMENTATION The client returns attrbits and the associated attribute values only for attributes that it may change (change, time_modify, size). ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 15.2.2. Operation 4: CB_RECALL - Recall an Open Delegation SYNOPSIS stateid, truncate, fh -> status ARGUMENT struct CB_RECALL4args { @@ -9339,77 +10806,165 @@ If the handle specified is not one for which the client holds an open delegation, an NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE error is returned. If the stateid specified is not one corresponding to an open delegation for the file specified by the filehandle, an NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID is returned. IMPLEMENTATION The client should reply to the callback immediately. Replying does - not complete the recall. The recall is not complete until the - delegation is returned using a DELEGRETURN. + not complete the recall except when an error was returned. The + recall is not complete until the delegation is returned using a + DELEGRETURN. ERRORS NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE - NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID NFS4ERR_BADXDR NFS4ERR_RESOURCE NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + +15.2.3. Operation 10044: CB_ILLEGAL - Illegal Callback Operation + + SYNOPSIS + + + + ARGUMENT + + void; + + RESULT + + struct CB_ILLEGAL4res { + nfsstat4 status; + }; + + DESCRIPTION + + This operation is a placeholder for encoding a result to handle the + case of the client sending an operation code within COMPOUND that + is not supported. See the COMPOUND procedure description for more + details. + + The status field of CB_ILLEGAL4res MUST be set to + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL. + + IMPLEMENTATION + + A server will probably not send an operation with code + OP_CB_ILLEGAL but if it does, the response will be CB_ILLEGAL4res + just as it would be with any other invalid operation code. Note + that if the client gets an illegal operation code that is not + OP_ILLEGAL, and if the client checks for legal operation codes + during the XDR decode phase, then the CB_ILLEGAL4res would not be + returned. + + ERRORS + + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 16. Security Considerations The major security feature to consider is the authentication of the user making the request of NFS service. Consideration should also be given to the integrity and privacy of this NFS request. These specific issues are discussed as part of the section on "RPC and Security Flavor". -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + For reasons of reduced administration overhead, better performance + and/or reduction of CPU utilization, users of NFS version 4 + implementations may choose to not use security mechanisms that enable + integrity protection on each remote procedure call and response. The + use of mechanisms without integrity leaves the customer vulnerable to + an attacker in between the NFS client and server that modifies the + RPC request and/or the response. While implementations are free to + provide the option to use weaker security mechanisms, there are two + operations in particular that warrant the implementation overriding + user choices. + + The first such operation is SECINFO. It is recommended that the + client issue the SECINFO call such that it is protected with a + security flavor that has integrity protection, such as RPCSEC_GSS + with a security triple that uses either rpc_gss_svc_integrity or + rpc_gss_svc_privacy (rpc_gss_svc_privacy includes integrity + protection) service. Without integrity protection encapsulating + SECINFO and therefore its results, an attacker in the middle could + modify results such that the client might select a weaker algorithm + in the set allowed by server, making the client and/or server + vulnerable to further attacks. + + The second operation that should definitely use integrity protection + is any GETATTR for the fs_locations attribute. The attack has two + steps. First the attacker modifies the unprotected results of some + operation to return NFS4ERR_MOVED. Second, when the client follows up + with a GETATTR for the fs_locations attribute, the attacker modifies + the results to cause the client migrate its traffic to a server + controlled by the attacker. + + Because the operations SETCLIENTID/SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM are + responsible for the release of client state, it is imperative that + the principal used for these operations is checked against and match + the previous use of these operations. See the section "Client ID" + for further discussion. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 17. IANA Considerations 17.1. Named Attribute Definition The NFS version 4 protocol provides for the association of named attributes to files. The name space identifiers for these attributes are defined as string names. The protocol does not define the specific assignment of the name space for these file attributes; the application developer or system vendor is allowed to define the attribute, its semantics, and the associated name. Even though this name space will not be specifically controlled to prevent collisions, - the application developer or system vendor is strongly encouraged to - provide the name assignment and associated semantics for attributes - via an Informational RFC. This will provide for interoperability - where common interests exist. + the application developer or system vendor is strongly encouraged + register its named attributes with IANA, and provide the name + assignment and associated semantics for attributes via an + Informational RFC. This will provide for interoperability where + common interests exist. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +17.2. ONC RPC Network Identifiers (netids) + + The section "Structured Data Types" discussed the r_netid field and + the corresponding r_addr field of a clientaddr4 structure. There + should be a registry at IANA for netids and the corresponding + universal address format corresponding to the native address format + for the transport represent by a a netid. + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 18. RPC definition file /* * Copyright (C) The Internet Society (1998,1999,2000,2001,2002). * All Rights Reserved. */ /* * nfs4_prot.x * */ - %#pragma ident "@(#)nfs4_prot.x 1.109" + %#pragma ident "@(#)nfs4_prot.x 1.117" /* * Basic typedefs for RFC 1832 data type definitions */ typedef int int32_t; typedef unsigned int uint32_t; typedef hyper int64_t; typedef unsigned hyper uint64_t; /* @@ -9431,84 +10986,91 @@ NF4SOCK = 6, /* Special File - socket */ NF4FIFO = 7, /* Special File - fifo */ NF4ATTRDIR = 8, /* Attribute Directory */ NF4NAMEDATTR = 9 /* Named Attribute */ }; /* * Error status */ enum nfsstat4 { - NFS4_OK = 0, - NFS4ERR_PERM = 1, - NFS4ERR_NOENT = 2, - NFS4ERR_IO = 5, + NFS4_OK = 0, /* everything is okay */ + NFS4ERR_PERM = 1, /* caller not privileged */ + NFS4ERR_NOENT = 2, /* no such file/directory */ + NFS4ERR_IO = 5, /* hard I/O error */ -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - NFS4ERR_NXIO = 6, - NFS4ERR_ACCESS = 13, - NFS4ERR_EXIST = 17, - NFS4ERR_XDEV = 18, - NFS4ERR_NODEV = 19, - NFS4ERR_NOTDIR = 20, - NFS4ERR_ISDIR = 21, - NFS4ERR_INVAL = 22, - NFS4ERR_FBIG = 27, - NFS4ERR_NOSPC = 28, - NFS4ERR_ROFS = 30, - NFS4ERR_MLINK = 31, - NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG = 63, - NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY = 66, - NFS4ERR_DQUOT = 69, - NFS4ERR_STALE = 70, - NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE = 10001, - NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE = 10003, - NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP = 10004, - NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL = 10005, - NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT = 10006, - NFS4ERR_BADTYPE = 10007, - NFS4ERR_DELAY = 10008, + NFS4ERR_NXIO = 6, /* no such device */ + NFS4ERR_ACCESS = 13, /* access denied */ + NFS4ERR_EXIST = 17, /* file already exists */ + NFS4ERR_XDEV = 18, /* different filesystems */ + NFS4ERR_NODEV = 19, /* no such device */ + NFS4ERR_NOTDIR = 20, /* should be a directory */ + NFS4ERR_ISDIR = 21, /* should not be directory */ + NFS4ERR_INVAL = 22, /* invalid argument */ + NFS4ERR_FBIG = 27, /* file exceeds server max */ + NFS4ERR_NOSPC = 28, /* no space on filesystem */ + NFS4ERR_ROFS = 30, /* read-only filesystem */ + NFS4ERR_MLINK = 31, /* too many hard links */ + NFS4ERR_NAMETOOLONG = 63, /* name exceeds server max */ + NFS4ERR_NOTEMPTY = 66, /* directory not empty */ + NFS4ERR_DQUOT = 69, /* hard quota limit reached*/ + NFS4ERR_STALE = 70, /* file no longer exists */ + NFS4ERR_BADHANDLE = 10001,/* Illegal filehandle */ + NFS4ERR_BAD_COOKIE = 10003,/* READDIR cookie is stale */ + NFS4ERR_NOTSUPP = 10004,/* operation not supported */ + NFS4ERR_TOOSMALL = 10005,/* buffer too small */ + NFS4ERR_SERVERFAULT = 10006,/* undefined server error */ + NFS4ERR_BADTYPE = 10007,/* type invalide for CREATE*/ + NFS4ERR_DELAY = 10008,/* file "busy" - retry */ NFS4ERR_SAME = 10009,/* nverify says attrs same */ NFS4ERR_DENIED = 10010,/* lock unavailable */ NFS4ERR_EXPIRED = 10011,/* lock lease expired */ NFS4ERR_LOCKED = 10012,/* I/O failed due to lock */ NFS4ERR_GRACE = 10013,/* in grace period */ NFS4ERR_FHEXPIRED = 10014,/* file handle expired */ NFS4ERR_SHARE_DENIED = 10015,/* share reserve denied */ NFS4ERR_WRONGSEC = 10016,/* wrong security flavor */ NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE = 10017,/* clientid in use */ NFS4ERR_RESOURCE = 10018,/* resource exhaustion */ NFS4ERR_MOVED = 10019,/* filesystem relocated */ NFS4ERR_NOFILEHANDLE = 10020,/* current FH is not set */ NFS4ERR_MINOR_VERS_MISMATCH = 10021,/* minor vers not supp */ - NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID = 10022, - NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID = 10023, - NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID = 10024, - NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID = 10025, - NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID = 10026, + NFS4ERR_STALE_CLIENTID = 10022,/* server has rebooted */ + NFS4ERR_STALE_STATEID = 10023,/* server has rebooted */ + NFS4ERR_OLD_STATEID = 10024,/* state is out of sync */ + NFS4ERR_BAD_STATEID = 10025,/* incorrect stateid */ + NFS4ERR_BAD_SEQID = 10026,/* request is out of seq. */ NFS4ERR_NOT_SAME = 10027,/* verify - attrs not same */ - NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE = 10028, - NFS4ERR_SYMLINK = 10029, - NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC = 10030, - NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED = 10031, - NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP = 10032, - NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE = 10033, - NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD = 10034, - NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT = 10035, - NFS4ERR_BADXDR = 10036, - NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD = 10037, + NFS4ERR_LOCK_RANGE = 10028,/* lock range not supported*/ + NFS4ERR_SYMLINK = 10029,/* should be file/directory*/ + NFS4ERR_READDIR_NOSPC = 10030,/* response limit exceeded */ + NFS4ERR_LEASE_MOVED = 10031,/* some filesystem moved */ + NFS4ERR_ATTRNOTSUPP = 10032,/* recommended attr not sup*/ + NFS4ERR_NO_GRACE = 10033,/* reclaim outside of grace*/ + NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_BAD = 10034,/* reclaim error at server */ + NFS4ERR_RECLAIM_CONFLICT = 10035,/* conflict on reclaim */ + NFS4ERR_BADXDR = 10036,/* XDR decode failed */ + NFS4ERR_LOCKS_HELD = 10037,/* file lcoks held at CLOSE*/ -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 - NFS4ERR_OPENMODE = 10038, - NFS4ERR_BADOWNER = 10039 + NFS4ERR_OPENMODE = 10038,/* conflict in OPEN and I/O*/ + NFS4ERR_BADOWNER = 10039,/* owner translation bad */ + NFS4ERR_BADCHAR = 10040,/* utf-8 char not supported*/ + NFS4ERR_BADNAME = 10041,/* name not supported */ + NFS4ERR_BAD_RANGE = 10042,/* lock range not supported*/ + NFS4ERR_LOCK_NOTSUPP = 10043,/* no atomic up/downgrade */ + NFS4ERR_OP_ILLEGAL = 10044,/* undefined operation */ + NFS4ERR_DEADLOCK = 10045,/* file locking deadlock */ + NFS4ERR_FILE_OPEN = 10046 /* open file blocks op. */ }; /* * Basic data types */ typedef uint32_t bitmap4<>; typedef uint64_t offset4; typedef uint32_t count4; typedef uint64_t length4; typedef uint64_t clientid4; @@ -9538,29 +11100,28 @@ SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4 = 1 }; union settime4 switch (time_how4 set_it) { case SET_TO_CLIENT_TIME4: nfstime4 time; default: void; }; +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + /* * File access handle */ typedef opaque nfs_fh4; /* - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - * File attribute definitions */ /* * FSID structure for major/minor */ struct fsid4 { uint64_t major; uint64_t minor; }; @@ -9591,29 +11152,29 @@ const ACL4_SUPPORT_AUDIT_ACL = 0x00000004; const ACL4_SUPPORT_ALARM_ACL = 0x00000008; typedef uint32_t acetype4; /* * acetype4 values, others can be added as needed. */ const ACE4_ACCESS_ALLOWED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000000; const ACE4_ACCESS_DENIED_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000001; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + const ACE4_SYSTEM_AUDIT_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_SYSTEM_ALARM_ACE_TYPE = 0x00000003; /* * ACE flag */ - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - typedef uint32_t aceflag4; /* * ACE flag values */ const ACE4_FILE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000001; const ACE4_DIRECTORY_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000002; const ACE4_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT_ACE = 0x00000004; const ACE4_INHERIT_ONLY_ACE = 0x00000008; const ACE4_SUCCESSFUL_ACCESS_ACE_FLAG = 0x00000010; @@ -9644,30 +11205,30 @@ const ACE4_DELETE = 0x00010000; const ACE4_READ_ACL = 0x00020000; const ACE4_WRITE_ACL = 0x00040000; const ACE4_WRITE_OWNER = 0x00080000; const ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE = 0x00100000; /* * ACE4_GENERIC_READ -- defined as combination of * ACE4_READ_ACL | * ACE4_READ_DATA | + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + * ACE4_READ_ATTRIBUTES | * ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE */ const ACE4_GENERIC_READ = 0x00120081; /* - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - * ACE4_GENERIC_WRITE -- defined as combination of * ACE4_READ_ACL | * ACE4_WRITE_DATA | * ACE4_WRITE_ATTRIBUTES | * ACE4_WRITE_ACL | * ACE4_APPEND_DATA | * ACE4_SYNCHRONIZE */ const ACE4_GENERIC_WRITE = 0x00160106; @@ -9684,42 +11245,58 @@ * Access Control Entry definition */ struct nfsace4 { acetype4 type; aceflag4 flag; acemask4 access_mask; utf8string who; }; /* + * Field definitions for the fattr4_mode attribute + */ + const MODE4_SUID = 0x800; /* set user id on execution */ + const MODE4_SGID = 0x400; /* set group id on execution */ + const MODE4_SVTX = 0x200; /* save text even after use */ + const MODE4_RUSR = 0x100; /* read permission: owner */ + const MODE4_WUSR = 0x080; /* write permission: owner */ + const MODE4_XUSR = 0x040; /* execute permission: owner */ + const MODE4_RGRP = 0x020; /* read permission: group */ + const MODE4_WGRP = 0x010; /* write permission: group */ + const MODE4_XGRP = 0x008; /* execute permission: group */ + const MODE4_ROTH = 0x004; /* read permission: other */ + const MODE4_WOTH = 0x002; /* write permission: other */ + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + const MODE4_XOTH = 0x001; /* execute permission: other */ + + /* * Special data/attribute associated with * file types NF4BLK and NF4CHR. */ struct specdata4 { - uint32_t specdata1; - uint32_t specdata2; + uint32_t specdata1; /* major device number */ + uint32_t specdata2; /* minor device number */ }; /* * Values for fattr4_fh_expire_type */ const FH4_PERSISTENT = 0x00000000; const FH4_NOEXPIRE_WITH_OPEN = 0x00000001; const FH4_VOLATILE_ANY = 0x00000002; const FH4_VOL_MIGRATION = 0x00000004; const FH4_VOL_RENAME = 0x00000008; typedef bitmap4 fattr4_supported_attrs; typedef nfs_ftype4 fattr4_type; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - typedef uint32_t fattr4_fh_expire_type; typedef changeid4 fattr4_change; typedef uint64_t fattr4_size; typedef bool fattr4_link_support; typedef bool fattr4_symlink_support; typedef bool fattr4_named_attr; typedef fsid4 fattr4_fsid; typedef bool fattr4_unique_handles; typedef uint32_t fattr4_lease_time; typedef nfsstat4 fattr4_rdattr_error; @@ -9735,76 +11312,80 @@ typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_avail; typedef nfs_fh4 fattr4_filehandle; typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_free; typedef uint64_t fattr4_files_total; typedef fs_locations4 fattr4_fs_locations; typedef bool fattr4_hidden; typedef bool fattr4_homogeneous; typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxfilesize; typedef uint32_t fattr4_maxlink; typedef uint32_t fattr4_maxname; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxread; typedef uint64_t fattr4_maxwrite; typedef utf8string fattr4_mimetype; typedef mode4 fattr4_mode; + typedef uint64_t fattr4_mounted_on_fileid; typedef bool fattr4_no_trunc; typedef uint32_t fattr4_numlinks; typedef utf8string fattr4_owner; typedef utf8string fattr4_owner_group; typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_avail_hard; typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_avail_soft; typedef uint64_t fattr4_quota_used; typedef specdata4 fattr4_rawdev; typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_avail; typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_free; typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_total; typedef uint64_t fattr4_space_used; typedef bool fattr4_system; typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_access; typedef settime4 fattr4_time_access_set; typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_backup; typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_create; typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_delta; typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_metadata; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - typedef nfstime4 fattr4_time_modify; typedef settime4 fattr4_time_modify_set; /* * Mandatory Attributes */ const FATTR4_SUPPORTED_ATTRS = 0; const FATTR4_TYPE = 1; const FATTR4_FH_EXPIRE_TYPE = 2; const FATTR4_CHANGE = 3; const FATTR4_SIZE = 4; const FATTR4_LINK_SUPPORT = 5; const FATTR4_SYMLINK_SUPPORT = 6; const FATTR4_NAMED_ATTR = 7; const FATTR4_FSID = 8; const FATTR4_UNIQUE_HANDLES = 9; const FATTR4_LEASE_TIME = 10; const FATTR4_RDATTR_ERROR = 11; + const FATTR4_FILEHANDLE = 19; /* * Recommended Attributes */ const FATTR4_ACL = 12; const FATTR4_ACLSUPPORT = 13; const FATTR4_ARCHIVE = 14; const FATTR4_CANSETTIME = 15; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + const FATTR4_CASE_INSENSITIVE = 16; const FATTR4_CASE_PRESERVING = 17; const FATTR4_CHOWN_RESTRICTED = 18; - const FATTR4_FILEHANDLE = 19; const FATTR4_FILEID = 20; const FATTR4_FILES_AVAIL = 21; const FATTR4_FILES_FREE = 22; const FATTR4_FILES_TOTAL = 23; const FATTR4_FS_LOCATIONS = 24; const FATTR4_HIDDEN = 25; const FATTR4_HOMOGENEOUS = 26; const FATTR4_MAXFILESIZE = 27; const FATTR4_MAXLINK = 28; const FATTR4_MAXNAME = 29; @@ -9812,50 +11393,51 @@ const FATTR4_MAXWRITE = 31; const FATTR4_MIMETYPE = 32; const FATTR4_MODE = 33; const FATTR4_NO_TRUNC = 34; const FATTR4_NUMLINKS = 35; const FATTR4_OWNER = 36; const FATTR4_OWNER_GROUP = 37; const FATTR4_QUOTA_AVAIL_HARD = 38; const FATTR4_QUOTA_AVAIL_SOFT = 39; const FATTR4_QUOTA_USED = 40; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - const FATTR4_RAWDEV = 41; const FATTR4_SPACE_AVAIL = 42; const FATTR4_SPACE_FREE = 43; const FATTR4_SPACE_TOTAL = 44; const FATTR4_SPACE_USED = 45; const FATTR4_SYSTEM = 46; const FATTR4_TIME_ACCESS = 47; const FATTR4_TIME_ACCESS_SET = 48; const FATTR4_TIME_BACKUP = 49; const FATTR4_TIME_CREATE = 50; const FATTR4_TIME_DELTA = 51; const FATTR4_TIME_METADATA = 52; const FATTR4_TIME_MODIFY = 53; const FATTR4_TIME_MODIFY_SET = 54; + const FATTR4_MOUNTED_ON_FILEID = 55; typedef opaque attrlist4<>; /* * File attribute container */ struct fattr4 { bitmap4 attrmask; attrlist4 attr_vals; }; /* * Change info for the client + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + */ struct change_info4 { bool atomic; changeid4 before; changeid4 after; }; struct clientaddr4 { /* see struct rpcb in RFC 1833 */ string r_netid<>; /* network id */ @@ -9866,23 +11448,20 @@ * Callback program info as provided by the client */ struct cb_client4 { uint32_t cb_program; clientaddr4 cb_location; }; /* * Stateid */ - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct stateid4 { uint32_t seqid; opaque other[12]; }; /* * Client ID */ struct nfs_client_id4 { verifier4 verifier; @@ -9897,20 +11476,23 @@ struct lock_owner4 { clientid4 clientid; opaque owner; }; enum nfs_lock_type4 { READ_LT = 1, WRITE_LT = 2, READW_LT = 3, /* blocking read */ WRITEW_LT = 4 /* blocking write */ + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + }; /* * ACCESS: Check access permission */ const ACCESS4_READ = 0x00000001; const ACCESS4_LOOKUP = 0x00000002; const ACCESS4_MODIFY = 0x00000004; const ACCESS4_EXTEND = 0x00000008; const ACCESS4_DELETE = 0x00000010; @@ -9921,30 +11503,27 @@ uint32_t access; }; struct ACCESS4resok { uint32_t supported; uint32_t access; }; union ACCESS4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - ACCESS4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* - * CLOSE: Close a file and release share locks + * CLOSE: Close a file and release share reservations */ struct CLOSE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: object */ seqid4 seqid; stateid4 open_stateid; }; union CLOSE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: stateid4 open_stateid; @@ -9952,20 +11531,23 @@ void; }; /* * COMMIT: Commit cached data on server to stable storage */ struct COMMIT4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ offset4 offset; count4 count; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + }; struct COMMIT4resok { verifier4 writeverf; }; union COMMIT4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: COMMIT4resok resok4; default: @@ -9975,23 +11557,20 @@ /* * CREATE: Create a non-regular file */ union createtype4 switch (nfs_ftype4 type) { case NF4LNK: linktext4 linkdata; case NF4BLK: case NF4CHR: specdata4 devdata; case NF4SOCK: - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - case NF4FIFO: case NF4DIR: void; default: void; /* server should return NFS4ERR_BADTYPE */ }; struct CREATE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory for creation */ createtype4 objtype; @@ -10006,20 +11585,23 @@ union CREATE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: CREATE4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* * DELEGPURGE: Purge Delegations Awaiting Recovery + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + */ struct DELEGPURGE4args { clientid4 clientid; }; struct DELEGPURGE4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* @@ -10030,23 +11612,20 @@ stateid4 deleg_stateid; }; struct DELEGRETURN4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* * GETATTR: Get file attributes */ - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct GETATTR4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory or file */ bitmap4 attr_request; }; struct GETATTR4resok { fattr4 obj_attributes; }; union GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { @@ -10061,20 +11640,23 @@ */ struct GETFH4resok { nfs_fh4 object; }; union GETFH4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: GETFH4resok resok4; default: void; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + }; /* * LINK: Create link to an object */ struct LINK4args { /* SAVED_FH: source object */ /* CURRENT_FH: target directory */ component4 newname; }; @@ -10085,23 +11667,20 @@ union LINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: LINK4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* * For LOCK, transition from open_owner to new lock_owner - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - */ struct open_to_lock_owner4 { seqid4 open_seqid; stateid4 open_stateid; seqid4 lock_seqid; lock_owner4 lock_owner; }; /* * For LOCK, existing lock_owner continues to request file locks @@ -10116,20 +11695,23 @@ open_to_lock_owner4 open_owner; case FALSE: exist_lock_owner4 lock_owner; }; /* * LOCK/LOCKT/LOCKU: Record lock management */ struct LOCK4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + nfs_lock_type4 locktype; bool reclaim; offset4 offset; length4 length; locker4 locker; }; struct LOCK4denied { offset4 offset; length4 length; @@ -10140,23 +11722,20 @@ struct LOCK4resok { stateid4 lock_stateid; }; union LOCK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: LOCK4resok resok4; case NFS4ERR_DENIED: LOCK4denied denied; default: - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - void; }; struct LOCKT4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ nfs_lock_type4 locktype; offset4 offset; length4 length; lock_owner4 owner; }; @@ -10172,20 +11751,22 @@ struct LOCKU4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ nfs_lock_type4 locktype; seqid4 seqid; stateid4 lock_stateid; offset4 offset; length4 length; }; +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + union LOCKU4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: stateid4 lock_stateid; default: void; }; /* * LOOKUP: Lookup filename */ @@ -10195,23 +11776,20 @@ }; struct LOOKUP4res { /* CURRENT_FH: object */ nfsstat4 status; }; /* * LOOKUPP: Lookup parent directory */ - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct LOOKUPP4res { /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ nfsstat4 status; }; /* * NVERIFY: Verify attributes different */ struct NVERIFY4args { /* CURRENT_FH: object */ @@ -10227,20 +11805,23 @@ */ enum createmode4 { UNCHECKED4 = 0, GUARDED4 = 1, EXCLUSIVE4 = 2 }; union createhow4 switch (createmode4 mode) { case UNCHECKED4: case GUARDED4: + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + fattr4 createattrs; case EXCLUSIVE4: verifier4 createverf; }; enum opentype4 { OPEN4_NOCREATE = 0, OPEN4_CREATE = 1 }; @@ -10251,22 +11832,20 @@ void; }; /* Next definitions used for OPEN delegation */ enum limit_by4 { NFS_LIMIT_SIZE = 1, NFS_LIMIT_BLOCKS = 2 /* others as needed */ }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct nfs_modified_limit4 { uint32_t num_blocks; uint32_t bytes_per_block; }; union nfs_space_limit4 switch (limit_by4 limitby) { /* limit specified as file size */ case NFS_LIMIT_SIZE: uint64_t filesize; /* limit specified by number of blocks */ @@ -10281,20 +11860,23 @@ const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_WRITE = 0x00000002; const OPEN4_SHARE_ACCESS_BOTH = 0x00000003; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_NONE = 0x00000000; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_READ = 0x00000001; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_WRITE = 0x00000002; const OPEN4_SHARE_DENY_BOTH = 0x00000003; enum open_delegation_type4 { OPEN_DELEGATE_NONE = 0, + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + OPEN_DELEGATE_READ = 1, OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE = 2 }; enum open_claim_type4 { CLAIM_NULL = 0, CLAIM_PREVIOUS = 1, CLAIM_DELEGATE_CUR = 2, CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV = 3 }; @@ -10305,22 +11887,20 @@ }; union open_claim4 switch (open_claim_type4 claim) { /* * No special rights to file. Ordinary OPEN of the specified file. */ case CLAIM_NULL: /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ component4 file; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - /* * Right to the file established by an open previous to server * reboot. File identified by filehandle obtained at that time * rather than by name. */ case CLAIM_PREVIOUS: /* CURRENT_FH: file being reclaimed */ open_delegation_type4 delegate_type; /* @@ -10335,20 +11915,23 @@ * instance of the client. File is specified by name. */ case CLAIM_DELEGATE_PREV: /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ component4 file_delegate_prev; }; /* * OPEN: Open a file, potentially receiving an open delegation */ + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + struct OPEN4args { seqid4 seqid; uint32_t share_access; uint32_t share_deny; open_owner4 owner; openflag4 openhow; open_claim4 claim; }; struct open_read_delegation4 { @@ -10359,23 +11942,20 @@ (CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */ nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't need an ACCESS call to open for read */ }; struct open_write_delegation4 { stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for delegation */ bool recall; /* Pre-recalled flag for delegations obtained - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - by reclaim (CLAIM_PREVIOUS) */ nfs_space_limit4 space_limit; /* Defines condition that the client must check to determine whether the file needs to be flushed to the server on close. */ nfsace4 permissions; /* Defines users who don't need an ACCESS call as @@ -10389,23 +11969,24 @@ void; case OPEN_DELEGATE_READ: open_read_delegation4 read; case OPEN_DELEGATE_WRITE: open_write_delegation4 write; }; /* * Result flags */ - /* Mandatory locking is in effect for this file. */ - const OPEN4_RESULT_MLOCK = 0x00000001; /* Client must confirm open */ + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + const OPEN4_RESULT_CONFIRM = 0x00000002; /* Type of file locking behavior at the server */ const OPEN4_RESULT_LOCKTYPE_POSIX = 0x00000004; struct OPEN4resok { stateid4 stateid; /* Stateid for open */ change_info4 cinfo; /* Directory Change Info */ uint32_t rflags; /* Result flags */ bitmap4 attrset; /* attribute set for create*/ open_delegation4 delegation; /* Info on any open @@ -10414,23 +11995,20 @@ union OPEN4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: /* CURRENT_FH: opened file */ OPEN4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - * OPENATTR: open named attributes directory */ struct OPENATTR4args { /* CURRENT_FH: object */ bool createdir; }; struct OPENATTR4res { /* CURRENT_FH: named attr directory */ nfsstat4 status; @@ -10447,20 +12025,23 @@ struct OPEN_CONFIRM4resok { stateid4 open_stateid; }; union OPEN_CONFIRM4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: OPEN_CONFIRM4resok resok4; default: void; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + }; /* * OPEN_DOWNGRADE: downgrade the access/deny for a file */ struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: opened file */ stateid4 open_stateid; seqid4 seqid; uint32_t share_access; @@ -10469,23 +12050,20 @@ struct OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok { stateid4 open_stateid; }; union OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res switch(nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4resok resok4; default: void; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - }; /* * PUTFH: Set current filehandle */ struct PUTFH4args { nfs_fh4 object; }; struct PUTFH4res { @@ -10502,20 +12080,22 @@ }; /* * PUTROOTFH: Set root filehandle */ struct PUTROOTFH4res { /* CURRENT_FH: root fh */ nfsstat4 status; }; +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + /* * READ: Read from file */ struct READ4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ stateid4 stateid; offset4 offset; count4 count; }; @@ -10524,22 +12104,20 @@ opaque data<>; }; union READ4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: READ4resok resok4; default: void; }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - /* * READDIR: Read directory */ struct READDIR4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ nfs_cookie4 cookie; verifier4 cookieverf; count4 dircount; count4 maxcount; bitmap4 attr_request; @@ -10555,20 +12133,22 @@ struct dirlist4 { entry4 *entries; bool eof; }; struct READDIR4resok { verifier4 cookieverf; dirlist4 reply; }; +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + union READDIR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: READDIR4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* * READLINK: Read symbolic link */ @@ -10576,22 +12156,20 @@ linktext4 link; }; union READLINK4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: READLINK4resok resok4; default: void; }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - /* * REMOVE: Remove filesystem object */ struct REMOVE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ component4 target; }; struct REMOVE4resok { change_info4 cinfo; @@ -10608,20 +12186,23 @@ * RENAME: Rename directory entry */ struct RENAME4args { /* SAVED_FH: source directory */ component4 oldname; /* CURRENT_FH: target directory */ component4 newname; }; struct RENAME4resok { + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + change_info4 source_cinfo; change_info4 target_cinfo; }; union RENAME4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: RENAME4resok resok4; default: void; }; @@ -10630,22 +12211,20 @@ * RENEW: Renew a Lease */ struct RENEW4args { clientid4 clientid; }; struct RENEW4res { nfsstat4 status; }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - /* * RESTOREFH: Restore saved filehandle */ struct RESTOREFH4res { /* CURRENT_FH: value of saved fh */ nfsstat4 status; }; /* @@ -10662,20 +12241,23 @@ struct SECINFO4args { /* CURRENT_FH: directory */ component4 name; }; /* * From RFC 2203 */ enum rpc_gss_svc_t { RPC_GSS_SVC_NONE = 1, + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + RPC_GSS_SVC_INTEGRITY = 2, RPC_GSS_SVC_PRIVACY = 3 }; struct rpcsec_gss_info { sec_oid4 oid; qop4 qop; rpc_gss_svc_t service; }; @@ -10684,23 +12266,20 @@ case RPCSEC_GSS: rpcsec_gss_info flavor_info; default: void; }; typedef secinfo4 SECINFO4resok<>; union SECINFO4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - SECINFO4resok resok4; default: void; }; /* * SETATTR: Set attributes */ struct SETATTR4args { /* CURRENT_FH: target object */ @@ -10717,45 +12296,47 @@ * SETCLIENTID */ struct SETCLIENTID4args { nfs_client_id4 client; cb_client4 callback; uint32_t callback_ident; }; struct SETCLIENTID4resok { clientid4 clientid; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + + verifier4 setclientid_confirm; }; union SETCLIENTID4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: SETCLIENTID4resok resok4; case NFS4ERR_CLID_INUSE: clientaddr4 client_using; default: void; }; struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args { clientid4 clientid; + verifier4 setclientid_confirm; }; struct SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* * VERIFY: Verify attributes same */ - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct VERIFY4args { /* CURRENT_FH: object */ fattr4 obj_attributes; }; struct VERIFY4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* @@ -10770,20 +12351,23 @@ struct WRITE4args { /* CURRENT_FH: file */ stateid4 stateid; offset4 offset; stable_how4 stable; opaque data<>; }; struct WRITE4resok { count4 count; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + stable_how4 committed; verifier4 writeverf; }; union WRITE4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: WRITE4resok resok4; default: void; }; @@ -10793,24 +12377,28 @@ */ struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args { lock_owner4 lock_owner; }; struct RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* - * Operation arrays - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + * ILLEGAL: Response for illegal operation numbers + */ + struct ILLEGAL4res { + nfsstat4 status; + }; + /* + * Operation arrays */ enum nfs_opnum4 { OP_ACCESS = 3, OP_CLOSE = 4, OP_COMMIT = 5, OP_CREATE = 6, OP_DELEGPURGE = 7, OP_DELEGRETURN = 8, OP_GETATTR = 9, @@ -10818,84 +12406,89 @@ OP_LINK = 11, OP_LOCK = 12, OP_LOCKT = 13, OP_LOCKU = 14, OP_LOOKUP = 15, OP_LOOKUPP = 16, OP_NVERIFY = 17, OP_OPEN = 18, OP_OPENATTR = 19, OP_OPEN_CONFIRM = 20, + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE = 21, OP_PUTFH = 22, OP_PUTPUBFH = 23, OP_PUTROOTFH = 24, OP_READ = 25, OP_READDIR = 26, OP_READLINK = 27, OP_REMOVE = 28, OP_RENAME = 29, OP_RENEW = 30, OP_RESTOREFH = 31, OP_SAVEFH = 32, OP_SECINFO = 33, OP_SETATTR = 34, OP_SETCLIENTID = 35, OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM = 36, OP_VERIFY = 37, OP_WRITE = 38, - OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER = 39 + OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER = 39, + OP_ILLEGAL = 10044 }; union nfs_argop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 argop) { case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4args opaccess; case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4args opclose; case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4args opcommit; case OP_CREATE: CREATE4args opcreate; case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4args opdelegpurge; case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4args opdelegreturn; case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4args opgetattr; case OP_GETFH: void; case OP_LINK: LINK4args oplink; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - case OP_LOCK: LOCK4args oplock; case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4args oplockt; case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4args oplocku; case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4args oplookup; case OP_LOOKUPP: void; case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4args opnverify; case OP_OPEN: OPEN4args opopen; case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4args opopenattr; case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4args opopen_confirm; case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4args opopen_downgrade; case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4args opputfh; case OP_PUTPUBFH: void; case OP_PUTROOTFH: void; case OP_READ: READ4args opread; case OP_READDIR: READDIR4args opreaddir; case OP_READLINK: void; case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4args opremove; case OP_RENAME: RENAME4args oprename; case OP_RENEW: RENEW4args oprenew; case OP_RESTOREFH: void; + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + case OP_SAVEFH: void; case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4args opsecinfo; case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4args opsetattr; case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4args opsetclientid; case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4args opsetclientid_confirm; case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4args opverify; case OP_WRITE: WRITE4args opwrite; case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4args oprelease_lockowner; + case OP_ILLEGAL: void; }; union nfs_resop4 switch (nfs_opnum4 resop){ case OP_ACCESS: ACCESS4res opaccess; case OP_CLOSE: CLOSE4res opclose; case OP_COMMIT: COMMIT4res opcommit; case OP_CREATE: CREATE4res opcreate; case OP_DELEGPURGE: DELEGPURGE4res opdelegpurge; case OP_DELEGRETURN: DELEGRETURN4res opdelegreturn; case OP_GETATTR: GETATTR4res opgetattr; @@ -10904,43 +12497,44 @@ case OP_LOCK: LOCK4res oplock; case OP_LOCKT: LOCKT4res oplockt; case OP_LOCKU: LOCKU4res oplocku; case OP_LOOKUP: LOOKUP4res oplookup; case OP_LOOKUPP: LOOKUPP4res oplookupp; case OP_NVERIFY: NVERIFY4res opnverify; case OP_OPEN: OPEN4res opopen; case OP_OPENATTR: OPENATTR4res opopenattr; case OP_OPEN_CONFIRM: OPEN_CONFIRM4res opopen_confirm; case OP_OPEN_DOWNGRADE: OPEN_DOWNGRADE4res opopen_downgrade; - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - case OP_PUTFH: PUTFH4res opputfh; case OP_PUTPUBFH: PUTPUBFH4res opputpubfh; case OP_PUTROOTFH: PUTROOTFH4res opputrootfh; case OP_READ: READ4res opread; case OP_READDIR: READDIR4res opreaddir; case OP_READLINK: READLINK4res opreadlink; case OP_REMOVE: REMOVE4res opremove; case OP_RENAME: RENAME4res oprename; case OP_RENEW: RENEW4res oprenew; case OP_RESTOREFH: RESTOREFH4res oprestorefh; case OP_SAVEFH: SAVEFH4res opsavefh; case OP_SECINFO: SECINFO4res opsecinfo; case OP_SETATTR: SETATTR4res opsetattr; case OP_SETCLIENTID: SETCLIENTID4res opsetclientid; case OP_SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM: SETCLIENTID_CONFIRM4res opsetclientid_confirm; case OP_VERIFY: VERIFY4res opverify; case OP_WRITE: WRITE4res opwrite; case OP_RELEASE_LOCKOWNER: RELEASE_LOCKOWNER4res + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + oprelease_lockowner; + case OP_ILLEGAL: ILLEGAL4res opillegal; }; struct COMPOUND4args { utf8string tag; uint32_t minorversion; nfs_argop4 argarray<>; }; struct COMPOUND4res { nfsstat4 status; @@ -10957,105 +12551,116 @@ NFSPROC4_NULL(void) = 0; COMPOUND4res NFSPROC4_COMPOUND(COMPOUND4args) = 1; } = 4; } = 100003; /* * NFS4 Callback Procedure Definitions and Program - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - */ /* * CB_GETATTR: Get Current Attributes */ struct CB_GETATTR4args { nfs_fh4 fh; bitmap4 attr_request; }; struct CB_GETATTR4resok { fattr4 obj_attributes; }; union CB_GETATTR4res switch (nfsstat4 status) { case NFS4_OK: CB_GETATTR4resok resok4; default: + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + void; }; /* * CB_RECALL: Recall an Open Delegation */ struct CB_RECALL4args { stateid4 stateid; bool truncate; nfs_fh4 fh; }; struct CB_RECALL4res { nfsstat4 status; }; /* + * CB_ILLEGAL: Response for illegal operation numbers + */ + struct CB_ILLEGAL4res { + nfsstat4 status; + }; + + /* * Various definitions for CB_COMPOUND */ enum nfs_cb_opnum4 { OP_CB_GETATTR = 3, - OP_CB_RECALL = 4 + OP_CB_RECALL = 4, + OP_CB_ILLEGAL = 10044 }; union nfs_cb_argop4 switch (unsigned argop) { case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4args opcbgetattr; case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4args opcbrecall; + case OP_CB_ILLEGAL: void; }; union nfs_cb_resop4 switch (unsigned resop){ case OP_CB_GETATTR: CB_GETATTR4res opcbgetattr; case OP_CB_RECALL: CB_RECALL4res opcbrecall; + case OP_CB_ILLEGAL: CB_ILLEGAL4res opcbillegal; }; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - struct CB_COMPOUND4args { utf8string tag; uint32_t minorversion; uint32_t callback_ident; nfs_cb_argop4 argarray<>; }; struct CB_COMPOUND4res { + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + nfsstat4 status; utf8string tag; nfs_cb_resop4 resarray<>; }; /* * Program number is in the transient range since the client * will assign the exact transient program number and provide * that to the server via the SETCLIENTID operation. */ program NFS4_CALLBACK { version NFS_CB { void CB_NULL(void) = 0; CB_COMPOUND4res CB_COMPOUND(CB_COMPOUND4args) = 1; } = 1; } = 0x40000000; -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 19. Bibliography [Floyd] S. Floyd, V. Jacobson, "The Synchronization of Periodic Routing Messages," IEEE/ACM Transactions on Networking, 2(2), pp. 122-136, April 1994. [Gray] C. Gray, D. Cheriton, "Leases: An Efficient Fault-Tolerant Mechanism @@ -11089,21 +12694,21 @@ Association, Berkeley, CA, January 1991. Describes performance work in tuning the 4.3BSD Reno NFS implementation. Describes performance improvement (reduced CPU loading) through elimination of data copies. [Mogul] Mogul, Jeffrey C., "A Recovery Protocol for Spritely NFS," USENIX File System Workshop Proceedings, Ann Arbor, MI, USENIX Association, Berkeley, CA, May 1992. Second paper on Spritely NFS proposes a lease-based scheme for recovering state of consistency protocol. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 [Nowicki] Nowicki, Bill, "Transport Issues in the Network File System," ACM SIGCOMM newsletter Computer Communication Review, April 1989. A brief description of the basis for the dynamic retransmission work. [Pawlowski] Pawlowski, Brian, Ron Hixon, Mark Stein, Joseph Tumminaro, "Network Computing in the UNIX and IBM Mainframe Environment," Uniforum `89 Conf. Proc., (1989) Description of an NFS server implementation for @@ -11136,140 +12741,178 @@ [RFC1831] Srinivasan, R., "RPC: Remote Procedure Call Protocol Specification Version 2", RFC1831, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1831.txt [RFC1832] Srinivasan, R., "XDR: External Data Representation Standard", RFC1832, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1832.txt [RFC1833] Srinivasan, R., "Binding Protocols for ONC RPC Version 2", RFC1833, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1833.txt + [RFC1884] + Hinden, R., Deering, S., "IP Version 6 Addressing Architecture", + RFC1884, December 1995. + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1884.txt + + [RFC1964] + Linn, J., "The Kerberos Version 5 GSS-API Mechanism", RFC1964, + OpenVision Technologies, June 1996. + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc1964.txt + [RFC2025] Adams, C., "The Simple Public-Key GSS-API Mechanism (SPKM)", RFC2025, Bell-Northern Research, October 1996. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2026.txt [RFC2054] Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Client Specification", RFC2054, Sun Microsystems, Inc., October 1996 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2054.txt [RFC2055] Callaghan, B., "WebNFS Server Specification", RFC2055, Sun Microsystems, Inc., October 1996 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2055.txt - [RFC2078] - Linn, J., "Generic Security Service Application Program Interface, - Version 2", RFC2078, OpenVision Technologies, January 1997. + [RFC2119] + Bradner, S., "Key words for use in RFCs to Indicate Requirement + Levels", RFC2119, Harvard University, March 1997 - http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2078.txt + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2119.txt + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 [RFC2152] Goldsmith, D., "UTF-7 A Mail-Safe Transformation Format of Unicode", RFC2152, Apple Computer, Inc., May 1997 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2152.txt [RFC2203] Eisler, M., Chiu, A., Ling, L., "RPCSEC_GSS Protocol Specification", RFC2203, Sun Microsystems, Inc., August 1995. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2203.txt -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 + [RFC2224] + Callaghan, B., "NFS URL Scheme", RFC2224, Sun Microsystems, Inc., + October 1997 + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2224.txt [RFC2277] Alvestrand, H., "IETF Policy on Character Sets and Languages", RFC2277, UNINETT, January 1998. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2277.txt [RFC2279] Yergeau, F., "UTF-8, a transformation format of ISO 10646", RFC2279, Alis Technologies, January 1998. http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2279.txt + [RFC2581] + Allman, M., Paxson, V., Stevens, W., "TCP Congestion Control", + RFC2581, April 1999. + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2581.txt + [RFC2623] Eisler, M., "NFS Version 2 and Version 3 Security Issues and the NFS Protocol's Use of RPCSEC_GSS and Kerberos V5", RFC2623, Sun Microsystems, June 1999 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2623.txt [RFC2624] Shepler, S., "NFS Version 4 Design Considerations", RFC2624, Sun + +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + Microsystems, June 1999 http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2624.txt + [RFC2743] + Linn, J., "Generic Security Service Application Program Interface, + Version 2, Update 1", RFC2743, RSA Laboratories, January 2000. + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2743.txt + + [RFC2755] + Chiu, A., Eisler, M., Callaghan, B., "Security Negotiation for + WebNFS" , RFC2755, Sun Microsystems, June 2000 + + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2847.txt + [RFC2847] Eisler, M., "LIPKEY - A Low Infrastructure Public Key Mechanism Using - SPKM", RFC2847, Sun Microsystems, June 2000 + SPKM", RFC2847, Zambeel, June 2000 - http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-cat-lipkey-03.txt + http://www.ietf.org/rfc/rfc2847.txt [Sandberg] Sandberg, R., D. Goldberg, S. Kleiman, D. Walsh, B. Lyon, "Design and Implementation of the Sun Network Filesystem," USENIX Conference Proceedings, USENIX Association, Berkeley, CA, Summer 1985. The basic paper describing the SunOS implementation of the NFS version 2 protocol, and discusses the goals, protocol specification and trade- offs. [Srinivasan] Srinivasan, V., Jeffrey C. Mogul, "Spritely NFS: Implementation and Performance of Cache Consistency Protocols", WRL Research Report 89/5, Digital Equipment Corporation Western Research Laboratory, 100 Hamilton Ave., Palo Alto, CA, 94301, May 1989. This paper analyzes the effect of applying a Sprite-like consistency protocol applied to standard NFS. The issues of recovery in a stateful environment are - -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 - covered in [Mogul]. [Unicode1] The Unicode Consortium, "The Unicode Standard, Version 3.0", Addison-Wesley Developers Press, Reading, MA, 2000. ISBN 0-201- 61633-5. More information available at: http://www.unicode.org/ +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 + [Unicode2] "Unsupported Scripts" Unicode, Inc., The Unicode Consortium, P.O. Box 700519, San Jose, CA 95710-0519 USA, September 1999 http://www.unicode.org/unicode/standard/unsupported.html [XNFS] The Open Group, Protocols for Interworking: XNFS, Version 3W, The Open Group, 1010 El Camino Real Suite 380, Menlo Park, CA 94025, ISBN 1-85912-184-5, February 1998. HTML version available: http://www.opengroup.org -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 20. Authors 20.1. Editor's Address Spencer Shepler Sun Microsystems, Inc. 7808 Moonflower Drive Austin, Texas 78750 @@ -11278,66 +12921,73 @@ 20.2. Authors' Addresses Carl Beame Hummingbird Ltd. E-mail: beame@bws.com Brent Callaghan Sun Microsystems, Inc. - 901 San Antonio Road - Palo Alto, CA 94303 + 17 Network Circle + Menlo Park, CA 94025 Phone: +1 650-786-5067 E-mail: brent.callaghan@sun.com Mike Eisler - 5565 Wilson Road + 5765 Chase Point Circle Colorado Springs, CO 80919 Phone: +1 719-599-9026 E-mail: mike@eisler.com David Noveck Network Appliance 375 Totten Pond Road Waltham, MA 02451 - Phone: +1 781-895-4949 + Phone: +1 781-768-5347 E-mail: dnoveck@netapp.com David Robinson Sun Microsystems, Inc. - 901 San Antonio Road - Palo Alto, CA 94303 + 5300 Riata Park Court + Austin, TX 78727 -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 Phone: +1 650-786-5088 E-mail: david.robinson@sun.com Robert Thurlow Sun Microsystems, Inc. - 901 San Antonio Road - Palo Alto, CA 94303 + 500 Eldorado Blvd. + Broomfield, CO 80021 Phone: +1 650-786-5096 E-mail: robert.thurlow@sun.com 20.3. Acknowledgements The author thanks and acknowledges: Neil Brown for his extensive review and comments of various drafts. + Andy Adamson, Jim Rees, and Kendrick Smith from the CITI organization + at the University of Michigan for their implementation efforts and + feedback on the protocol specification. Mike Kupfer for his review + of the file locking and ACL mechanisms. Alan Yoder for his input to + ACL mechanisms. Peter Astrand for his close review of the protocol + specification. Ran Atkinson for his constant reminder that user's do + matter. -Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol July 2002 +Draft Specification NFS version 4 Protocol August 2002 21. Full Copyright Statement "Copyright (C) The Internet Society (2000-2002). All Rights Reserved. This document and translations of it may be copied and furnished to others, and derivative works that comment on or otherwise explain it or assist in its implementation may be prepared, copied, published and distributed, in whole or in part, without restriction of any